TMS320C5517AZCHA20 [TI]

低功耗 C55x 定点 DSP- 高达 200MHz、USB、LCD 接口、FFT HWA、SAR ADC | ZCH | 196 | -40 to 85;
TMS320C5517AZCHA20
型号: TMS320C5517AZCHA20
厂家: TEXAS INSTRUMENTS    TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
描述:

低功耗 C55x 定点 DSP- 高达 200MHz、USB、LCD 接口、FFT HWA、SAR ADC | ZCH | 196 | -40 to 85

CD
文件: 总197页 (文件大小:1730K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Sample &  
Buy  
Support &  
Community  
Product  
Folder  
Tools &  
Software  
Technical  
Documents  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
TMS320C5517 定点数字信号处理器  
1 器件概述  
1.1 特性  
1
直接存储器存取 (DMA) 控制器  
四个 DMA,各配有四条通道  
三个 32 位通用 (GP) 定时器  
内核:  
高性能、低功耗 TMS320C55x 定点数字信号处  
理器  
13.33ns 5ns 指令周期时间  
75MHz 200MHz 时钟速率  
每个周期执行一条或两条指令  
一个可被选为安全装置或 GP  
计时选项,包括外部通用 I/O (GPIO) 时钟输  
两个多媒体卡和安全数字(eMMCMMC 和  
SD)接口  
两个乘积累积单元(每秒高达 4.5 亿次乘积累  
积运算 [MMACS])  
具有四芯片选择的串行端口接口 (SPI)  
主控和受控内部集成电路(I2C 总线)  
两个算术和逻辑单元 (ALU)  
三个内部数据或操作数读取总线和两个写入总  
线
三个用于数据传输的内部集成电路 (IC) 声音(I2S  
总线)模块  
C55x 器件软件兼容  
提供工业温度器件  
– 10 4 输入逐次逼近 (SAR) ADC  
– IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG)  
边界扫描兼容  
– 320KB 零等待状态片上 RAM:  
64KB 双访问 RAM (DARAM),  
8 4K x 16 位  
多达 26 GPIO 引脚(与其它功能多路复用)  
电源:  
256KB 单访问 RAM (SARAM),  
32 4K x 16 位  
四个内核隔离的电源域:模拟,RTCCPU 和外  
设,以及 USB  
四个 I/O 隔离电源域:RTC I/OEMIF  
I/OUSB PHY DVDDIO  
– 128KB 零等待状态片上 ROM  
4 16K x 16 位)  
紧密耦合快速傅里叶变换 (FFT) 硬件加速器  
– 1.05V 内核,1.8V2.75V 3.3V I/O  
– 1.3V 内核,1.8V2.75V 3.3V I/O  
– 1.4V 内核,1.8V2.75V 3.3V I/O  
外设:  
一个带有 16 位复用地址或数据总线的通用主机  
端口接口 (UHPI)  
时钟:  
具有三芯片选择的主控和受控多通道串行端口接  
(McSPI)  
具有晶振输入、独立时钟域和电源的实时时钟  
(RTC)  
主控和受控多通道经缓冲串行端口接口 (McBSP)  
软件可编程锁相环 (PLL) 时钟发生器  
引导加载程序:  
与下列器件有无缝接口连接的 16 位和 8 位外部  
存储器接口 (EMIF)  
8 位或 16 NAND 闪存,1 位或 4 位纠错码  
(ECC)  
8 位和 16 NOR 闪存  
异步静态 RAM (SRAM)  
片上 ROM 引导加载程序  
每个外设均支持不加密启动  
封装:  
– 196 端子无铅塑料 BGA(球栅阵列)封装(后缀  
ZCH),0.65mm 间距  
SDRAM mSDRAM1.82.75 3.3 V)  
– 3.84375M x 16 位最大可寻址外部存储器空  
间(SDRAM mSDRAM)  
通用异步收发器 (UART)  
带有集成型 2.0 高速物理层 (PHY) 的器件 USB  
端口,支持:  
USB 2.0 全速和高速器件  
1
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas  
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.  
English Data Sheet: SPRS727  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
1.2 应用  
数字双向无线电  
音频器件(例如:回声抵消耳机和免提电话或者无  
线耳机和麦克风)  
低功耗分析应用(例如:语音识别、视觉传感和指  
纹识别)  
便携式医疗设备  
语音应用(例如:录音机、免提套件和语音增强子  
系统)  
1.3 说明  
此器件是 TI C5000™ 定点数字信号处理器 (DSP) 产品系列的成员之一,专用于低运行和待机功耗应用。  
此器件基于 TMS320C55x DSP 生成 CPU 处理器内核。 C55x DSP 架构通过增加的并行性和重视节能来实  
现高性能和低功耗。 CPU 支持一个内部总线结构,此结构包含一条程序总线,一条 32 位读取总线和两条  
16 位数据读取总线,两条数据写入总线和专门用于外设和 DMA 操作的附加总线。 这些总线可实现在一个  
单周期内执行高达四次 16 位数据读取和两次 16 位数据写入的功能。 此器件还包含四个 DMA 控制器,每  
个控制器具有 4 条通道,可在无需 CPU 干预的情况下提供 16 条独立通道的数据传送。 每个 DMA 控制器  
在每周期可执行一个 32 位数据传输,此数据传输与 CPU 的运行并行并且不受 CPU 运行的影响。  
C55x CPU 提供两个乘积累积 (MAC) 单元,每个单元在一个单周期内能够进行 17 位乘以 17 位乘法以及 32  
位加法。 一个中央 40 位算术和逻辑单元 (ALU) 由一个附加 16 ALU 提供支持。 ALU 的使用受指令集控  
制,从而提供优化并行运行和功耗的能力。 C55x CPU 内的地址单元 (AU) 和数据单元 (DU) 对这些资源进  
行管理。  
C55x CPU 支持一个可变字节宽度指令集以改进代码密度。 指令单元 (IU) 执行从内部或外部存储器中的 32  
位程序取指令并且进行针对程序单元 (PU) 的指令排队。 PU 对指令进行解码,将任务指向地址单元和数据  
单元资源,并管理受到完全保护的管线。 跳转预测功能避免了条件指令执行时的管线冲刷。  
GPIO 功能与 10 SAR ADC 一起为状态、中断以及用于键盘和媒体接口的位 I/O 提供足够的引脚。  
通过以下器件为串行媒体提供支持:两个多媒体卡和安全数字(MMC SD)外设、三个内部 IC 声  
音(I2S 总线)模块、一个具有四芯片选择的串行端口接口 (SPI)、一个具有三芯片选择主控和受控多通道经  
缓冲串行端口接口 (McSPI)、一个多通道串行端口 (McBSP)、一个 I2C 多主控和受控接口以及一个通用异步  
收发器 (UART) 接口  
该器件的外设集包括一个外部存储器接口 (EMIF),此接口提供到异步存储器的无缝访问,例如  
EPROMNORNAND SRAM,以及高速、高密度存储器,例如同步 DRAM (SDRAM) 和移动 SDRAM  
(mSDRAM)。  
其它外设包括:一个可配置 16 位通用主机端口接口 (UHPI)、一条仅支持器件模式的高速通用串行总线  
(USB2.0)、一个实时时钟 (RTC)、三个通用定时器(其中一个可配置为看门狗定时器)和一个模拟锁相环  
(APLL) 时钟发生器。  
器件还包含一个紧密耦合 FFT 硬件加速器 - 支持 8 1024 点(2 的次幂)实值和复值 FFT,三个集成低压  
降稳压器 (LDO) - 为器件的各部分供电(需要外部电源的 CVDDRTC 除外):ANA_LDO SAR 和电源管理  
电路 (VDDA_ANA) 提供 1.3V 电压,DSP_LDO DSP 内核 (CVDD)(一旦检测到工作频率范围,便可由软件  
实时进行选择)提供 1.3V 1.05V 电压,USB_LDO USB 内核数字电路 (USB_VDD1P3) PHY 电路  
(USB_VDDA1P3) 提供 1.3V 电压。  
此器件由业界备受赞誉的 eXpressDSP™Code Composer Studio™ 集成开发环境 (IDE)、  
DSP/BIOS™、德州仪器 (TI) 的算法标准和一个大型第三方网络提供支持。 Code Composer Studio IDE 提  
供的代码生成工具包括一个 C 语言编译器和连接器、 RTDX™XDS100XDS510™XDS560™ 仿真  
器件驱动程序和评估模块。 此器件也受 C55x DSP 库以及芯片支持库的支持,此库特有超过 50 个基础软件  
内核(FIR 滤波器、IIR 滤波器、FFT 和多种数学函数)。  
器件信息  
封装  
部件号  
TMS320C5517AZCH20  
TMS320C5517AZCHA20  
封装尺寸  
NFBGA (196)  
NFBGA (196)  
10.0mm x 10.0mm  
10.0mm x 10.0mm  
2
器件概述  
版权 © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
1.4 功能方框图  
1-1可展示器件的功能框图  
DSP System  
C55x DSP CPU  
JTAG Interface  
FFT Hardware  
Accelerator  
Input  
Clocks  
PLL/Clock  
Generator  
64KB DARAM  
256KB SARAM  
128KB ROM  
Power  
Management  
Pin  
Multiplexing  
Switched Central Resource (SCR)  
Peripherals  
Interconnect  
App-Spec  
Serial Interfaces  
I2S  
(x3)  
10-Bit  
DMA  
(x4)  
I2C  
SPI  
McSPI  
UART  
SAR  
ADC  
McBSP  
Connectivity  
System  
Program/Data Storage  
USB 2.0  
PHY (HS)  
[DEVICE]  
NAND, NOR,  
SRAM, mSDRAM  
MMC/SD  
(x2)  
GP Timer  
(x2)  
GP Timer  
or WD  
LDOs  
UHPI  
RTC  
1-1. 功能方框图  
版权 © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
器件概述  
3
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
内容  
1
器件概.................................................... 1  
1.1 特性 ................................................... 1  
1.2 应用 ................................................... 2  
1.3 说明 ................................................... 2  
1.4 功能方框图............................................ 3  
修订历史记录............................................... 5  
Device Comparison ..................................... 6  
Terminal Configuration and Functions.............. 8  
4.1 Pin Diagram .......................................... 8  
4.2 Signal Descriptions ................................... 9  
4.3 Pin Multiplexing...................................... 51  
4.4 Connections for Unused Signals.................... 55  
Specifications ........................................... 56  
5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings......................... 56  
5.2 Recommended Operating Conditions............... 57  
5.3 Electrical Characteristics ............................ 58  
5.4 Handling Ratings.................................... 60  
5.5 Thermal Characteristics............................. 60  
5.6 Power-On Hours .................................... 60  
5.7 Timing and Switching Characteristics ............... 61  
Detailed Description.................................. 153  
6.1 CPU ................................................ 153  
6.2 Memory ............................................ 153  
6.3 Identification........................................ 181  
6.4 Boot Modes ........................................ 182  
Device and Documentation Support.............. 189  
7.1 Device Support..................................... 189  
7.2 Documentation Support............................ 191  
7.3 社区资源 ........................................... 191  
7.4 商标 ................................................ 191  
7.5 静电放电警告....................................... 191  
7.6 Glossary............................................ 191  
6
2
3
4
7
8
5
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable  
Information............................................. 192  
4
内容  
版权 © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
2 修订历史记录  
NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version.  
本数据手册修订历史记录强调了对之前版本的器件专用数据手册所做的技术更改。  
参见  
新增内容、修改内容和删除内容  
全局  
删除了 225MHz 器件信息。  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
修订历史记录  
5
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
3 Device Comparison  
Table 3-1 provides characteristics of the C5517 processor.  
The table shows significant features of the devices, including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the  
peripherals, the CPU frequency, and the package type with pin count. For more detailed information on  
the actual device part number and maximum device operating frequency, see Section 7.1.2, Device  
Nomenclature.  
Table 3-1. Characteristics of the Processor  
HARDWARE FEATURES  
C5517  
Asynchronous (8- and 16-bit bus width) SRAM,  
Flash (NOR, NAND),  
External Memory Interface (EMIF)  
SDRAM and Mobile SDRAM (16-bit bus width)(1)  
Peripherals  
Not all peripheral pins  
are available at the  
same time (for more  
detail, see Section 5).  
Four DMA controllers each with four channels,  
for a total of 16 channels  
DMA  
2 32-Bit General-Purpose (GP) Timers  
Additional Timer Configurable as  
1
a 32-Bit GP Timer or a  
Watchdog  
Timers  
Each timer is capable of selecting its clock source among the  
choices of:  
External from a GPIO pin  
System PLL  
12.00 MHz USB oscillator  
UART  
SPI  
1 (with RTS and CTS flow control)  
1 with 4 chip selects (Master only)  
1 (Master and Slave synchronous serial bus) with 3 chip selects  
1 (A configurable 16-bit multiplexed host port interface)  
1 (Master and Slave)  
McSPI  
UHPI  
I2C  
I2S  
3 (Two Channel, Full Duplex Communication)  
High- and Full-Speed Device (device mode only, host mode not  
supported)  
USB 2.0  
2 MMC and SD, 256 byte read and write buffer, max 50-MHz clock  
for SD cards, and signaling for DMA transfers  
MMC and SD  
McBSP  
1 (with transmit and receive)  
ADC (Successive Approximation [SAR])  
Real-Time Clock (RTC)  
FFT Hardware Accelerator  
1 (10-bit, 4-input, 16-µs conversion time)  
1 (Crystal Input, Separate Clock Domain and Power Supply)  
1 (Supports 8 to 1024-point 16-bit real and complex FFT)  
Up to 26 pins (with 1 Additional General-Purpose Output (XF) and 4  
General-Purpose Outputs for Use With SAR)  
General-Purpose Input/Output Port (GPIO)  
64KB On-Chip Dual-Access RAM (DARAM)  
256KB On-Chip Single-Access RAM (SARAM)  
128KB On-Chip Single-Access ROM (SAROM)  
On-Chip Memory  
Size and Organization  
JTAGID Register  
(Value is: 0x0B95 602F)  
JTAG BSDL_ID  
CPU Frequency  
see Figure 6-2  
1.05-V Core  
1.3-V Core  
1.4-V Core  
1.05-V Core  
1.3-V Core  
75 MHz  
175 MHz  
200 MHz  
13.3 ns  
MHz  
Cycle Time  
ns  
5.71 ns  
(1) For more information on SDRAM devices support, see Section 5.7.6, External Memory Interface (EMIF).  
Device Comparison  
6
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 3-1. Characteristics of the Processor (continued)  
HARDWARE FEATURES  
C5517  
5 ns  
1.4-V Core  
1.05 V (75 MHz)  
1.3 V (175 MHz)  
1.4 V (200 MHz)  
1.8 V, 2.75 V, 3.3 V  
Core (V)  
I/O (V)  
Voltage  
LDOs  
1.3 V or 1.05 V, 250 mA max current for the digital core (to be used  
only to supply CVDD).  
DSP_LDO  
Cannot be used to drive CVDD at the 1.4 V (>200 MHz) operating  
range.  
1.3 V, 4 mA max current for SAR and power management circuits  
ANA_LDO  
USB_LDO  
(to be used only to supply VDDA_ANA  
)
1.3 V, 25 mA max current for USB core digital and PHY circuits (to  
be used only to supply USB_VDD1P3 and USB_VDDA1P3  
TMS320C5517AZCH20  
)
Commercial Temperature (default)  
Industrial Temperature  
Phase Lock Loop  
Temperature  
TMS320C5517AZCHA20  
PLL  
1 (Software Programmable PLL)  
196-Terminal BGA (ZCH), 0.65-mm Pitch  
BGA Package  
10 x 10 mm  
Product Preview (PP),  
Advance Information (AI),  
or Production Data (PD)  
Product Status(2)  
PD  
(2) PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas  
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device Comparison  
7
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4 Terminal Configuration and Functions  
4.1 Pin Diagram  
Figure 4-1 shows the bottom view of the package pin assignments.  
I2S2_FS/  
I2S2_DX/  
UART_CTS/ UART_TXD/  
UHPI_HD[9]/ UHPI_HD[11]/ UHPI_HD[13]/ UHPI_HD[15]/  
SPI_CS0/  
UHPI_HCNTL0  
EM_DQM1/  
UHPI_HBE1  
SPI_RX/ GP[12]/  
UHPI_HD[0] UHPI_HD[2]  
GP[15]/ GP[17]/  
UHPI_HD[5] UHPI_HD[7]  
SPI_CS2/  
UHPI_HR_NW  
DV  
DV  
DV  
DDIO  
DDIO  
P
N
M
L
DDEMIF  
GP[19]/  
SPI_CS0  
GP[27]/  
SPI_TX  
GP[29]/  
I2S3_FS  
GP[31]/  
I2S3_DX  
I2S2_CLK/  
I2S2_RX/  
UART_RTS/ UART_RXD/  
UHPI_HD[8]/ UHPI_HD[10]/ UHPI_HD[12]/ UHPI_HD[14]/  
SPI_CLK/  
UHPI_HINT  
GP[21]/  
EM_A[15]  
EM_SDCKE/  
UHPI_HHWIL  
SPI_CS1/  
UHPI_HCNTL1  
SPI_CS3/  
SPI_TX/  
GP[13]/  
GP[14]/  
UHPI_HRDY UHPI_HD[1] UHPI_HD[3] UHPI_HD[4] UHPI_HD[6]  
GP[16]/  
DV  
DDIO  
GP[18]/  
SPI_CLK  
GP[20]/  
SPI_RX  
GP[28]/  
I2S3_CLK  
GP[30]/  
I2S3_RX  
MMC0_D1/ MMC0_CMD/  
MMC1_D1/ MMC1_CLK/ MMC1_D0/  
McSPI_SOMI/ McSPI_CLK/ McSPI_SIMO/  
I2S0_RX/ I2S0_FS/  
GP[3]/ GP[1]/  
McBSP_DR McBSP_FSX  
EMU1  
EM_SDCLK  
EM_D[12]  
EM_D[14]  
EM_CS3  
EM_D[4]  
EM_D[13]  
EM_A[14]  
EM_A[13]  
EM_D[5]  
XF  
TCK  
TDO  
TDI  
TRST  
GP[9]  
GP[6]  
GP[8]  
MMC0_D3/  
GP[5]/  
McBSP_  
MMC0_D0/ MMC0_CLK/  
MMC1_CMD/  
McSPI_CS0/  
GP[7]  
MMC0_D2/  
GP[4]/  
McBSP_FSR  
MMC1_D3/  
McSPI_CS2/  
GP[11]  
I2S0_DX/  
GP[2]/  
I2S0_CLK/  
GP[0]/  
McBSP_DX McBSP_CLKX  
EM_A[10]  
CV  
EMU0  
TMS  
DD  
CLKR_CLKS  
MMC1_D2/  
McSPI_CS1/  
GP[10]  
EM_A[12]/  
(CLE)  
EM_A[11]/  
(ALE)  
EM_WAIT3  
EM_D[6]  
DV  
V
V
CV  
V
SS  
DV  
V
SS  
K
J
DDIO  
SS  
SS  
SS  
SS  
DD  
DDIO  
GP[26]/  
EM_A[20]  
V
USB_VBUS USB_V  
USB_DM  
USB_DP  
USB_MXO  
LDOI  
EM_A[8]  
EM_WE  
EM_A[9]  
EM_A[7]  
EM_D[15]  
RSV1  
RSV2  
DD1P3  
SS1P3  
DV  
V
CV  
DD  
V
DDEMIF  
DDEMIF  
DDEMIF  
DDEMIF  
SS  
USB_  
USB_  
USB_  
USB_  
V
DDA3P3  
EM_WAIT5  
USB_V  
EM_D[7]  
EM_D[0]  
DV  
DV  
DV  
V
SS  
DV  
CV  
DD  
H
G
F
DDEMIF  
V
V
V
SSA1P3  
DDA1P3  
SSA3P3  
GP[24]/  
EM_A[18]  
GP[25]/  
EM_A[19]  
EM_WAIT4  
USB_V  
USB_R1  
USB_V  
USB_V  
USB_V  
DDOSC  
USB_MXI  
DDPLL  
SSREF  
SSPLL  
V
VSS  
SS  
GP[23]/  
EM_A[17]  
DV  
USB_V  
USB_LDOO  
LDOI  
EM_A[6]  
EM_D[2]  
EM_D[8]  
EM_D[10]  
EM_CS4  
EM_D[9]  
EM_OE  
SSOSC  
CVDD  
DV  
DDRTC  
V
SS  
V
SS  
DDIO  
GP[22]/  
EM_A[16]  
DSP_LDOO  
EM_D[1]  
WAKEUP  
DV  
INT1  
V
V
V
V
V
SS  
V
SS  
E
D
C
B
A
EM_A[2]  
EM_A[5]  
DDEMIF  
RESET  
INT0  
SS  
SS  
SS  
RTC_  
CLKOUT  
DSP_  
LDO_EN  
V
SSA_PLL  
EM_WAIT2  
GPAIN0  
RSV16  
RSV5  
RSV3  
RSV4  
EM_A[3]  
EM_A[1]  
EM_A[0]  
EM_D[3]  
EM_D[11]  
V
SS  
SS  
V
V
CV  
DDA_PLL  
EM_CS2  
DDRTC  
EM_A[4]  
CLK_SEL  
SSRTC  
GPAIN3  
GPAIN2  
RSV0  
LDOI  
V
V
SSA_ANA  
EM_BA[1]  
EM_CS0/  
UHPI_HDS1  
EM_DQM0/  
UHPI_HBE0  
RTC_XI  
SSA_ANA  
BG_CAP  
EM_R/W  
EM_SDCAS/  
UHPI_HCS  
SCL  
SDA  
EM_BA[0]  
EM_CS1/  
UHPI_HDS2  
RTC_XO  
V
ANA_LDOO  
GPAIN1  
DV  
EM_CS5  
DV  
EM_SDRAS/  
UHPI_HAS  
DDA_ANA  
CLKOUT  
CLKIN  
DDEMIF  
DDEMIF  
V
SS  
V
SS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to  
GP[21] when reset).  
Figure 4-1. Pin Diagram  
8
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2 Signal Descriptions  
The signal descriptions tables (Table 4-1 through Table 4-19) identify the external signal names, the  
associated pin (ball) numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type, whether the pin  
has any internal pullup or pulldown resistors or bus-holders, and a functional pin description. For more  
information on pin multiplexing, see Section 4.3, Pin Multiplexing.  
For proper device operation, external pullup and pulldown resistors may be required on some pins.  
Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors discusses situations where external pullup and  
pulldown resistors are required.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
9
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.2.1 Oscillator and PLL  
Table 4-1. Oscillator and PLL Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
DSP clock output signal. For debug purposes, the CLKOUT pin can be used to tap  
different clocks within the system clock generator. The CLKOUT_SRC bits in the  
CLKOUT Configuration Register (CLKOUTCR) can be used to specify the  
CLKOUT pin source. Additionally, the slew rate of the CLKOUT pin can be  
controlled by the Output Slew Rate Control Register (OSRCR) [0x1C16].  
The output driver of the CLKOUT pin is enabled and disabled through the  
CLKOFF bit in the CPU ST3_55 register. When disabled, the CLKOUT pin's  
output driver is placed in high-impedance (Hi-Z) and the IPD is automatically  
enabled. When enabled, the output driver of the pin is enabled and the IPD is  
automatically disabled.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
CLKOUT  
A7  
O/Z  
At reset the CLKOUT pin is enabled until the beginning of the boot sequence, at  
which point the on-chip Bootloader sets CLKOFF = 1 and the CLKOUT pin is  
disabled (Hi-Z). For more information on the ST3_55 register, see the C55x 3.0  
CPU Reference Guide [literature number: SWPU073].  
The IPD resistor on this pin is enabled when CLKOUT is in Hi-Z state.  
Input clock. This signal is used to input an external clock when the 12-MHz on-  
chip USB oscillator is not used as the system clock (CLK_SEL = 1).  
To appropriately set the various serial port frequencies during bootloading, the  
bootloader ROM code assumes CLKIN is running at the frequency indicated by  
the setting (see Section 6.4, Boot Modes, for the supported frequencies and  
details about the bootmode).  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
CLKIN  
A8  
I
The CLK_SEL pin selects the source for the system clock generator, with the  
options being the USB oscillator (CLK_SEL=0) or CLKIN (CLK_SEL=1) pins.  
When the CLK_SEL pin is low, this pin should be tied to ground (VSS). When  
CLK_SEL is high, this pin should be driven by an external clock source.  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD disabled at reset.  
Clock input select. This pin selects between the on-chip USB oscillator or CLKIN.  
0 = The on-chip USB oscillator is enabled at reset and drives the system clock  
generator. The CLKIN is ignored. Also, the USB LDOO is enabled at reset  
(USB_LDO_EN=1). The on-chip USB oscillator and USB_LDO cannot be disabled  
if CLK_SEL=0.  
CLK_SEL  
C7  
I
DVDDIO  
BH  
1 = CLKIN drives the system clock generator. The on-chip USB oscillator and USB  
LDO are disabled at reset (USB_LDO_EN=1), but they can be enabled by  
software.  
This pin is not allowed to change during device operation; it must be tied high or  
low at the board.  
1.3-V Analog PLL power supply for the system clock generator.  
see Section 5.2,  
ROC  
VDDA_PLL  
C10  
D9  
PWR  
GND  
This supply pin must not be connected to ANA_LDOO pin. The supply pin must be  
externally powered.  
see Section 5.2,  
ROC  
VSSA_PLL  
Analog PLL ground for the system clock generator.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
10  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.2 Real-Time Clock (RTC)  
Table 4-2. RTC Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NAME  
NO.  
Real-time clock oscillator output. This pin operates at the RTC core voltage,  
CVDDRTC, and supports a 32.768-kHz crystal.  
If the RTC oscillator is not used, it can be disabled by connecting RTC_XI to  
CVDDRTC and RTC_XO to ground (VSS).  
RTC_XO  
A9  
O/Z  
CVDDRTC  
DVDDRTC  
A voltage must still be applied to CVDDRTC by an external power source (see  
Section 5.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). None of the on-chip LDOs can  
power CVDDRTC  
.
Note: When RTC oscillator is disabled, the RTC registers (I/O address range  
1900h – 197Fh) are not accessible.  
Real-time clock oscillator input.  
If the RTC oscillator is not used, it can be disabled by connecting RTC_XI to  
CVDDRTC and RTC_XO to ground (VSS).  
A voltage must still be applied to CVDDRTC by an external power source (see  
Section 5.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). None of the on-chip LDOs can  
RTC_XI  
B9  
I
CVDDRTC  
DVDDRTC  
power CVDDRTC  
.
Note: When RTC oscillator is disabled, the RTC registers (I/O address range  
1900h – 197Fh) are not accessible.  
Real-time clock output pin. This pin operates at DVDDRTC voltage.  
The RTC_CLKOUT pin is enabled and disabled through the RTCCLKOUTEN bit in  
the RTC Power Management Register (RTCPMGT).  
RTC_CLKOUT  
WAKEUP  
D8  
E8  
O/Z  
DVDDRTC  
At reset, the RTC_CLKOUT pin is disabled (high-impedance [Hi-Z]).  
The active-high pin is used to WAKEUP the core from idle condition. This pin  
defaults to an input at CVDDRTC powerup, but can also be configured as an active-  
low open-drain output signal to wakeup an external device from an RTC alarm.  
I/O/Z  
DVDDRTC  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
11  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.2.3 RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG  
Table 4-3. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Signal Descriptions  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
TYPE(1) (2) OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
NO.  
RESET  
External Flag Output. XF is used for signaling other processors in  
multiprocessor configurations or XF can be used as a fast general-  
purpose output pin.  
XF is set high by the BSET XF instruction and XF is set low by the  
BCLR XF instruction or by writing to bit 13 of the ST1_55 register. For  
more information on the ST1_55 register, see the C55x 3.0 CPU  
Reference Guide [literature number: SWPU073].  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
XF  
M8  
O/Z  
For the XF pin's states after reset, see Figure 5-9, BootMode Latching.  
XF pin can manually configured as Hi-Z state only in boundary-scan  
mode. When this pin is in Hi-Z state, the IPU is enabled.  
The IPU on this pin is disabled at reset.  
Device reset. RESET causes the DSP to terminate execution and loads  
the program counter with the contents of the reset vector. When  
RESET is brought to a high level, the reset vector in ROM at FFFF00h  
forces the program execution to branch to the location of the on-chip  
ROM bootloader.  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
RESET  
D6  
I
RESET affects the various registers and status bits.  
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h).  
The IPU is disabled at reset.  
JTAG  
For more detailed information on emulation header design guidelines, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference [literature number:  
SPRU589].  
IEEE standard 1149.1 test mode select. This serial control input is  
clocked into the TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK.  
If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the  
device, TMS must be buffered. In this case, the input buffer for TMS  
needs a pullup resistor connected to DVDDIO to hold the signal at a  
known value when the emulator is not connected. A resistor value of  
4.7 kΩ or greater is suggested. For board design guidelines related to  
the emulation header, see the XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference  
[literature number: SPRU589].  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
TMS  
L8  
I
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register.  
The IPU is enabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
12  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-3. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Signal Descriptions (continued)  
SIGNAL  
TYPE(1) (2) OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
NO.  
IEEE standard 1149.1 test data output. The contents of the selected  
register (instruction or data) are shifted out of TDO on the falling edge  
of TCK. TDO is in the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state except when the  
scanning of data is in progress.  
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the  
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference [literature number: SPRU589].  
If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the  
device, TDO must be buffered.  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
Despite the fact that the IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) standard defines the TDO  
pin as a 3-state output (O/Z), this device has a bidirectional IO-cell. The  
bidirectional cell's input buffer is used for non-JTAG production test  
purposes. To achieve the lowest power, this input buffer must not be  
allowed to float.  
TDO  
M7  
I/O/Z  
The IEEE standard defines the pin as tri-stated in the Test-Logic-Reset  
state and our device obeys that requirement. Therefore, to achieve the  
lowest power the IPU should remain enabled.  
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register.  
The IPU is enabled at reset.  
IEEE standard 1149.1 test data input. TDI is clocked into the selected  
register (instruction or data) on a rising edge of TCK.  
If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the  
device, TDI must be buffered. In this case, the input buffer for TDI  
needs a pullup resistor connected to DVDDIO to hold this signal at a  
known value when the emulator is not connected. A resistor value of  
4.7 kΩ or greater is suggested.  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
TDI  
L7  
I
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register.  
The IPU is enabled at reset.  
IEEE standard 1149.1 test clock. TCK is normally a free-running clock  
signal with a 50% duty cycle. The changes on input signals TMS and  
TDI are clocked into the TAP controller, instruction register, or selected  
test data register on the rising edge of TCK. Changes at the TAP output  
signal (TDO) occur on the falling edge of TCK.  
If the emulation header is located greater than 6 inches from the  
device, TCK must be buffered.  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
TCK  
M6  
I
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the  
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference [literature number: SPRU589].  
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register.  
The IPU is enabled at reset.  
IEEE standard 1149.1 reset signal for test and emulation logic. TRST,  
when high, allows the IEEE standard 1149.1 scan and emulation logic  
to take control of the operations of the device. If TRST is not connected  
or is driven low, the device operates in its functional mode, and the  
IEEE standard 1149.1 signals are ignored. The device will not operate  
properly if this reset pin is never asserted low.  
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the  
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference [literature number: SPRU589].  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
TRST  
M9  
I
It is recommended that an external pulldown resistor be used in  
addition to the IPD -- especially if there is a long trace to an emulation  
header.  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
13  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-3. RESET, Interrupts, and JTAG Signal Descriptions (continued)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
TYPE(1) (2) OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
NO.  
Emulator 1 pin. EMU1 is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator  
system and is defined as input/output by way of the emulation logic.  
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the  
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference [literature number: SPRU589].  
An external pullup to DVDDIO is required to provide a signal rise time of  
less than 10 µsec. A 4.7-kΩ resistor is suggested for most applications.  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
EMU1  
M5  
I/O/Z  
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the  
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference [literature number: SPRU589].  
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register.  
The IPU is enabled at reset.  
Emulator 0 pin. When TRST is driven low and then high, the state of  
the EMU0 pin is latched and used to connect the JTAG pins (TCK,  
TMS, TDI, TDO) to either the IEEE1149.1 Boundary-Scan TAP (when  
the latched value of EMU0 = 0) or to the DSP Emulation TAP (when the  
latched value of EMU0 = 1). Once TRST is high, EMU0 is used as an  
interrupt to or from the emulator system and is defined as input/output  
by way of the emulation logic.  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
An external pullup to DVDDIO is required to provide a signal rise time of  
less than 10 µsec. A 4.7-kΩ resistor is suggested for most applications.  
EMU0  
L6  
I/O/Z  
For board design guidelines related to the emulation header, see the  
XDS560 Emulator Technical Reference [literature number: SPRU589].  
The IPU resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register.  
The IPU is enabled at reset.  
EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
External interrupt inputs (INT1 and INT0). These pins are maskable via  
INT1  
INT0  
E7  
C6  
I
I
their specific Interrupt Mask Register (IMR1, IMR0) and the interrupt  
mode bit. The pins can be polled and reset by their specific Interrupt  
Flag Register (IFR1, IFR0).  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPU resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the  
PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register.  
The IPU is disabled at reset.  
14  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.4 External Memory Interface (EMIF)  
Table 4-4. EMIF Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
EMIF FUNCTIONAL PINS: ASYNC (NOR, SRAM, and NAND)  
Note: When accessing 8-bit Asynchronous memory:  
Connect EM_A[20:0] to memory address pins [22:2]  
Connect EM_BA[1:0] to memory address pins [1:0]  
For 16-bit Asynchronous memory:  
Connect EM_A[20:1] to memory address pins [20:1]  
Connect EM_BA[1] to memory address pin [0]  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF  
external address pin 20.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
Mux control via the A20_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 5-10).  
GP[26]/  
EM_A[20]  
J3  
G4  
G2  
F2  
E2  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF  
external address pin 19.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
Mux control via the A19_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 5-10).  
GP[25]/  
EM_A[19]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF  
external address pin 18.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
Mux control via the A18_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 5-10).  
GP[24]/  
EM_A[18]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF  
external address pin 17.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
Mux control via the A17_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 5-10).  
GP[23]/  
EM_A[17]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF  
external address pin 16.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
Mux control via the A16_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 5-10).  
GP[22]/  
EM_A[16]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
15  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-4. EMIF Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO. For EMIF, this pin is the EMIF  
external address pin 15.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
Mux control via the A15_MODE bit in the EBSR (see Figure 5-10).  
GP[21]/  
EM_A[15]  
N1  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 14.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
EM_A[14]  
EM_A[13]  
M1  
L1  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 13.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 12. When interfacing with NAND Flash,  
this pin also acts as Command Latch Enable (CLE).  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EM_A[12]/  
(CLE)  
K1  
K2  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 11. When interfacing with NAND Flash,  
this pin also acts as Address Latch Enable (ALE).  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EM_A[11]/  
(ALE)  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 10.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
EM_A[10]  
EM_A[9]  
EM_A[8]  
EM_A[7]  
L2  
J2  
J1  
H2  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 9.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 8.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 7.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
16  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-4. EMIF Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 6.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
EM_A[6]  
F1  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 5.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
EM_A[5]  
EM_A[4]  
EM_A[3]  
EM_A[2]  
EM_A[1]  
EM_A[0]  
D1  
C1  
D2  
E1  
C2  
B2  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 4.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 3.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 2.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 1.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is the EMIF external address pin 0.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR5  
(1C4Dh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
17  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-4. EMIF Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
J4  
EM_D[15]  
EM_D[14]  
EM_D[13]  
EM_D[12]  
EM_D[11]  
EM_D[10]  
EM_D[9]  
EM_D[8]  
EM_D[7]  
EM_D[6]  
EM_D[5]  
EM_D[4]  
EM_D[3]  
EM_D[2]  
EM_D[1]  
EM_D[0]  
K3  
K4  
L3  
C4  
D3  
F4  
E3  
H3  
K5  
M2  
L4  
EMIF 16-bit bidirectional bus.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR4  
(1C4Ch) register.  
I/O/Z  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
D4  
F3  
E5  
G3  
EMIF chip select 5 output for use with asynchronous memories (that is, NOR flash,  
NAND flash, or SRAM).  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EM_CS5  
EM_CS4  
EM_CS3  
EM_CS2  
A3  
C3  
M4  
C5  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
EMIF chip select 4 output for use with asynchronous memories (that is, NOR flash,  
NAND flash, or SRAM).  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
EMIF NAND chip select 3 output for use with asynchronous memories (that is, NOR  
flash, NAND flash, or SRAM).  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
EMIF NAND chip select 2 output for use with asynchronous memories (that is, NOR  
flash, NAND flash, or SRAM).  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
EMIF asynchronous memory write enable output  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
EM_WE  
EM_OE  
H1  
E4  
O/Z  
O/Z  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
EMIF asynchronous memory read enable output  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
18  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-4. EMIF Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
EMIF asynchronous read and write output  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
EM_R/W  
B6  
O/Z  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EM_DQM1/  
UHPI_HBE1  
These pins are multiplexed between EMIF and UHPI. For EMIF, asynchronous data  
write strobes and byte enables or EMIF SDRAM and mSDRAM data mask bits.  
P1  
B5  
B1  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
O/Z  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
EM_DQM0/  
UHPI_HBE0  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EMIF asynchronous bank address  
EM_BA[1]  
EM_BA[0]  
16-bit wide memory: EM_BA[1] forms the device address[0] and BA[0] forms device  
address [23].  
8-bit wide memory: EM_BA[1] forms the device address[1] and BA[0] forms device  
address [0].  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EMIF SDRAM and mSDRAM bank address.  
A1  
O/Z  
The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
EMIF wait state extension input 5 for EM_CS5  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
EM_WAIT5  
EM_WAIT4  
EM_WAIT3  
EM_WAIT2  
H4  
G1  
K6  
D5  
I
I
I
I
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
EMIF wait state extension input 4 for EM_CS4  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
EMIF wait state extension input 3 for EM_CS3  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
EMIF wait state extension input 2 for EM_CS2  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
EMIF FUNCTIONAL PINS: SDRAM and mSDRAM ONLY  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and UHPI. For EMIF, SDRAM and mSDRAM  
chip select 1 output  
IPD  
EM_CS1/  
UHPI_HDS2  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
DVDDEMIF  
A4  
I/O/Z  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
19  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-4. EMIF Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and UHPI. For EMIF, SDRAM and mSDRAM  
chip select 0 output  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EM_CS0/  
UHPI_HDS1  
B3  
I/O/Z  
O/Z  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
EMIF SDRAM and mSDRAM clock  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
EM_SDCLK  
M3  
N2  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and UHPI. For EMIF, SDRAM and mSDRAM  
clock enable  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EM_SDCKE/  
UHPI_HHWIL  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and UHPI. For EMIF, SDRAM and mSDRAM  
row address strobe  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EM_SDRAS/  
UHPI_HAS  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
A6  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and UHPI. For EMIF, SDRAM and mSDRAM  
column strobe  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
EM_SDCAS/  
UHPI_HCS  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
B4  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
20  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.5 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)  
Table 4-5. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
I2C  
This pin is the I2C clock output. Per the I2C standard, an external pullup is required  
on this pin.  
SCL  
SDA  
B7  
B8  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
DVDDIO  
BH  
This pin is the I2C bidirectional data signal. Per the I2C standard, an external pullup  
is required on this pin.  
DVDDIO  
BH  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
21  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.2.6 Inter-IC Sound (I2S)  
Table 4-6. Inter-IC Sound (I2S0, I2S2, and I2S3) Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
Interface 0 (I2S0)  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For I2S, it is I2S0 transmit data output I2S0_DX.  
MMC0_D0/  
I2S0_DX/  
GP[2]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
L9  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
McBSP_DX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For I2S, it is I2S0 clock input/output I2S0_CLK.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_CLK/  
I2S0_CLK/  
GP[0]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L10  
M10  
M11  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
McBSP_CLKX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For I2S, it is I2S0 receive data input I2S0_RX.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D1/  
I2S0_RX/  
GP[3]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
McBSP_DR  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For I2S, it is I2S0 frame synchronization input/output I2S0_FS.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_CMD/  
I2S0_FS/  
GP[1]/  
McBSP_FSX  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
Interface 1 (I2S2)  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
For I2S, it is I2S2 transmit data output I2S2_DX.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_DX/  
UHPI_HD[11]/  
GP[27]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P12  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_TX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
22  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-6. Inter-IC Sound (I2S0, I2S2, and I2S3) Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
For I2S, it is I2S2 clock input/output I2S2_CLK.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_CLK/  
UHPI_HD[8]/  
GP[18]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
N10  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_CLK  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, I2S2, GPIO, and SPI.  
For I2S, it is I2S2 receive data input I2S2_RX.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_RX/  
UHPI_HD[10]/  
GP[20]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
N11  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_RX  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
For I2S, it is I2S2 frame synchronization input/output I2S2_FS.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_FS/  
UHPI_HD[9]/  
GP[19]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P11  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_CS0  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
Interface 2 (I2S3)  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
For I2S, it is I2S3 transmit data output I2S3_DX.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_TXD/  
UHPI_HD[15]/  
GP[31]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P14  
N12  
N13  
P13  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_DX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
For I2S, it is I2S3 clock input/output I2S3_CLK.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_RTS/  
UHPI_HD[12]/  
GP[28]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_CLK  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
For I2S, it is I2S3 receive data input I2S3_RX.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_RXD/  
UHPI_HD[14]/  
GP[30]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_RX  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
For I2S, it is I2S3 frame synchronization input/output I2S3_FS.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_CTS/  
UHPI_HD[13]/  
GP[29]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_FS  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
23  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.2.7 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP)  
Table 4-7. McBSP Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
McBSP  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For McBSP, this is the McBSP transmit clock, McBSP_CLKX.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_CLK/  
I2S0_CLK/  
GP[0]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L10  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
McBSP_CLKX  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For McBSP, this is the McBSP transmit frame sync, McBSP_FSX.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_CMD/  
I2S0_FS/  
GP[1]/  
McBSP_FSX  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
M11  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For McBSP, this is the McBSP transmit data , McBSP_DX.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D0/  
I2S0_DX/  
GP[2]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L9  
McBSP_DX  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For McBSP, this is the McBSP receive data, McBSP_RX.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D1/  
I2S0_RX/  
GP[3]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
M10  
McBSP_DR  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For McBSP, this is the McBSP receive frame sync, McBSP_FSR.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D2/  
GP[4]/  
McBSP_FSR  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L12  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
24  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-7. McBSP Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, McBSP and GPIO.  
For McBSP, this is the McBSP receive clock, McBSP_CLKR or the McBSP sample  
rate generator clock input, McBSP_CLKS. The bit 15 of EBSR register determines  
this port to be McBSP_CLKR or McBSP_CLKS.  
MMC0_D3/  
GP[5]/  
McBSP_CLKR_  
CLKS  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L11  
I/O/Z  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
25  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.2.8 Multichannel Serial Port Interface (McSPI)  
Table 4-8. McSPI Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
McSPI  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI and GPIO.  
For McSPI, this is the McSPI data clock, McSPI_CLK.  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_CLK/  
McSPI_CLK/  
GP[6]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
M13  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI and GPIO.  
For McSPI, this is the McSPI chip select 0 signal, McSPI_CS0.  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_CMD/  
McSPI_CS0/  
GP[7]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L14  
M14  
M12  
K14  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI and GPIO.  
For McSPI, this is the McSPI data, McSPI_SIMO (Slave Input Master Output).  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D0/  
McSPI_SIMO/  
GP[8]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI and GPIO.  
For McSPI, this is the McSPI data, McSPI_SOMI (Slave Output Master Input).  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D1/  
McSPI_SOMI/  
GP[9]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI and GPIO.  
For McSPI, this is the McSPI chip select 1 signal, McSPI_CS1.  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D2/  
McSPI_CS1/  
GP[10]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
26  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-8. McSPI Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI and GPIO.  
For McSPI, this is the McSPI chip select 2 signal, McSPI_CS2.  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D3/  
McSPI_CS2/  
GP[11]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L13  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
27  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.2.9 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)  
Table 4-9. SPI Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
Serial Port Interface (SPI)  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and SPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS0.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CS0/  
UHPI_HCNTL0  
P4  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS0.  
I2S2_FS/  
UHPI_HD[9]/  
GP[19]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P11  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_CS0  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS1.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CS1/  
UHPI_HCNTL1  
N4  
P5  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS2.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CS2/  
UHPI_HR_NW  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI, this pin is SPI chip select SPI_CS3.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CS3/  
UHPI_HRDY  
N5  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI, this pin is clock output SPI_CLK.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CLK /  
UHPI_HINT  
N3  
O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
28  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-9. SPI Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI, this pin is clock output SPI_CLK.  
I2S2_CLK/  
UHPI_HD[8]/  
GP[18]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
N10  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_CLK  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and SPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI, this pin is SPI transmit data output.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_TX /  
UHPI_HD[1]  
N6  
P12  
P6  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI, this pin is SPI transmit data output.  
I2S2_DX/  
UHPI_HD[11]/  
GP[27]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_TX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI this pin is SPI receive data input.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_RX/  
UHPI_HD[0]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
For SPI this pin is SPI receive data input.  
I2S2_RX/  
UHPI_HD[10]/  
GP[20]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
N11  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_RX  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
29  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.2.10 Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter (UART)  
Table 4-10. UART Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NAME(5)  
NO.  
UART  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
When used by UART, it is the receive data input UART_RXD.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_RXD/  
UHPI_HD[14]/  
GP[30]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
N13  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_RX  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
In UART mode, it is the transmit data output UART_TXD.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_TXD/  
UHPI_HD[15]/  
GP[31]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P14  
P13  
N12  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_DX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
In UART mode, it is the clear to send input UART_CTS.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_CTS/  
UHPI_HD[13]/  
GP[29]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_FS  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
In UART mode, it is the ready to send output UART_RTS.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_RTS/  
UHPI_HD[12]/  
GP[28]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_CLK  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
30  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.11 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0  
Table 4-11. USB2.0 Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
USB 2.0  
12-MHz crystal oscillator input used for the USB subsystem and optionally for the  
system clock generator.  
If CLK_SEL=0, the USB oscillator is enabled at reset and is used as the clock  
source for the system clock generator. In this configuration (CLK_SEL=0), the USB  
oscillator cannot be disabled.  
If CLK_SEL=1, the USB oscillator is disabled at reset and the CLKIN pin is used as  
the source for the system clock generator. In this configuration (CLK_SEL=1), the  
USB oscillator can be enabled or disabled via software.  
USB_MXI  
G13  
I
USB_VDDOSC  
When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should  
be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal  
must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 5.2, Recommended Operating  
Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is  
connected to board ground (VSS).  
12-MHz crystal oscillator output used for the USB subsystem and optionally for the  
system clock generator.  
If CLK_SEL=0, the USB oscillator is enabled at reset and is used as the clock  
source for the system clock generator. In this configuration (CLK_SEL=0), the USB  
oscillator cannot be disabled.  
If CLK_SEL=1, the USB oscillator is disabled at reset and the CLKIN pin is used as  
the source for the system clock generator. In this configuration (CLK_SEL=1), the  
USB oscillator can be enabled or disabled via software.  
USB_MXO  
G14  
O
USB_VDDOSC  
When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should  
be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal  
must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 5.2, Recommended Operating  
Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is  
connected to board ground (VSS).  
3.3-V power supply for USB oscillator.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
USB_VDDOSC  
G12  
F11  
S
S
When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_VDDOSC should be connected to ground  
(VSS).  
Ground for USB oscillator. When using a 12-MHz crystal, this pin is a local ground  
for the crystal and must not be connected to the board ground (See Figure 5-11).  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should  
be connected to the USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal  
must meet the VIH requirement (see Section 5.2, Recommended Operating  
Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the USB_VSSOSC signal is  
connected to board ground (VSS).  
USB_VSSOSC  
USB power detect. 5-V input that signifies that VBUS is connected.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.7.2.2, Power-Supply  
Sequencing.  
USB_VBUS  
J12  
A
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VBUS signal should be connected  
to ground (VSS).  
USB_DP  
USB_DM  
H14  
J14  
A I/O  
A I/O  
USB_VDDA3P3 USB bidirectional Data Differential signal pair [positive and negative].  
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_DP and USB_DM signals should  
USB_VDDA3P3  
both be tied to ground (VSS).  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
31  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-11. USB2.0 Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
External resistor connect. Reference current output. This pin must be connected via  
a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to USB_VSSREF and be placed as close to the device as  
possible.  
USB_R1  
G9  
A I/O  
GND  
USB_VDDA3P3  
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_R1 signal should be connected via  
a 10-kΩ resistor to USB_VSSREF  
.
Ground for reference current. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to  
USB_R1.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
USB_VSSREF  
G10  
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSSREF signal should be connected  
directly to ground (Vss).  
Analog 3.3 V power supply for USB PHY.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.7.2.2, Power-Supply  
Sequencing.  
USB_VDDA3P3  
USB_VSSA3P3  
USB_VDDA1P3  
USB_VSSA1P3  
USB_VDD1P3  
USB_VSS1P3  
H12  
H11  
H10  
H9  
S
GND  
S
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA3P3 signal should be  
connected to ground (VSS).  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
Analog ground for USB PHY.  
Analog 1.3 V power supply for USB PHY. [For high-speed sensitive analog circuits]  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.7.2.2, Power-Supply  
Sequencing.  
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA1P3 signal should be  
connected to ground (VSS).  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
GND  
S
Analog ground for USB PHY [For high speed sensitive analog circuits].  
1.3-V digital core power supply for USB PHY.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.7.2.2, Power-Supply  
Sequencing.  
J13  
H13  
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDD1P3 signal should be connected  
to ground (VSS).  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
GND  
Digital core ground for USB PHY.  
3.3 V USB Analog PLL power supply.  
Care should be taken to prevent noise on this supply. Consider using a ferrite bead  
if the power supply for this pin is shared with digital logic. See the Filtering  
Techniques Application Report [literature number: SCAA048] for more information.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
USB_VDDPLL  
G8  
S
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDPLL signal should be connected  
to ground (VSS).  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
USB_VSSPLL  
G11  
GND  
USB Analog PLL ground.  
32  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.12 Universal Host-Port Interface (UHPI)  
Table 4-12. UHPI Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4) DESCRIPTION  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
(2)  
NO.  
For UHPI, this pin is UHPI host interrupt, UHPI_HINT.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CLK/  
UHPI_HINT  
N3  
O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7 (1C50h)  
register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
For UHPI, this pin is UHPI access control, UHPI_HCNTL0.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CS0/  
UHPI_HCNTL0  
P4  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7 (1C50h)  
register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
For UHPI, this pin is UHPI access control, UHPI_HCNTL1.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CS1/  
UHPI_HCNTL1  
N4  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7 (1C50h)  
register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
For UHPI this pin is UHPI read and write, UHPI_HR_NW.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CS2/  
UHPI_HR_NW  
P5  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7 (1C50h)  
register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between SPI and UHPI.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI ready, UHPI_HRDY.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_CS3/  
UHPI_HRDY  
N5  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7 (1C50h)  
register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, UART, SPI, I2S, and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_TXD/  
UHPI_HD[15]/  
GP[31]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P14  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
I2S3_DX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
33  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-12. UHPI Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4) DESCRIPTION  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, UART, SPI, I2S, and GPIO.  
(2)  
NO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_RXD/  
UHPI_HD[14]/  
GP[30]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
N13  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
I2S3_RX  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, UART, SPI, I2S, and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_CTS/  
UHPI_HD[13]/  
GP[29]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P13  
N12  
P12  
N11  
P11  
N10  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
I2S3_FS  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, UART, SPI, I2S, and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_RTS/  
UHPI_HD[12]/  
GP[28]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
I2S3_CLK  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, UART, SPI, I2S, and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_DX/  
UHPI_HD[11]/  
GP[27]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
SPI_TX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, UART, SPI, I2S, and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_RX/  
UHPI_HD[10]/  
GP[20]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
SPI_RX  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, UART, SPI, I2S, and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_FS/  
UHPI_HD[9]/  
GP[19]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
SPI_CS0  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI, UART, SPI, I2S, and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_CLK/  
UHPI_HD[8]/  
GP[18]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
SPI_CLK  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
34  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-12. UHPI Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4) DESCRIPTION  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and GPIO.  
(2)  
NO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[17]/  
UHPI_HD[7]  
P10  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[16]/  
UHPI_HD[6]  
N9  
P9  
N8  
N7  
P7  
N6  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[15]/  
UHPI_HD[5]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[14]/  
UHPI_HD[4]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[13]/  
UHPI_HD[3]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and GPIO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[12]/  
UHPI_HD[2]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and SPI.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_TX/  
UHPI_HD[1]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
35  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-12. UHPI Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4) DESCRIPTION  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and SPI.  
(2)  
NO.  
For UHPI, this pin is the UHPI data bus, UHPI_HD[15:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
SPI_RX/  
UHPI_HD[0]  
P6  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3 (1C19h)  
register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
EM_DQM1/  
UHPI_HBE1  
These two pins are multiplexed between UHPI and SDRAM.  
For UHPI, these two pins are UHPI Byte Enables, UHPI_HBE[1:0].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
P1  
B5  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR6  
(1C4Fh) register.  
EM_DQM0/  
UHPI_HBE0  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
EM_CS1/  
UHPI_HDS2  
These two pins are multiplexed between UHPI and SDRAM.  
For UHPI, these two pins are UHPI data strobe pins, UHPI_HDS[2:1].  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
A4  
B3  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
EM_CS0/  
UHPI_HDS1  
The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7  
(1C50h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and SDRAM.  
For UHPI, this pin is Half-word Identification control input pin, UHPI_HHWIL.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
EM_SDCKE/  
UHPI_HHWIL  
N2  
A6  
B4  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7 (1C50h)  
register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and SDRAM.  
For UHPI, this pin is address strobe pin, UHPI_HAS.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
EM_SDRAS/  
UHPI_HAS  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7 (1C50h)  
register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UHPI and SDRAM.  
For UHPI, this pin is chip select pin, UHPI_HCS.  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
EM_SDCAS/  
UHPI_HCS  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR7 (1C50h)  
register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
36  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.13 MultiMedia Card (MMC)  
Table 4-13. MMC1 and SD Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
MMC and SD  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
For MMC and SD, this is the MMC1 data clock output MMC1_CLK.  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_CLK/  
McSPI_CLK/  
GP[6]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
M13  
O
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
For MMC and SD, this is the MMC1 command I/O output MMC1_CMD.  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_CMD/  
McSPI_CS0/  
GP[7]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L14  
O
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
MMC1_D3/  
McSPI_CS2/  
GP[11]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L13  
K14  
M12  
M14  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
These pins are multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
MMC1_D2/  
McSPI_CS1/  
GP[10]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
In MMC and SD mode, all these pins are the MMC1 nibble wide bidirectional data  
bus.  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D1/  
McSPI_SOMI/  
GP[9]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
MMC1_D0/  
McSPI_SIMO/  
GP[8]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
37  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-14. MMC0 and SD Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
MMC and SD  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GPIO.  
For MMC and SD, this is the MMC0 data clock output MMC0_CLK.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_CLK/  
I2S0_CLK/  
GP[0]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L10  
O
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
McBSP_CLKX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GPIO.  
For MMC and SD, this is the MMC0 command I/O output MMC0_CMD.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_CMD/  
I2S0_FS/  
GP[1]/  
McBSP_FSX  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
M11  
O
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
MMC0_D3/  
GP[5]/  
McBSP_CLKR_  
CLKS  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L11  
L12  
M10  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
These pins are multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP and GPIO  
In MMC and SD mode, these pins are the MMC0 nibble wide bidirectional data bus.  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D2/  
GP[4]/  
McBSP_FSR  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
MMC0_D1/  
I2S0_RX/  
GP[3]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on these pins can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
McBSP_DR  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
MMC0_D0/  
I2S0_DX/  
GP[2]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L9  
I/O/Z  
McBSP_DX  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
38  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.14 Successive Approximation (SAR) Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)  
Table 4-15. 10-Bit SAR ADC Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NAME  
NO.  
SAR ADC  
GPAIN0: General -Purpose Output and Analog Input pin 0. This pin is demuxed  
internally into ADC Channels 0, 1, and 2. GPAIN0 can also be used as a general-  
purpose open-drain output. This pin is unique among the GPAIN pins in that it is the  
only pin that is 3.6 V-tolerant to support measuring a battery voltage. GPAIN0 can  
accommodate input voltages from 0 V to 3.6 V; although, the ADC is unable to  
accept signals greater than VDDA_ANA without clamping. ADC Channel 1 is capable  
of switching in an internal resistor divider that has a divide ratio of approximately 1/8.  
GPAIN0  
D10  
I/O  
VDDA_ANA  
GPAIN1: General -Purpose Output and Analog Input pin 1. This pin is connected to  
ADC Channel 3. GPAIN1 can be used as a general-purpose output if certain  
requirements are met (see the following note). GPAIN1 can accommodate input  
voltages from 0 V to VDDA_ANA  
.
GPAIN1  
A11  
I/O  
VDDA_ANA  
Note: If the ANA_LDO is used to supply power to VDDA_ANA, this pin must not be  
used as a general-purpose output (driving high) since the max current capability  
(see the ISD parameter in Section 5.3.2, Electrical Characteristics) of the ANA_LDO  
can be exceeded. Doing so may result in the on-chip power-on reset (POR)  
resetting the chip.  
GPAIN2: General -Purpose Output and Analog Input pin 2. This pin is connected to  
ADC Channel 4. GPAIN2 can be used as a general-purpose output if certain  
requirements are met (see the following note). GPAIN2 can accommodate input  
voltages from 0 V to VDDA_ANA  
.
GPAIN2  
B11  
I/O  
VDDA_ANA  
Note: If the ANA_LDO is used to supply power to VDDA_ANA, this pin must not be  
used as a general-purpose output (driving high) since the max current capability  
(see the ISD parameter in Section 5.3.2, Electrical Characteristics) of the ANA_LDO  
can be exceeded. Doing so may result in the on-chip POR resetting the chip.  
GPAIN3: General -Purpose Output and Analog Input pin 3. This pin is connected to  
ADC Channel 5. GPAIN3 can be used as a general-purpose output if certain  
requirements are met (see the following note). GPAIN3 can accommodate input  
voltages from 0 V to VDDA_ANA  
.
GPAIN3  
C11  
I/O  
VDDA_ANA  
Note: If the ANA_LDO is used to supply power to VDDA_ANA, this pin must not be  
used as a general-purpose output (driving high) since the max current capability  
(see the ISD parameter in Section 5.3.2, Electrical Characteristics) of the ANA_LDO  
can be exceeded. Doing so may result in the on-chip POR resetting the chip.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
39  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.2.15 General-Purpose Input and Output (GPIO)  
Table 4-16. GPIO Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
General-Purpose Input/Output  
External Flag Output. XF is used for signaling other processors in multiprocessor  
configurations or XF can be used as a fast general-purpose output pin.  
XF is set high by the BSET XF instruction and XF is set low by the BCLR XF  
instruction or by writing to bit 13 of the ST1_55 register. For more information on the  
ST1_55 register, see the C55x 3.0 CPU Reference Guide [literature number:  
SWPU073].  
IPU  
DVDDIO  
BH  
XF  
M8  
O/Z  
For the XF pin's states after reset, see Figure 5-9, BootMode Latching.  
XF pin can manually configured as Hi-Z state only in boundary-scan mode. When  
this pin is in Hi-Z state, the IPU is enabled.  
The IPU on this pin is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 0 (GP[0]).  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_CLK/  
I2S0_CLK/  
GP[0]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L10  
M11  
L9  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
McBSP_CLKX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 1 (GP[1]).  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_CMD/  
I2S0_FS/  
GP[1]/  
McBSP_FSX  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 2 (GP[2]).  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D0/  
I2S0_DX/  
GP[2]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
McBSP_DX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 3 (GP[3]).  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D1/  
I2S0_RX/  
GP[3]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
M10  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
McBSP_DR  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
(5) Pins with multiple names default to the first, bolded name when reset (for example, GP[21]/EM_A[15] defaults to GP[21] when reset).  
40  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-16. GPIO Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, McBSP, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 4 (GP[4]).  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D2/  
GP[4]/  
McBSP_FSR  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L12  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC0, McBSP, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 5 (GP[5]).  
Mux control via the SP0MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC0_D3/  
GP[5]/  
McBSP_CLKR_  
CLKS  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L11  
M13  
L14  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 6 (GP[6]).  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_CLK/  
McSPI_CLK/  
GP[6]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 7 (GP[7]).  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_CMD/  
McSPI_CS0/  
GP[7]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 8 (GP[8]).  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D0/  
McSPI_SIMO/  
GP[8]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
M14  
M12  
K14  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 9 (GP[9]).  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D1/  
McSPI_SOMI/  
GP[9]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 10 (GP[10]).  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D2/  
McSPI_CS1/  
GP[10]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
41  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-16. GPIO Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 11 (GP[11]).  
Mux control via the SP1MODE bits in the EBSR.  
MMC1_D3/  
McSPI_CS2/  
GP[11]  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
L13  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR1  
(1C17h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and UHPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 12 (GP[12]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[12]/  
UHPI_HD[2]  
P7  
N7  
N8  
P9  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and UHPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 13 (GP[13]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[13]/  
UHPI_HD[3]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and UHPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 14 (GP[14]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[14]/  
UHPI_HD[4]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and UHPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 15 (GP[15]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[15]/  
UHPI_HD[5]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and UHPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 16 (GP[16]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[16]/  
UHPI_HD[6]  
N9  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between GPIO and UHPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 17 (GP[17]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
GP[17]/  
UHPI_HD[7]  
P10  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
42  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 4-16. GPIO Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 18 (GP[18]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_CLK/  
UHPI_HD[8]/  
GP[18]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
N10  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_CLK  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO and SPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 19 (GP[19]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_FS/  
UHPI_HD[9]/  
GP[19]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P11  
N11  
N1  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_CS0  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO and SPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 20 (GP[20]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_RX/  
UHPI_HD[10]/  
GP[20]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_RX  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]).  
Mux control via the A15_MODE bit in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
GP[21]/  
EM_A[15]  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]).  
Mux control via the A16_MODE bit in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
GP[22]/  
EM_A[16]  
E2  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]).  
Mux control via the A17_MODE bit in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
GP[23]/  
EM_A[17]  
F2  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]).  
Mux control via the A18_MODE bit in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
GP[24]/  
EM_A[18]  
G2  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
43  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-16. GPIO Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME(5)  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]).  
Mux control via the A19_MODE bit in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
GP[25]/  
EM_A[19]  
G4  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
I/O/Z  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between EMIF and GPIO.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]).  
Mux control via the A20_MODE bit in the EBSR.  
IPD  
DVDDEMIF  
BH  
GP[26]/  
EM_A[20]  
J3  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR2  
(1C18h) register.  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between I2S2, UHPI, GPIO, and SPI.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 27 (GP[27]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
I2S2_DX/  
UHPI_HD[11]/  
GP[27]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
P12  
N12  
P13  
N13  
P14  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
SPI_TX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 28 (GP[28]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_RTS/  
UHPI_HD[12]/  
GP[28]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_CLK  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 29 (GP[29]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_CTS/  
UHPI_HD[13]/  
GP[29]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_FS  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 30 (GP[30]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_RXD/  
UHPI_HD[14]/  
GP[30]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_RX  
The IPD is enabled at reset.  
This pin is multiplexed between UART, UHPI, GPIO, and I2S3.  
For GPIO, it is general-purpose input/output pin 31 (GP[31]).  
Mux control via the PPMODE bits in the EBSR.  
UART_TXD/  
UHPI_HD[15]/  
GP[31]/  
IPD  
DVDDIO  
BH  
The IPD resistor on this pin can be enabled or disabled via the PUDINHIBR3  
(1C19h) register.  
I2S3_DX  
The IPD is disabled at reset.  
44  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.16 Regulators and Power Management  
Table 4-17. Regulators and Power Management Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
Regulators  
DSP_LDO output. When enabled, this output provides a regulated 1.3 V or 1.05 V  
output and up to 250 mA of current (see the ISD parameter in Section 5.3.2,  
Electrical Characteristics).  
The DSP_LDO is intended to supply current to the digital core circuits only (CVDD  
but not to CVDDRTC or external devices. For proper device operation, the external  
decoupling capacitor of this pin should be 5µF 10µF. For more detailed  
)
DSP_LDOO  
E10  
S
~
information, see Section 5.7.2.5, Power-Supply Decoupling.  
When disabled, this pin is in the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state.  
LDO inputs. For proper device operation, LDOI must always be powered. The LDOI  
pins must be connected to the same power supply source with a voltage range of  
1.8 V to 3.6 V. These pins supply power to the internal LDOs, the bandgap  
reference generator circuits, and serve as the I/O supply for some input pins.  
F14,  
F13,  
B12  
LDOI  
S
DSP_LDO enable input. This signal is not intended to be dynamically switched.  
0 = DSP_LDO is enabled. The internal POR monitors the DSP_LDOO pin voltage  
and generates the internal POWERGOOD signal.  
DSP_LDO_EN  
D12  
I
1 = DSP_LDO is disabled. The internal POR voltage monitoring is also disabled.  
The internal POWERGOOD signal is forced high and the external reset signal on  
the RESET pin (D6) is the only source of the device reset. Note, the device's  
internal reset signal is generated as the logical AND of the RESET pin and the  
internal POWERGOOD signal.  
LDOI  
USB_LDO output. This output provides a regulated 1.3 V output and up to 25 mA of  
current (see the ISD parameter in Section 5.3.2, Electrical Characteristics).  
For proper device operation, this pin must be connected to a 1 µF ~ 2 µF decoupling  
capacitor to VSS. For more detailed information, see Section 5.7.2.5, Power-Supply  
Decoupling. This LDO is intended to supply power to the USB_VDD1P3  
,
USB_VDDA1P3 pins but not to CVDDRTC or external devices.  
USB_LDOO  
F12  
S
Note: The reset state of the register that enables and disables the USB_LDO is  
dependent on the setting of CLK_SEL pin at reset.  
If CLK_SEL is high, the USB_LDO is disabled at reset but can be enabled by  
software.  
If CLK_SEL is low, the USB LDO is enabled (USB_LDO_EN=1) at reset and cannot  
be disabled by software. (See Section 5.7.2.1.1.2.1 LDO Control for details.)  
ANA_LDO output. This output provides a regulated 1.3 V output and up to 4 mA of  
current (see the ISD parameter in Section 5.3.2, Electrical Characteristics).  
For proper device operation, this pin must be connected to an ~ 1.0 µF decoupling  
capacitor to VSS. For more detailed information, see Section 5.7.2.5, Power-Supply  
Decoupling. This LDO is intended to supply power to the VDDA_ANA pin but not to  
VDDA_PLL, CVDDRTC or external devices.  
ANA_LDOO  
A12  
S
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
45  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-17. Regulators and Power Management Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
Bandgap reference filter signal. For proper device operation, this pin needs to be  
bypassed with a 0.1 µF capacitor to analog ground (VSSA_ANA).  
BG_CAP provides a settling time of 200 ms that must elapse before executing  
bootloader code. The settling time time is used by Timer0.  
BG_CAP  
B13  
A, O  
This external capacitor provides filtering for stable reference voltages and currents  
generated by the bandgap circuit. The bandgap produces the references for use by  
the SAR and POR circuits.  
46  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.17 Supply Voltage  
Table 4-18. Supply Voltage Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NAME  
NO.  
SUPPLY VOLTAGES  
F6  
H8  
J6  
1.05-V Digital Core supply voltage (75 MHz)  
1.3-V Digital Core supply voltage (175 MHz)  
1.4-V Digital Core supply voltage (200 MHz)  
PWR  
CVDD  
K10  
L5  
F7  
K7  
K12  
N14  
P3  
P8  
A2  
A5  
E6  
F5  
DVDDIO  
PWR  
1.8-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V I/O power supply for non-EMIF and non-RTC I/Os  
DVDDIO must always be powered for proper operation.  
1.8-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V EMIF I/O power supply  
DVDDEMIF must always be powered for proper operation. GP[26:21] are used for  
boot mode configuration.  
DVDDEMIF  
G5  
PWR  
H5  
H7  
J5  
P2  
1.05-V RTC digital core and RTC oscillator power supply.  
CVDDRTC  
C8  
F8  
PWR  
PWR  
Note: The CVDDRTC pin must always be powered by an external power source even  
though RTC is not used. None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC  
.
1.8-V, 2.75-V, or 3.3-V I/O power supply for peripheral pins.  
DVDDRTC  
DVDDRTC can be tied to ground (VSS) when RTC_CLKOUT and WAKEUP pins are  
not used permanently. In this case, the WAKEUP pin must be configured as output  
by software. (See Table 5-1, RTCPMGT Register Bit Descriptions.)  
1.3-V Analog PLL power supply for the system clock generator.  
Care should be taken to prevent noise on this supply. Consider using a ferrite bead  
if the power supply for this pin is shared with digital logic. See the Filtering  
Techniques Application Report [literature number: SCAA048] for more information.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
VDDA_PLL  
C10  
PWR  
This signal cannot be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin. It must be powered  
externally.  
3.3 V USB Analog PLL power supply.  
Care should be taken to prevent noise on this supply. Consider using a ferrite bead  
if the power supply for this pin is shared with digital logic. See the Filtering  
Techniques Application Report [literature number: SCAA048] for more information.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
USB_VDDPLL  
G8  
S
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDPLL signal should be connected  
to ground (VSS).  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
47  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-18. Supply Voltage Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
1.3-V digital core power supply for USB PHY.  
(2)  
NO.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.7.2.2, Power-Supply  
Sequencing.  
USB_VDD1P3  
USB_VDDA1P3  
USB_VDDA3P3  
J13  
S
S
S
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDD1P3 signal should be connected  
to ground (VSS).  
Analog 1.3 V power supply for USB PHY. [For high-speed sensitive analog circuits]  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.7.2.2, Power-Supply  
Sequencing.  
H10  
H12  
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA1P3 signal should be  
connected to ground (VSS).  
Analog 3.3 V power supply for USB PHY.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
This signal must be powered on in the order listed in Section 5.7.2.2, Power-Supply  
Sequencing.  
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VDDA3P3 signal should be  
connected to ground (VSS).  
3.3-V power supply for USB oscillator.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
USB_VDDOSC  
G12  
A10  
S
When the USB peripheral is not used, USB_VDDOSC should be connected to  
ground (VSS).  
1.3-V supply for power management and 10-bit SAR ADC  
This signal can be powered from the ANA_LDOO pin.  
VDDA_ANA  
PWR  
48  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.2.18 Ground  
Table 4-19. Ground Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NAME  
NO.  
A13  
A14  
D7  
D11  
E9  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
F9  
VSS  
GND  
Ground pins  
F10  
G6  
G7  
H6  
J7  
J8  
J9  
K8  
K9  
K11  
K13  
Ground for RTC oscillator. When using a 32.768-kHz crystal, this pin is a local  
ground for the crystal and must not be connected to the board ground (See  
Figure 5-13 and Figure 5-16). When not using RTC and the crystal is not populated  
on the board, this pin is connected to the board ground.  
VSSRTC  
C9  
GND  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
VSSA_PLL  
D9  
G11  
H13  
H9  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Analog PLL ground for the system clock generator.  
USB Analog PLL ground.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
USB_VSSPLL  
USB_VSS1P3  
USB_VSSA1P3  
USB_VSSA3P3  
USB_VSSOSC  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
Digital core ground for USB PHY.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
Analog ground for USB PHY [For high speed sensitive analog circuits].  
Analog ground for USB PHY.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
H11  
F11  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
Ground for USB oscillator.  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
49  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-19. Ground Signal Descriptions (continued)  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
NAME  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NO.  
Ground for reference current. This must be connected via a 10-kΩ ±1% resistor to  
USB_R1.  
see  
Section 5.2,  
ROC  
USB_VSSREF  
G10  
GND  
GND  
When the USB peripheral is not used, the USB_VSSREF signal should be connected  
directly to ground (Vss).  
B10  
B14  
Analog ground pins for power management (POR and Bandgap circuits) and 10-bit  
SAR ADC  
VSSA_ANA  
50  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.3 Pin Multiplexing  
Extensive pin multiplexing is used to accommodate the largest number of peripheral functions in the  
smallest possible package. The external bus selection register (EBSR) controls all the pin multiplexing  
functions on the device.  
This section discusses how to program the external bus selection register (EBSR) to select the desired  
peripheral functions and pin muxing. See the individual subsections for muxing details for a specific  
muxed pin. After changing any of the pin mux control registers, it will be necessary to reset the peripherals  
that are affected.  
4.3.1 UHPI, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:12] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.PPMODE Bits]  
The UHPI, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the PPMODE  
bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin  
functions, see Table 4-20.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
51  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 4-20. UHPI, SPI, UART, I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:12] Pin Multiplexing  
EBSR PPMODE BITS  
MODE 3  
MODE 0  
000  
MODE 1  
MODE 2  
010  
MODE 4  
100  
MODE 5  
101  
MODE 6  
110  
PULLUP and PULLDOWN  
CONTROL REGISTER BIT  
PIN NUMBER  
001  
(Reset  
Default)  
011  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 12  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 0  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 1  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 2  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 3  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 4  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 5  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 6  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 7  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 8  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 9  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 10  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 11  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 12  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 13  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 14  
PUDINHIBR3 (0x1C19) Bit 15  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 8  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 9  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 10  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 11  
PUDINHIBR6 (0x1C4F) Bit 7  
PUDINHIBR6 (0x1C4F) Bit 8  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 3  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 2  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 4  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 5  
PUDINHIBR7 (0x1C50) Bit 1  
N3  
P6  
N6  
P7  
N7  
N8  
P9  
N9  
UHPI_HINT  
UHPI_HD[0]  
UHPI_HD[1]  
UHPI_HD[2]  
UHPI_HD[3]  
UHPI_HD[4]  
UHPI_HD[5]  
UHPI_HD[6]  
UHPI_HD[7]  
UHPI_HD[8]  
UHPI_HD[9]  
UHPI_HD[10]  
UHPI_HD[11]  
UHPI_HD[12]  
UHPI_HD[13]  
UHPI_HD[14]  
UHPI_HD[15]  
UHPI_HCNTL0  
UHPI_HCNTL1  
UHPI_HR_NW  
UHPI_HRDY  
UHPI_HBE0  
UHPI_HBE1  
UHPI_HAS  
SPI_CLK  
SPI_RX  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
GP[18]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
SPI_CLK  
SPI_CS0  
SPI_RX  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
I2S2_CLK  
I2S2_FS  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
SPI_CLK  
SPI_CLK  
SPI_RX  
SPI_TX  
SPI_TX  
GP[12]  
GP[12]  
GP[13]  
GP[13]  
GP[14]  
GP[14]  
GP[15]  
GP[15]  
GP[16]  
GP[16]  
P10  
N10  
P11  
N11  
P12  
N12  
P13  
N13  
P14  
P4  
GP[17]  
GP[17]  
I2S2_CLK  
I2S2_FS  
I2S2_RX  
I2S2_DX  
UART_RTS  
UART_CTS  
UART_RXD  
UART_TXD  
SPI_CS0  
SPI_CS1  
SPI_CS2  
SPI_CS3  
EM_DQM0  
EM_DQM1  
EM_SDRAS  
EM_SDCAS  
EM_CS0  
EM_CS1  
EM_SDCKE  
I2S2_CLK  
I2S2_FS  
I2S2_RX  
I2S2_DX  
I2S3_CLK  
I2S3_FS  
I2S3_RX  
I2S3_DX  
SPI_CS0  
SPI_CS1  
SPI_CS2  
SPI_CS3  
EM_D1M0  
EM_DQM1  
EM_SDRAS  
EM_SDCAS  
EM_CS0  
EM_CS1  
EM_SDCKE  
GP[19]  
SPI_CS0  
GP[20]  
I2S2_RX  
SPI_RX  
GP[27]  
SPI_TX  
I2S2_DX  
SPI_TX  
GP[28]  
I2S3_CLK  
I2S3_FS  
UART_RTS  
UART_CTS  
UART_RXD  
UART_TXD  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EM_DQM0  
EM_DQM1  
EM_SDRAS  
EM_SDCAS  
EM_CS0  
UART_RTS  
UART_CTS  
UART_RXD  
UART_TXD  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EM_DQM0  
EM_DQM1  
EM_SDRAS  
EM_SDCAS  
EM_CS0  
GP[29]  
GP[30]  
I2S3_RX  
I2S3_DX  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EM_DQM0  
EM_DQM1  
EM_SDRAS  
EM_SDCAS  
EM_CS0  
EM_CS1  
EM_SDCKE  
GP[31]  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EM_DQM0  
EM_DQM1  
EM_SDRAS  
EM_SDCAS  
EM_CS0  
EM_CS1  
EM_SDCKE  
N4  
P5  
N5  
B5  
P1  
A6  
B4  
UHPI_HCS  
B3  
UHPI_HDS1  
UHPI_HDS2  
UHPI_HHWIL  
A4  
EM_CS1  
EM_CS1  
N2  
EM_SDCKE  
EM_SDCKE  
52  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.3.2 MMC1, McSPI, and GP[11:6] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.SP1MODE Bits]  
The MMC1, McSPI, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the SP1MODE bit fields in the  
External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see  
Table 4-21.  
Table 4-21. MMC1, McSPI, and GP[11:6] Pin Multiplexing  
EBSR SP1MODE BITS  
PUDINHIBR1  
MODE 0  
MODE 1  
MODE 2  
10  
REGISTER  
PIN NUMBER  
BIT(1)  
00  
01  
(Reset Default)  
Bit 8  
Bit 9  
M13  
L14  
M14  
M12  
K14  
L13  
MMC1_CLK  
MMC1_CMD  
MMC1_D0  
MMC1_D1  
MMC1_D2  
MMC1_D3  
McSPI_CLK  
McSPI_CS0  
McSPI_SIMO  
McSPI_SOMI  
McSPI_CS1  
McSPI_CS2  
GP[6]  
GP[7]  
GP[8]  
GP[9]  
GP[10]  
GP[11]  
Bit 10  
Bit 11  
Bit 12  
Bit 13  
(1) The pin names with PUDINHIBR1 (1C17h) register bit field references can have the pulldown register enabled or disabled via this  
register. Pin 0 on serial port 1 corresponds to bit 8, pin 1 to bit 9, and so on up to pin 5 which corresponds to bit 13.  
4.3.3 MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.SP0MODE Bits]  
The MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the SP0MODE bit fields  
in the External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see  
Table 4-22.  
Table 4-22. MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing  
EBSR SP0MODE BITS  
PUDINHIBR1  
MODE 0  
MODE 1  
MODE 2  
MODE 3  
11  
REGISTER  
PIN NUMBER  
BIT(1)  
00  
01  
10  
(Reset Default)  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Bit 4  
Bit 5  
L10  
M11  
L9  
MMC0_CLK  
MMC0_CMD  
MMC0_D0  
MMC0_D1  
MMC0_D2  
MMC0_D3  
I2S0_CLK  
I2S0_FS  
I2S0_DX  
I2S0_RX  
GP[4]  
GP[0]  
GP[1]  
GP[2]  
GP[3]  
GP[4]  
GP[5]  
McBSP_CLKX  
McBSP_FSX  
McBSP_DX  
M10  
L12  
L11  
McBSP_DR  
McBSP_FSR  
McBSP_CLKR_CLKS(2)  
GP[5]  
(1) The pin names with PUDINHIBR1 (1C17h) register bit field references can have the pulldown register enabled or disabled via this  
register. Pin 0 on serial port 0 corresponds to bit 0, pin 1 to bit 1, and so on up to pin 5 which corresponds to bit 5.  
(2) Bit 15 of the EBSR register determines this port to be McBSP_CLKR or McBSP_CLKS.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
53  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4.3.4 EMIF EM_A[20:15] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing [EBSR.Axx_MODE bits]  
The EMIF Address and GPIO signal muxing is determined by the value of the A20_MODE, A19_MODE,  
A18_MODE, A17_MODE, A16_MODE, and A15_MODE bit fields in the External Bus Selection Register  
(EBSR) register. For more details on the actual pin functions, see Table 4-23.  
Table 4-23. EM_A[20:16] and GP[26:21] Pin Multiplexing  
PUDINHIBR2  
REGISTER  
BIT(1)  
Axx_MODE BIT  
PIN NUMBER  
0
1
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Bit 4  
Bit 5  
N1  
E2  
F2  
G2  
G4  
J3  
EM_A[15]  
EM_A[16]  
EM_A[17]  
EM_A[18]  
EM_A[19]  
EM_A[20]  
GP[21]  
GP[22]  
GP[23]  
GP[24]  
GP[25]  
GP[26]  
(1) The pin names with PUDINHIBR2 (1C18h) register bit field references can have the pulldown register enabled or disabled via this  
register.  
54  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
4.4 Connections for Unused Signals  
Table 4-24 lists the signals that are reserved or are not connected on this device.  
Table 4-24. Reserved and No Connects Signal Descriptions  
TYPE(1)  
SIGNAL  
OTHER(3) (4)  
DESCRIPTION  
(2)  
NAME  
NO.  
Reserved  
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS.  
RSV0  
C12  
I
LDOI  
RSV1  
RSV2  
J10  
J11  
PWR  
PWR  
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to CVDD  
.
.
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to CVDD  
RSV3  
RSV4  
RSV5  
RSV16  
D14  
C14  
C13  
D13  
I
I
I
I
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS  
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS  
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS  
Reserved. For proper device operation, this pin must be tied directly to VSS  
.
.
.
.
LDOI  
LDOI  
LDOI  
LDOI  
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal, BH = Bus Holder  
(2) Input pins of type I, I/O, and I/O/Z are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, these pins must not be allowed to  
float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current.  
Prevent this current by externally terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
(3) IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. For more detailed information on pullup and pulldown resistors and situations where  
external pullup and pulldown resistors are required, see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
(4) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Terminal Configuration and Functions  
55  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5 Specifications  
For the device maximum operating frequency, see Section 7.1.2, Device Nomenclature.  
5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Over Operating Case Temperature Range (Unless Otherwise Noted)(1)  
(2)  
Supply voltage ranges:  
Digital Core (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3  
)
–0.5 V to 1.7 V  
–0.5 V to 4.2 V  
I/O, 1.8 V, 2.75 V, 3.3 V (DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC) 3.3V  
USB supplies USB PHY (USB_VDDOSC, USB_VDDPLL  
,
(2)  
USB_VDDA3P3  
)
LDOI  
–0.5 V to 4.2 V  
–0.5 V to 1.7 V  
–0.5 V to 4.2 V  
(2)  
Analog, 1.3 V (VDDA_PLL, USB_VDDA1P3, VDDA_ANA  
)
Input and Output voltage ranges:  
VI I/O, All pins with DVDDIO or DVDDEMIF or USB_VDDOSC or  
USB_VDDPLL or USB_VDDA3P3 as supply source  
VO I/O, All pins with DVDDIO or DVDDEMIF or USB_VDDOSC or  
USB_VDDPLLor USB_VDDA3P3 as supply source  
–0.5 V to 4.2 V  
RTC_XI and RTC_XO  
–0.5 V to 1.7 V  
–0.5 V to 4.2 V  
–0.5 V to 1.7 V  
–0.5 V to 1.7 V  
–0.5 V to 1.7 V  
0 V to 5.5 V  
VI and VO, GPAIN[0]  
VI and VO, GPAIN[3:1]  
VO, BG_CAP  
ANA_LDOO, DSP_LDOO, and USB_LDOO  
USB_VBUS Input  
Operating case temperature ranges, Tc:  
Commercial Temperature (default)  
Industrial Temperature  
-10°C to 70°C  
-40°C to 85°C  
(1) Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings  
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating  
conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
(2) All voltage values are with respect to VSS.  
56  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.2 Recommended Operating Conditions  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX UNIT  
75 MHz  
0.998  
1.05  
1.15  
1.43  
V
V
Supply voltage, Digital Core  
CVDD  
175 MHz  
1.24  
1.3  
1.4  
Slew rate < 200 µs for full swing  
200 MHz  
1.33  
0.998  
1.24  
1.24  
1.24  
1.24  
2.97  
2.97  
2.48  
1.65  
2.97  
2.97  
1.8  
1.47  
CVDD  
1.43  
1.43  
1.43  
1.43  
3.63  
3.63  
3.02  
1.98  
3.63  
3.63  
3.6  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
CVDDRTC  
Supply voltage, RTC and RTC OSC  
Supply voltage, Digital USB  
32.768 kHz  
USB_VDD1P3  
USB_VDDA1P3  
VDDA_ANA  
1.3  
1.3  
1.3  
1.3  
3.3  
3.3  
2.75  
1.8  
3.3  
3.3  
Core Supplies  
Supply voltage, 1.3 V Analog USB  
Supply voltage, 1.3 V SAR and Pwr Mgmt  
Supply voltage, System PLL  
VDDA_PLL  
USB_VDDPLL  
Supply voltage, 3.3 V USB PLL  
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V  
DVDDIO  
DVDDEMIF  
DVDDRTC  
Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V  
Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V  
I/O Supplies  
USB_VDDOSC  
USB_VDDA3P3  
LDOI  
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V USB OSC  
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V Analog USB PHY  
Supply voltage, Analog Pwr Mgmt and LDO Inputs  
Supply ground, Digital I/O  
VSS  
VSSRTC  
Supply ground, RTC  
USB_VSSOSC  
USB_VSSPLL  
USB_VSSA3P3  
USB_VSSA1P3  
USB_VSSREF  
VSSA_PLL  
Supply ground, USB OSC  
Supply ground, USB PLL  
Supply ground, 3.3 V Analog USB PHY  
Supply ground, USB 1.3 V Analog USB PHY  
Supply ground, USB Reference Current  
Supply ground, System PLL  
GND  
0
0
0
V
USB_VSS1P3  
VSSA_ANA  
Supply ground, 1.3 V Digital USB PHY  
Supply ground, SAR and Pwr Mgmt  
High-level input voltage, 3.3, 2.75, 1.8 V I/O (except  
(1)  
VIH  
0.7 * DVDD  
-0.3  
DVDD + 0.3  
0.3 * DVDD  
V
V
(2)  
GPAIN[3:0] pins)  
Low-level input voltage, 3.3, 2.75, 1.8 V I/O (except  
GPAIN[3:0] pins)  
(1)  
VIL  
(2)  
Input voltage, GPAIN0 pin(3)  
Input voltage, GPAIN[3:1] pins  
Commercial  
-0.3  
-0.3  
3.6  
V
V
VIN  
VDDA_ANA + 0.3  
-10  
70  
°C  
(default)  
Tc  
Operating case temperature  
Industrial  
-40  
0
85  
75  
°C  
1.05 V  
DSP Operating Frequency (SYSCLK)  
1.3 V  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
FSYSCLK  
0
175  
200  
1.4 V  
0
(1) DVDD refers to the pin I/O supply voltage. To determine the I/O supply voltage for each pin, see Section 4.2, Signal Descriptions.  
(2) The I2C pin SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pin could potentially draw current when the DVDDIO is powered  
down. Due to the fact that different voltage devices can be connected to I2C bus and the I2C inputs are LVCMOS, the level of logic 0  
(low) and logic 1 (high) are not fixed and depend on DVDDIO  
(3) The GNDON bit in the SARPINCTRL register should be set to "1" before SAR channels 0, 1, or 2 are enabled via the CHSEL bit in the  
SARCTRL register, when VIN greater than VDDA_ANA  
.
.
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
57  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.3 Electrical Characteristics  
5.3.1 Power Consumption  
NOTE  
Power consumption on this device depends on several operating parameters such as operating  
voltage, operating frequency, and temperature. Power consumption also varies by end applications  
that determine the overall processor, CPU, and peripheral activity. For more specific power  
consumption details, see Estimating Power Consumption on the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal  
Processor [literature number SPRABV3]. This document includes a spreadsheet for estimating  
power based on parameters that closely resemble the end application to generate a realistic  
estimate of power consumption on this device based on use-case and operating conditions.  
5.3.2 Electrical Characteristics  
Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)  
(1)  
PARAMETER  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNIT  
Full speed: USB_DN and  
USB_DP(2)  
2.8  
USB_VDDA3P3  
V
High speed: USB_DN and  
USB_DP(2)  
360  
440  
mV  
V
VOH  
High-level output voltage, 3.3,  
2.75, 1.8 V I/O (except  
GPAIN[3:0] pins)  
IO = IOH  
IO = IOH  
0.8 * DVDD  
High-level output voltage,  
GPAIN[3:1] pins  
0.8 * VDDA_ANA  
V
V
Full speed: USB_DN and  
USB_DP(2)  
0.0  
0.3  
10  
High speed: USB_DN and  
USB_DP(2)  
–10  
mV  
Low-level output voltage, 3.3,  
2.75, 1.8V I/O (except I2C and  
GPAIN[3:0] pins)  
VOL  
IO = IOL  
0.2 * DVDD  
V
Low-level output voltage, I2C  
pins(3)  
VDD > 2 V, IOL = 3 mA  
IO = IOL  
0
0.4  
V
V
Low-level output voltage,  
GPAIN[3:0] pins  
0.2 * VDDA_ANA  
DVDD = 3.3 V  
DVDD = 1.8 V  
162  
122  
1.3  
mV  
mV  
V
VHYS  
Input hysteresis(4)  
USB_LDOO voltage  
ANA_LDOO voltage  
1.24  
1.24  
1.24  
0.998  
250  
4
1.43  
1.43  
1.43  
1.15  
1.3  
V
VLDO  
DSP_LDO_V bit in the LDOCNTL register = 1  
DSP_LDO_V bit in the LDOCNTL register = 0  
LDOI = VMIN  
1.3  
V
DSP_LDOO voltage  
1.05  
V
DSP_LDO shutdown current(5)  
ANA_LDO shutdown current(5)  
USB_LDO shutdown current(5)  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
ISD  
LDOI = VMIN  
LDOI = VMIN  
25  
Input only pin, internal pulldown or pullup disabled  
–5  
+5  
Input current [DC] (except  
WAKEUP, I2C, and GPAIN[3:0]  
pins)  
–59 to  
–161  
(6)(7)  
IILPU  
DVDD = 3.3 V with internal pullup enabled(8)  
DVDD = 1.8 V with internal pullup enabled(8)  
µA  
µA  
–14 to –44  
(1) For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or TYP, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.  
(2) The USB I/Os adhere to the Universal Bus Specification Revision 2.0 (USB2.0 spec).  
(3) VDD is the voltage to which the I2C bus pullup resistors are connected.  
(4) Applies to all input pins except WAKEUP, I2C pins, GPAIN[3:0], RTC_XI, and USB_MXI.  
(5) ISD is the amount of current the LDO is ensured to deliver before shutting down to protect itself.  
(6) II applies to input-only pins and bidirectional pins. For input-only pins, II indicates the input leakage current. For bidirectional pins, II  
indicates the input leakage current and off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.  
(7) When CVDD power is "ON", the pin bus-holders are disabled. For more detailed information, see Section 5.7.2.3, Digital I/O Behavior  
When Core Power (CVDD) is Down.  
(8) Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.  
58  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)  
(1)  
PARAMETER  
TEST CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNIT  
µA  
Input only pin, internal pulldown or pullup disabled  
DVDD = 3.3 V with internal pulldown enabled(8)  
DVDD = 1.8 V with internal pulldown enabled(8)  
–5  
+5  
Input current [DC] (except  
WAKEUP, I2C, and GPAIN[3:0]  
pins)  
(6)(7)  
IIHPD  
52 to 158  
11 to 35  
µA  
µA  
IIH  
IIL  
/
VI = VSS to DVDD with internal pullups and  
pulldowns disabled.  
Input current [DC], ALL pins  
–5  
–4  
+5  
µA  
(7)  
All Pins (except USB, EMIF, CLKOUT, and  
GPAIN[3:0] pins)  
mA  
DVDD = 3.3 V  
EMIF pins  
–6  
–5  
–6  
–4  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
DVDD = 1.8 V  
DVDD = 3.3 V  
CLKOUT pin  
(7)  
IOH  
High-level output current [DC]  
DVDD = 1.8 V  
DVDD = VDDA_ANA  
1.3 V,  
=
–4  
mA  
GPAIN[3:1] pins  
External Regulator(9)  
(GPAIN0 is open-drain  
and cannot drive high)  
DVDD = VDDA_ANA  
1.3 V,  
=
–100  
µA  
Internal Regulator(9)  
All Pins (except USB, EMIF, CLKOUT, and  
GPAIN[3:0] pins)  
+4  
mA  
DVDD = 3.3 V  
EMIF pins  
+6  
+5  
+6  
+4  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
DVDD = 1.8 V  
DVDD = 3.3 V  
CLKOUT pin  
(7)  
IOL  
Low-level output current [DC]  
DVDD = 1.8 V  
DVDD = VDDA_ANA  
1.3 V, external regulator  
=
+4  
+4  
mA  
mA  
GPAIN[3:0]  
DVDD = VDDA_ANA  
1.3 V, internal  
regulator(9)  
=
All Pins (except USB and GPAIN[3:0])  
GPAIN[3:0] pins  
–10  
–10  
+10  
+10  
2.2  
µA  
µA  
(10)  
IOZ  
I/O Off-state output current  
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V  
Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V  
Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V  
Supply voltage, I/O, 3.3 V  
Supply voltage, I/O, 2.75 V  
Supply voltage, I/O, 1.8 V  
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
Bus Holder pull low current when  
CVDD is powered "OFF"  
(11)  
IOLBH  
1.6  
0.72  
–1.3  
–0.97  
–0.46  
Bus Holder pull high current  
when CVDD is powered "OFF"  
(11)  
IOHBH  
0.93  
1.23  
1.54  
Room Temp, Phase detector = 12 MHz, VCO =  
125 MHz  
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V  
Analog PLL (VDDA_PLL) supply  
current  
I
mA  
Room Temp, Phase detector = 12 MHz, VCO =  
175 MHz  
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V  
Room Temp, Phase detector = 12 MHz, VCO =  
200 MHz  
VDDA_ANA = 1.3 V, SAR clock = 2 MHz, Temp  
(70 °C)  
SAR Analog (VDDA_ANA) supply  
current  
1
mA  
CI  
Input capacitance  
Output capacitance  
4
4
pF  
pF  
Co  
(9) When the ANA_LDO supplies VDDA_ANA, it is not recommended to use the GPAIN[3:1] signals for general-purpose outputs (driving  
high). The ISD parameter of the ANA_LDO is too low to drive any realistic load on the GPAIN[3:1] pins while also supplying the PLL  
through VDDA_PLL and the SAR through VDDA_ANA  
.
(10) IOZ applies to output-only pins, indicating off-state (Hi-Z) output leakage current.  
(11) This parameter specifies the maximum strength of the Bus Holder and is needed to calculate the minimum strength of external pullups  
and pulldowns.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
59  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.4 Handling Ratings  
MIN  
–65  
0
MAX  
150  
UNIT  
ºC  
V
Tstg  
Storage temperature range (default)  
Electrostatic Discharge Human Body Model (HBM)(2)  
>1000  
>250  
(ESD) Stress Voltage(1)  
Charged Device Model (CDM)(3)  
0
V
(1) ESD to measure device sensitivity and immunity to damage caused by electrostatic discharges into the device.  
(2) Level listed is the passing level per ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001-2010. JEDEC document JEP155 states that 500 V HBM allows safe  
manufacturing with a standard ESD control process, and manufacturing with less than 500 V HBM is possible if the necessary  
precautions are taken. Pins listed as 1000 V may actually have higher performance.  
(3) Level listed is the passing level per EIA-JEDEC JESD22-C101E. JEDEC document JEP157 states that 250 V CDM allows safe  
manufacturing with a standard ESD control process. Pins listed as 250 V may actually have higher performance.  
Section 5.5 shows the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA–ZCH mechanical package.  
5.5 Thermal Characteristics  
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)  
NO.  
°C/W(1)  
AIR FLOW  
(m/s)(2)  
1
2
RTJC  
RTJB  
Junction-to-case  
Junction-to-board  
1S0P  
1S0P  
2S2P  
1S0P  
2S2P  
6.74  
14.5  
13.8  
57.0  
33.4  
N/A  
N/A  
3
0.00  
RTJA  
Junction-to-free air  
4
5
0.50  
1.00  
2.00  
3.00  
0.00  
0.50  
1.00  
2.00  
3.00  
0.00  
0.50  
1.00  
2.00  
3.00  
RTJMA  
Junction-to-moving air  
6
7
8
0.09  
13.7  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
PsiJT  
Junction-to-package top  
Junction-to-board  
PsiJB  
(1) These measurements were conducted in a JEDEC defined 2S2P system and will change based on environment as well as application.  
For more information, see these EIA/JEDEC standards – EIA/JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment  
Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air) and JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount  
Packages.  
(2) m/s = meters per second  
5.6 Power-On Hours  
Over Operating Case Temperature Range (Unless Otherwise Noted)  
Device Operating Life  
DSP Operating Frequency  
(SYSCLK): 200 MHz  
Commercial  
Industrial  
-10 to 70°C  
-40 to 85°C  
100,000  
POH(2)  
Power-On Hours (POH)(1)  
(1) This information is provided solely for your convenience and does not extend or modify the warranty provided under TI’s standard terms  
and conditions for TI semiconductor products.  
(2) POH = 100,000 when the Maximum Core Supply Voltages are limited to 105% of the Nominal Core Supply Voltages (For details on the  
Core Supplies, see Section 5.2, Recommended Operating Conditions).  
60  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7 Timing and Switching Characteristics  
5.7.1 Parameter Information  
Tester Pin Electronics  
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point  
42 Ω  
3.5 nH  
Output  
Under  
Test  
Transmission Line  
Z0 = 50 Ω  
(see Note)  
Device Pin  
(see Note)  
4.0 pF  
1.85 pF  
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects must be  
taken into account.Atransmission line with a delay of 2 ns can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is  
intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns) from the data sheet timings.  
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.  
Figure 5-1. 3.3-V Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements  
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This  
load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.  
5.7.1.1 1.8-V, 2.75-V, and 3.3-V Signal Transition Levels  
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks, VOL  
MAX and VOH MIN for output clocks.  
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN)  
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX)  
Figure 5-2. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels  
5.7.1.2 3.3-V Signal Transition Rates  
All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns).  
5.7.1.3 Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis  
The timing parameter values specified in this data manual do not include delays by board routing. As a  
good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be  
adjusted by increasing and decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer  
information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS  
models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing  
Analysis application report [literature number SPRA839]. If needed, external logic hardware such as  
buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
61  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.2 Power Supplies  
5.7.2.1 Power Considerations  
The device provides several means of managing power consumption.  
To minimize power consumption, the device divides its circuits into nine main isolated supply domains:  
LDOI (LDOs and Bandgap Power Supply)  
Analog POR, SAR, and PLL (VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL  
)
RTC Core (CVDDRTC) — Note: CVDDRTC must always be powered by an external power source. None  
of the on-chip LDOs can be used to power CVDDRTC  
Digital Core (CVDD  
USB Core (USB_VDD1P3 and USB_VDDA1P3  
USB PHY and USB PLL (USB_VDDOSC, USB_VDDA3P3, and USB_VDDPLL  
EMIF I/O (DVDDEMIF  
RTC I/O (DVDDRTC  
Rest of the I/O (DVDDIO  
.
)
)
)
)
)
)
5.7.2.1.1 LDO Configuration  
The device includes three Low-Dropout Regulators (LDOs) which can be used to regulate the power  
supplies of the SAR ADC and Power Management (ANA_LDO), Digital Core (DSP_LDO), and USB Core  
(USB_LDO).  
These LDOs are controlled by a combination of pin configuration and register settings. For more detailed  
information see the following sections.  
5.7.2.1.1.1 LDO Inputs  
The LDOI pins (B12, F13, F14) provide power to the internal Analog LDO, DSP LDO, USB LDO, the  
bandgap reference generator, and some I/O input pins, and can range from 1.8 V to 3.6 V. The bandgap  
provides accurate voltage and current references to the POR, LDOs, PLL, and SAR; therefore, for proper  
device operation, power must always be applied to the LDOI pins even if the LDO outputs are not used.  
5.7.2.1.1.2 LDO Outputs  
The ANA_LDOO pin (A12) is the output of the internal ANA_LDO and can provide regulated 1.3 V power  
of up to 4 mA. The ANA_LDOO pin is intended to be connected, on the board, to the VDDA_ANA pin to  
provide a regulated 1.3 V to the 10-bit SAR ADC and Power Management Circuits. VDDA_ANA may be  
powered by this LDO output, which is recommended, to take advantage of the device's power  
management techniques, or by an external power supply. The ANA_LDO cannot be disabled individually  
(see Section 5.7.2.1.1.2.1, LDO Control).  
The DSP_LDOO pin (E10) is the output of the internal DSP_LDO and provides software-selectable  
regulated 1.3 V or regulated 1.05 V power of up to 250 mA. The DSP_LDOO pin is intended to be  
connected, on the board, to the CVDD pins. In this configuration, the DSP_LDO_EN pin should be tied to  
the board VSS, thus enabling the DSP_LDO.  
Optionally, the CVDD pins may be powered by an external power supply. In this configuration the  
DSP_LDO_EN pin should be tied (high) to LDOI, disabling DSP_LDO.  
The DSP_LDO_EN also affects how reset is generated to the chip (for more details, see the  
DSP_LDO_EN pin description in Table 4-17, Regulators and Power Management Signal Descriptions).  
When the DSP_LDO is disabled, its output pin is in a high-impedance state.  
The LDOs cannot supply power to CVDDRTC, which requires an external power source because CVDDRTC  
must always be on for proper operation.  
62  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
NOTE  
DSP_LDO can only provide a regulated 1.05 V or 1.3 V. When the DSP Core (CVDD  
)
requires 1.4 V, an external supply is required to supply 1.4 V to the DSP Core (CVDD) and  
the DSP_LDO_EN pin should be tied to LDOI.  
The USB_LDOO pin (F12) is the output of the internal USB_LDO and provides regulated 1.3 V, software-  
switchable (on and off) power of up to 25 mA. The USB_LDOO pin is intended to be connected, on the  
board, to the USB_VDD1P3 and USB_VDDA1P3 pins to provide power to portions of the USB. Optionally, the  
USB_VDD1P3 and USB_VDDA1P3 may be powered by an external power supply and the USB_LDO can be  
left disabled. When the USB_LDO is disabled, its output pin is in a high-impedance state.  
5.7.2.1.1.2.1 LDO Control  
All three LDOs can be simultaneously disabled via software by writing to either the BG_PD bit or the  
LDO_PD bit in the RTCPMGT register (see Figure 5-3). When the LDOs are disabled via this mechanism,  
the only way to re-enable them is by cycling power to the CVDDRTC pin.  
ANA_LDO: The ANA_LDO is only disabled by the BG_PD and the LDO_PD mechanism described above.  
Otherwise, it is always enabled.  
DSP_LDO: The DSP_LDO can be statically disabled by the DSP_LDO_EN pin as described in  
Section 5.7.2.1.1.2, LDO Outputs. The DSP_LDO can also be dynamically enabled and disabled via the  
BG_PD and the LDO_PD mechanism described above. The DSP_LDO can change its output voltage  
dynamically by software via the DSP_LDO_V bit in the LDOCNTL register (see Figure 5-4). The  
DSP_LDO output voltage is set to 1.3 V at reset.  
USB_LDO: The reset state of the USB_LDO is dependent on the setting of CLK_SEL pin. If CLK_SEL is  
high, the USB_LDO is disabled but can be independently and dynamically enabled or disabled by  
software via the USB_LDO_EN bit in the LDOCNTL register (see Figure 5-4). If CLK_SEL is low, the USB  
LDO is enabled at reset and can never be disabled. This is to ensure the USB oscillator has power when  
it is the source of the system clock.  
Table 5-3 shows the ON and OFF control of each LDO and its register control bit configurations.  
Figure 5-3. RTC Power Management Register (RTCPMGT) [1930h]  
15  
7
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
0
Reserved  
R-0  
6
5
4
3
2
1
Reserved  
WU_DOUT  
R/W-1  
WU_DIR  
BG_PD  
LDO_PD  
RTCCLKOUTE  
N
R/W-0  
R/W-0  
R/W-0  
R/W-0  
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset  
Table 5-1. RTCPMGT Register Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
15:5  
Reserved  
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.  
Wakeup output, active low, open-drain.  
0 = WAKEUP pin driven low.  
4
WU_DOUT  
1 = WAKEUP pin is in high-impedance (Hi-Z).  
Wakeup pin direction control.  
0 = WAKEUP pin configured as a input.  
1 = WAKEUP pin configured as a output.  
3
WU_DIR  
Note: When the WAKEUP pin is configured as an input, it is active high. When the WAKEUP pin is  
configured as an output, is an open-drain that is active low and should be externally pulled-up via a  
10-kΩ resistor to DVDDRTC. WU_DIR must be configured as an input to allow the WAKEUP pin to  
wake the device up from idle modes.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
63  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-1. RTCPMGT Register Bit Descriptions (continued)  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
Bandgap, on-chip LDOs, and the analog POR power down bit.  
This bit shuts down the on-chip LDOs (ANA_LDO, DSP_LDO, and USB_LDO), the Analog POR,  
and Bandgap reference. BG_PD and LDO_PD are only intended to be used when the internal  
LDOs supply power to the chip. If the internal LDOs are bypassed and not used then the BG_PD  
and LDO_PD power-down mechanisms should not be used.  
2
BG_PD  
After this bit is asserted, the on-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and the Bandgap reference can be re-  
enabled by the WAKEUP pin (high) or the RTC alarm interrupt. The Bandgap circuit will take about  
100 msec to charge the external 0.1 uF capacitor via the internal 326-kΩ resistor.  
0 = On-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and Bandgap reference are enabled.  
1 = On-chip LDOs, Analog POR, and Bandgap reference are disabled (shutdown).  
On-chip LDOs and Analog POR power down bit.  
This bit shuts down the on-chip LDOs (ANA_LDO, DSP_LDO, and USB_LDO) and the Analog  
POR. BG_PD and LDO_PD are only intended to be used when the internal LDOs supply power to  
the chip. If the internal LDOs are bypassed and not used then the BG_PD and LDO_PD power-  
down mechanisms should not be used.  
1
0
LDO_PD  
After this bit is asserted, the on-chip LDOs and Analog POR can be re-enabled by the WAKEUP  
pin (high) or the RTC alarm interrupt. This bit keeps the Bandgap reference turned on to allow a  
faster wake-up time with the expense power consumption of the Bandgap reference.  
0 = On-chip LDOs and Analog POR are enabled.  
1 = On-chip LDOs and Analog POR are disabled (shutdown).  
Clockout output enable bit.  
RTCCLKOUTEN 0 = Clock output disabled.  
1 = Clock output enabled.  
Figure 5-4. LDO Control Register (LDOCNTL) [7004h]  
15  
14  
6
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
Reserved  
R-0  
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
R-0  
DSP_LDO_V  
R/W-0  
USB_LDO_EN  
R/W-CLK_SEL  
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset  
Table 5-2. LDOCNTL Register Bit Descriptions  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
15:2  
Reserved  
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.  
DSP_LDO voltage select bit.  
1
DSP_LDO_V  
0 = DSP_LDOO is regulated to 1.3 V.  
1 = DSP_LDOO is regulated to 1.05 V.  
USB_LDO enable bit.  
The reset state of this bit is dependent on the setting of CLK_SEL pin at reset.  
If CLK_SEL is high, the USB_LDO is disabled (USB_LEO_EN = 0).  
If CLK_SEL is low, the USB LDO is enabled (USB_LDO_EN=1).  
0
USB_LDO_EN  
0 = USB_LDO output is disabled. USB_LDOO pin is placed in high-impedance (Hi-Z) state.  
1 = USB_LDO output is enabled. USB_LDOO is regulated to 1.3 V.  
Note: When CLK_SEL = 0, this bit will not be able to be set to 0 and the USB_LDO will stay  
enabled.  
64  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-3. LDO Controls Matrix  
RTCPMGT Register  
(0x1930)  
LDOCNTL Register  
(0x7004)  
DSP_LDO_EN  
(Pin D12)  
CLK_SEL  
(Pin C7)  
ANA_LDO  
DSP_LDO  
USB_LDO  
BG_PD Bit  
LDO_PD Bit  
USB_LDO_EN Bit  
1
Don't Care  
Don't Care  
Don't Care  
Don't Care  
Low  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Don't Care  
1
Don't Care  
0
0
Don't Care  
ON  
0
0
Don't Care  
High  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
1
Don't Care  
Don't Care  
Don't Care  
Don't Care  
Low  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
Don't Care  
1
0
0
0
0
Don't Care  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
High  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
Low  
ON  
High  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
65  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.2.2 Power-Supply Sequencing  
The device includes four core voltage-level supplies (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3), and  
several I/O supplies including—DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC, USB_VDDOSC, and USB_VDDA3P3  
.
Some TI power-supply devices include features that facilitate power sequencing—for example, Auto-Track  
and Slow-Start and Enable features. For more information regarding TI's power management products  
and suggested devices to power TI DSPs, visit www.ti.com/processorpower.  
The device does not require a specific power-up sequence. However, if the DSP_LDO is disabled  
(DSP_LDO_EN = high) and an external regulator supplies power to the CPU Core (CVDD), the external  
reset signal (RESET) must be held asserted until all of the supply voltages reach their valid operating  
ranges.  
Note: the external reset signal on the RESET pin must be held low until all of the power supplies reach  
their operating voltage conditions.  
The I/O design allows either the core supplies (CVDD, CVDDRTC, USB_VDD1P3, USB_VDDA1P3) or the I/O  
supplies (DVDDIO, DVDDEMIF, DVDDRTC, USB_VDDOSC, and USB_VDDA3P3) to be powered up for an indefinite  
period of time while the other supply is not powered if the following constraints are met:  
1. All maximum ratings and recommended operating conditions are satisfied.  
2. All warnings about exposure to maximum rated and recommended conditions, particularly junction  
temperature are satisfied. These apply to power transitions as well as normal operation.  
3. Bus contention while core supplies are powered must be limited to 100 hours over the projected  
lifetime of the device.  
4. Bus contention while core supplies are powered down does not violate the absolute maximum ratings.  
If the USB subsystem is used, the subsystem must be powered up in the following sequence:  
1. USB_VDDA1P3 and USB_VDD1P3  
2. USB_VDDA3P3  
3. USB_VBUS  
If the USB subsystem is not used, the following can be powered off:  
USB Core  
USB_VDD1P3  
USB_VDDA1P3  
USB PHY and I/O Level Supplies  
USB_VDDOSC  
USB_VDDA3P3  
USB_VDDPLL  
A supply bus is powered up when the voltage is within the recommended operating range. The supply bus  
is powered down when the voltage is below that range, either stable or while in transition.  
66  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.2.3 Digital I/O Behavior When Core Power (CVDD) is Down  
With some exceptions (listed below), all digital I/O pins on the device have special features to allow  
powering down of the Digital Core Domain (CVDD) without causing I/O contentions or floating inputs at the  
pins (see Figure 5-5). The device asserts the internal signal called HHV high when power has been  
removed from the Digital Core Domain (CVDD). Asserting the internal HHV signal causes the following  
conditions to occur in any order:  
All output pin strong drivers to go to the high-impedance (Hi-Z) state  
Weak bus holders to be enabled to hold the pin at a valid high or low  
The internal pullups or pulldowns (IPUs and IPDs) on the I/O pins will be disabled  
The exception pins that do not have this special feature are:  
Pins driven by the CVDDRTC Power Domain [This power domain is "Always On"; therefore, the pins  
driven by CVDDRTC do not need these special features]:  
RTC_XI, RTC_XO, RTC_CLKOUT, and WAKEUP  
USB Pins:  
USB_DP, USB_DM, USB_R1, USB_VBUS, USB_MXI, and USB_MXO  
Pins for the Analog Block:  
GPAIN[3:0], DSP_LDO_EN, and BG_CAP  
DVDD  
Y
A
PAD  
hhvgz  
HHV  
GZ  
OR  
HHV  
PI  
hhvpi  
OR  
HHV  
Figure 5-5. Bus Holder I/O Circuit  
NOTE  
Figure 5-5 shows both a pullup and pulldown but pins only have one, not both.  
PI = Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit  
GZ = Output Enable (active low)  
HHV = Described in Section 5.7.2.3  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
67  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.2.4 Power-Supply Design Considerations  
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to minimize  
inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance  
applications utilizing the device, the PC board should include separate power planes for core, I/O,  
VDDA_ANA and VDDA_PLL (which can share the same PCB power plane), and ground; all bypassed with  
high–quality low–ESL and ESR capacitors.  
5.7.2.5 Power-Supply Decoupling  
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place capacitors (caps) as close as  
possible to the device. These caps need to be no more than 1.25 cm maximum distance from the device  
power pins to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better but need to be evaluated  
from a yield and manufacturing point-of-view. Parasitic inductance limits the effectiveness of the  
decoupling capacitors, therefore physically smaller capacitors should be used while maintaining the largest  
available capacitance value.  
Larger caps for each supply can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on the order  
of 10 µF) should be furthest away, but still as close as possible. Large caps for each supply should be  
placed outside of the BGA footprint.  
As with the selection of any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product's production  
lifetime should be considered.  
The recommended decoupling capacitance for the DSP core supplies should be 1 µF in parallel with 0.01-  
µF capacitor per supply pin.  
5.7.2.6 LDO Input Decoupling  
The LDO inputs should follow the same decoupling guidelines as other power-supply pins above.  
5.7.2.7 LDO Output Decoupling  
The LDO circuits implement a voltage feedback control system which has been designed to optimize gain  
and stability tradeoffs. As such, there are design assumptions for the amount of capacitance on the LDO  
outputs. For proper device operation, the following external decoupling capacitors should be used when  
the on-chip LDOs are enabled:  
ANA_LDOO– 1µF  
DSP_LDOO – 5µF ~ 10µF  
USB_LDOO – 1µF ~ 2µF  
68  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.3 Reset  
The device has two main types of reset: hardware reset and software reset.  
Hardware reset is responsible for initializing all key states of the device. The hardware reset occurs  
whenever the RESET pin is asserted or when the internal power-on-reset (POR) circuit deasserts an  
internal signal called POWERGOOD. The device's internal POR is a voltage comparator that monitors the  
DSP_LDOO pin voltage and generates the internal POWERGOOD signal when the DSP_LDO is enabled  
externally by the DSP_LDO_EN pin. POWERGOOD is asserted when the DSP_LDOO voltage is above a  
minimum threshold voltage provided by the bandgap. When the DSP_LDO is disabled (DSP_LDO_EN is  
high), the internal voltage comparator becomes inactive, and the POWERGOOD signal logic level is  
immediately set high. The RESET pin and the POWERGOOD signal are internally combined with a logical  
AND gate to produce an (active low) hardware reset (see Figure 5-6, Power-On Reset Timing  
Requirements and Figure 5-7, Reset Timing Requirements).  
There are two types of software reset: the CPU's software reset instruction and the software control of the  
peripheral reset signals. For more information on the CPU's software reset instruction, see the C55x CPU  
3.0 CPU Reference Guide [literature number: SWPU073]. In all the device documentation, all references  
to "reset" refer to hardware reset. Any references to software reset will explicitly state software reset.  
The device RTC has one additional type of reset, a power-on-reset (POR) for the registers in the RTC  
core. This POR monitors the voltage of CVDDRTC and resets the RTC registers when power is first applied  
to the RTC core.  
5.7.3.1 Power-On Reset (POR) Circuits  
The device includes two power-on reset (POR) circuits, one for the RTC (RTC POR) and another for the  
rest of the chip (MAIN POR).  
5.7.3.1.1 RTC Power-On Reset (POR)  
The RTC POR ensures that the flip-flops in the CVDDRTC power domain have an initial state upon  
powerup. In particular, the RTCNOPWR register is reset by this POR and is used to indicate that the RTC  
time registers need to be initialized with the current time and date when power is first applied.  
5.7.3.1.2 Main Power-On Reset (POR)  
The device includes an analog power-on reset (POR) circuit that keeps the DSP in reset until specific  
voltages have reached predetermined levels. When the DSP_LDO is enabled externally by the  
DSP_LDO_EN pin, the output of the POR circuit, POWERGOOD, is held low until the following conditions  
are satisfied:  
LDOI is powered and the bandgap is active for at least approximately 8 ms  
VDD_ANA is powered for at least approximately 4 ms  
DSP_LDOO is above a threshold of approximately 950 mV (see the following Note:)  
Note: The POR comparator has hysteresis, so the threshold voltage becomes approximately 850 mV after  
POWERGOOD signal is set high.  
Once these conditions are met, the internal POWERGOOD signal is set high. The POWERGOOD signal  
is internally combined with the RESET pin signal, via an AND-gate, to produce the DSP subsystem's  
global reset. This global reset is the hardware reset for the whole chip, except the RTC. When the global  
reset is deasserted (high), the boot sequence starts. For more detailed information on the boot sequence,  
see Section 6.4.1, Boot Sequence.  
When the DSP_LDO is disabled (DSP_LDO_EN pin = 1), the voltage monitoring on the DSP_LDOO pin is  
de-activated and the POWERGOOD signal is immediately set high. The RESET pin will be the sole  
source of hardware reset.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
69  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.3.1.3 Reset Pin (RESET)  
The device can receive an external reset signal on the RESET pin. As specified above in  
Section 5.7.3.1.2, Main Power-On Reset, the RESET pin is combined with the internal POWERGOOD  
signal, that is generated by the MAIN POR, via an AND-gate. The output of the AND gate provides the  
hardware reset to the chip. The RESET pin may be tied high and the MAIN POR can provide the  
hardware reset in case DSP_LDO is enabled (DSP_LDO_EN = 0), but an external hardware reset must  
be provided via the RESET pin when the DSP_LDO is disabled (DSP_LDO_EN = 1).  
Once the hardware reset is applied, the system clock generator is enabled and the DSP starts the boot  
sequence. For more information on the boot sequence, see Section 6.4.1, Boot Sequence.  
5.7.3.2 Pin Behavior at Reset  
All pins are in Hi-Z state when RESET is applied, and pins are held in Hi-Z state for the first two clock  
cycles after RESET is de-asserted (set to high).  
During normal operation, pins are controlled by the respective peripheral selected in the External Bus  
Selection Register (EBSR) register. During power-on reset and reset, the behavior of the output pins  
changes and is categorized as follows:  
Z, High Group: EM_CS2, EM_CS3, EM_CS4, EM_CS5, EM_DQM0/UHPI_HBE0,  
EM_DQM1/UHPI_HBE1, EM_OE, EM_SDCAS/UHPI_HCS, EM_SDRAS/UHPI_HAS, EM_WE, XF  
Z, Low Group: SPI_CLK/UHPI_HINT, I2S2_DX/UHPI_HD[11]/GP[27]/SPI_TX, EM_R/W,  
MMC0_CLK/I2S0_CLK/GP[0]/McBSP_CLKX, MMC1_CLK/McSPI_CLK/GP[6], EM_SDCLK  
Z Group: EM_D[0:15], GP[21:26]/EM_A[15:20], GP[12:17]/UHPI_HD[2:7], EM_WAIT2, EM_WAIT3,  
EM_WAIT4, EM_WAIT5, EMU0, EMU1, SCL, SDA, TDO, USB_MXO, WAKEUP, RTC_CLKOUT  
I2S2_CLK/UHPI_HD[8]/GP[18]/SPI_CLK, I2S2_FS/UHPI_HD[9]/GP[19]/SPI_CS0,  
I2S2_RX/UHPI_HD[10]/GP[20]/SPI_RX  
MMC0_CMD/I2S0_FS/GP[1]/McBSP_FSX, MMC0_D0/I2S0_DX/GP[2]/McBSP_DX,  
MMC0_D1/I2S0_RX/GP[3]/McBSP_DR, MMC0_D2/GP[4]/McBSP_FSR,  
MMC0_D3/GP[5]/McBSP_CLKR_CLKS  
MMC1_CMD/McSPI_CS0/GP[7], MMC1_D0/McSPI_SIMO/GP[8], MMC1_D1/McSPI_SOMI/GP[9],  
MMC1_D2/McSPI_CS1/GP[10], MMC1_D3/McSPI_CS2/GP[11]  
UART_CTS/UHPI_HD[13]/GP[29]/I2S3_FS, UART_RXD/UHPI_HD[14]/GP[30]/I2S3_RX,  
SPI_TX/UHPI_HD[1], SPI_RX/UHPI_HD[0]  
Z, CLKOUT Group: CLKOUT  
Z Group - Analog: GPAIN0, GPAIN1, GPAIN2, GPAIN3  
Z, SYNCH 01 Group: EM_SDCKE/UHPI_HHWIL  
Z, SYNCH 10 Group: EM_CS0/UHPI_HDS1, EM_CS1/UHPI_HDS2  
Z, SYNCH22 01 Group: SPI_CS0/UHPI_HCNTL0, SPI_CS1/UHPI_HCNTL1,  
SPI_CS2/UHPI_HR_NW, SPI_CS3/UHPI_HRDY  
Z, SYNCH X1 Group: EM_BA[0], EM_BA[1], UART_RTS/UHPI_HD[12]/GP[28]/I2S3_CLK,  
UART_TXD/UHPI_HD[15]/GP[31]/I2S3_DX  
Z, SYNCH X0 Group: EM_A[0:10], EM_A[11]/(ALE), EM_A[12]/(CLE), EM_A[13], EM_A[14]  
70  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.3.3 Reset Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-4. Timing Requirements for Reset(1) (see Figure 5-6 and Figure 5-7)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
1
tw(RSTL)  
Pulse duration, RESET low  
3P  
3P  
ns  
(1) P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, if SYSCLK = 12 MHz, use P = 83.3 ns. In IDLE3 mode the system clock generator  
is bypassed and the SYSCLK frequency is equal to either CLKIN or the RTC clock frequency depending on CLK_SEL.  
For a description of IDLE3 mode, see the System chapter in the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor Technical Reference Manual  
[literature number SPRUH16].  
POWERGOOD  
(internal)  
RESETN  
(POWERGOOD &&  
RESETN)  
(internal)  
1
2
CLKIN or  
USB_Osc  
System Reset  
(internal)  
(DSP & Periphs)  
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z,Low Group  
Z,High Group  
Z Group  
Z,Synch X->0  
Group  
Z,Synch X->1  
Group  
Z,Synch 0->1  
Group  
Z
Z
Z
Z,Synch 1->0  
Group  
Z,Synch22 0->1  
Group  
CLKOUT  
22 clocks  
65535 clocks if CLK_SEL=1,  
131071 clocks if CLK_SEL=0  
Figure 5-6. Reset Timing When DSP_LDO_EN = 0  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
71  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
POWERGOOD  
(internal)  
RESETN  
(POWERGOOD &&  
RESETN)  
(internal)  
1
2
CLKIN or  
USB_Osc  
System Reset  
(internal)  
(DSP & Periphs)  
Z
Z,Low Group  
Z,High Group  
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z Group  
Z,Synch X->0  
Group  
Z,Synch X->1  
Group  
Z,Synch 0->1  
Group  
Z
Z
Z
Z,Synch 1->0  
Group  
Z,Synch22 0->1  
Group  
CLKOUT  
22 clocks  
65535 clocks if CLK_SEL=1,  
131071 clocks if CLK_SEL=0  
Figure 5-7. Reset Timing When DSP_LDO_EN = 1  
72  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.3.4 Configurations at Reset  
Some device configurations are determined at reset. The following subsections give more details.  
5.7.3.4.1 Device and Peripheral Configurations at Device Reset  
Table 5-5 summarizes the device boot and configuration pins that are required to be statically tied high,  
tied low, or left unconnected during device operation. For proper device operation, a device reset should  
be initiated after changing any of these pin functions.  
Table 5-5. Default Functions Affected by Device Configuration Pins  
CONFIGURATION PINS  
SIGNAL NO.  
IPU and IPD  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
DSP_LDO enable input.  
DSP_LDO_EN  
D12  
This signal is not intended to be dynamically  
switched.  
0 = DSP_LDO is enabled. The internal DSP LDO  
is enabled to regulate power on the DSP_LDOO  
pin at either 1.3 V or 1.05 V according to the  
LDO_DSP_V bit in the LDOCNTL register, see  
Figure 5-4). At power-on-reset, the internal POR  
monitors the DSP_LDOO pin voltage and  
generates the internal POWERGOOD signal  
when the DSP_LDO voltage is above a minimum  
threshold voltage. The internal device reset is  
generated by the AND of POWERGOOD and the  
RESET pin.  
1 = DSP_LDO is disabled and the DSP_LDOO  
pin is in high-impedance (Hi-Z). The internal  
voltage monitoring on the DSP_LDOO is  
bypassed and the internal POWERGOOD signal  
is immediately set high. The RESET pin (D6) will  
act as the sole reset source for the device. If an  
external power supply is used to provide power to  
CVDD, then DSP_LDO_EN should be tied to  
LDOI, DSP_LDOO should be left unconnected,  
and the RESET pin must be asserted  
appropriately for device initialization after  
powerup.  
Note: to pullup this pin, connect it to the same  
supply as LDOI pins.  
CLK_SEL  
C7  
Clock input select.  
0 = The on-chip USB oscillator is enabled and  
drives the system clock generator. Also, the USB  
LDOO is enabled at reset (USB_LDO_EN=1). In  
this configuration, CLKIN must be tied to GND.  
1 = CLKIN drives the system clock generator.  
The on-chip USB oscillator and USB_LDO are  
disabled at reset (USB_LDO_EN=0) but can be  
enabled by software  
This pin is not allowed to change during device  
operation; it must be tied to DVDDIO or GND at  
the board.  
For proper device operation, external pullup and pulldown resistors may be required on these device  
configuration pins. For discussion on situations where external pullup and pulldown resistors are required,  
see Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors.  
This device also has RESERVED pins that need to be configured correctly for proper device operation  
(statically tied high, tied low, or left unconnected at all times). For more details on these pins, see Table 4-  
24, Reserved and No Connects Signal Descriptions.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
73  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.3.4.2 BootMode Implementation and Requirements  
The EM_A[20:15]/GP[26:21] pins are used to latch the bootmode, as defined in Table 6-34. These pins  
are defined as GPIO function at reset and they are in input state. Therefore these pins can be driven to  
the desired bootmode terminations at reset. Approximately 10 system cycles after the rising edge of the  
RESET pin, the state on these pins will be latched into registers readable by the DSP at IO-space address  
0x1C5A.  
As the bootloader code starts executing, it reads the latched value in the bootmode register and uses that  
value to determine from which peripheral or method to boot. In any case where the ASYNC modes  
(except for NAND) are used as the source data for bootloading (for example, bootload from external NOR  
flash to internal memory), the bootloader routine in ROM will change the EM_A[20:15] or GP[26:21] pins  
from GPIO mode to EMIF mode by writing to the EBSR (0x1C00). When this occurs, no signal contentions  
must be on the EM_A[20:15] or GP[26:21] pins. Passive static terminations by external pullup or pulldown  
resistors should also be considered.  
Note: Bootloading directly to external peripherals on the EMIF is not supported because the EMIF clock is  
turned off before jumping to bootloaded code.  
The bootloader must enable the EMIF function on these pins in order to increase the address reach from  
15-bits (EM_A[14:0] 32 kW) to the full 21-bits (EM_A[20:0] 2 MW). The bootloader does not have to  
enable the EMIF mode on the EM_A[20:15] or GP[26:21] pins for the following external memory types:  
NAND: Uses the EM_D[15:0] pins for both address and data and command signaling.  
SDRAM: Uses column and row addressing using no more than 11 bits of EM_A pins  
The following image contains two BootMode termination scenarios. Other options are also possible.  
74  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
1.8V/2.75V/3.3V  
DVDD_EMIF  
A[20]  
A[19]  
EM_A[20]/GP[26]  
EM_A[19]/GP[25]  
EM_A[18]/GP[24]  
EM_A[17]/GP[23]  
EM_A[16]/GP[22]  
EM_A[15]/GP[21]  
EM_[14:0]  
A[18]  
NOR  
Flash  
A[17]  
DSP  
A[16]  
A[15]  
A[14:0]  
XF  
VSS  
1.8V/2.75V/3.3V  
DVDD_EMIF  
A[20]  
A[19]  
EM_A[20]/GP[26]  
EM_A[19]/GP[25]  
EM_A[18]/GP[24]  
EM_A[17]/GP[23]  
EM_A[16]/GP[22]  
EM_A[15]/GP[21]  
EM_[14:0]  
A[18]  
NOR  
Flash  
A[17]  
DSP  
A[16]  
A[15]  
A[14:0]  
XF  
VSS  
OE  
External control logic  
Figure 5-8. BootMode Termination Scenarios  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
75  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
1
2
3 4 6 7 8 9 10  
5
System Clock  
RESET  
Bootmode  
[5:0]  
latched from  
GP[26:21]  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
XF  
CLKOUT  
EM_A[20:15]/  
GP[26:21]  
GPIO input mode  
(externally driven with desired bootmode)  
EMIF A[20:15] (output mode)  
Hi-Z  
time allowed fro external  
device to get off the bus  
65535 clocks if CLK_SEL=1,  
131071 clocks id CLK_SEL=0  
A. DSP changes the pin mode to EMIF Address (outputs) only if needed for the selected bootmode.  
Figure 5-9. BootMode Latching  
5.7.3.5 Configurations After Reset  
The following sections provide details on configuring the device after reset. Multiplexed pin functions are  
selected by software after reset. For more details on multiplexed pin function control, see Section 4.3, Pin  
Multiplexing.  
5.7.3.5.1 External Bus Selection Register (EBSR)  
The External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) determines the mapping of the UHPI, I2S2, I2S3, UART,  
SPI, McBSP, McSPI, and GPIO signals to 28 signals of the external parallel port pins. The EBSR also  
determines the mapping of the I2S, McBSP, McSPI, GPIO, or MMC and SD ports to serial port 0 pins and  
serial port 1 pins. The EBSR register is located at IO-space 0x1C00. Once the bit fields of this register are  
changed, the routing of the signals takes place on the next CPU clock cycle.  
In addition, the EBSR controls the function of the upper bits of the EMIF address bus. Pins EM_A[20:15]  
or GP[26:21] can be individually configured as GPIO pins through the Axx_MODE bits. When Axx_MODE  
= 1, the EM_A[xx] pin functions as a GPIO pin. When Axx_MODE = 0, the EM_A[xx] pin has EMIF  
address output functionality.  
Before modifying the values of the external bus selection register, you must clock gate all affected  
peripherals through the Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register. After the external bus selection register  
has been modified, you must reset the peripherals before using them through the Peripheral Software  
Reset Counter Register.  
Figure 5-10. External Bus Selection Register (EBSR) [1C00h]  
15  
14  
6
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
McBSP_CLKS  
Selection  
PPMODE  
SP1MODE  
R/W-00  
SP0MODE  
R/W-00  
R/W-0  
7
R/W-001  
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
R-0  
A20_MODE  
R/W-1  
A19_MODE  
R/W-1  
A18_MODE  
R/W-1  
A17_MODE  
R/W-1  
A16_MODE  
R/W-1  
A15_MODE  
R/W-1  
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset  
76 Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-6. EBSR Register Field Descriptions  
Bit  
Field  
Description  
McBSP_CLKS Selection  
McBSP_CLKS  
Selection  
0 = McBSP_CLKR signal is routed to MMC0_D3/GP[5]/McBSPCLKR_CLKS (L11) when  
SP0MODE=3  
15  
1 = McBSP_CLKS signal is routed to MMC0_D3/GP[5]/McBSPCLKR_CLKS (L11) when  
SP0MODE=3  
Parallel Port Mode Control Bits. These bits control the pin multiplexing of the UHPI, SPI, UART,  
I2S2, I2S3, and GP[31:27, 20:12] pins on the parallel port. For more details, see Table 4-20.  
000 = Mode 0 (16-bit UHPI bus). All 28 signals of the UHPI bus module are routed to the 28  
external signals of the parallel port. Note: SDRAM control signals are multiplexed with UHPI bus  
control signals. In this mode, UHPI bus signals are routed to the control ports, so SDRAM cannot  
be accessible.  
001 = Mode 1 (SPI, GPIO, UART, I2S2, and SDRAM). 7 signals of the SPI module, 6 GPIO  
signals, 4 signals of the UART module, 4 signals of the I2S2 module, and 7 SDRAM control signals  
are routed to the 28 external signals of the parallel port.  
010 = Mode 2 (GPIO and SDRAM). 8 GPIO and 7 SDRAM control signals are routed to the 28  
external signals of the parallel port.  
14:12  
PPMODE  
011 = Mode 3 (SPI, I2S3, and SDRAM). 4 signals of the SPI module, 4 signals of the I2S3 module,  
and 7 SDRAM control signals are routed to the 28 external signals of the parallel port.  
100 = Mode 4 (I2S2, UART, and SDRAM). 4 signals of the I2S2 module, 4 signals of the UART  
module, and 7 SDRAM control signals are routed to the 28 external signals of the parallel port.  
101 = Mode 5 (SPI, UART, and SDRAM). 4 signals of the SPI module, 4 signals of the UART  
module, and 7 SDRAM control signals are routed to the 28 external signals of the parallel port.  
110 = Mode 6 (SPI, I2S2, I2S3, GPIO, and SDRAM). 7 signals of the SPI module, 4 signals of the  
I2S2 module, 4 signals of the I2S3 module, 6 GPIO, and 7 SDRAM control signals are routed to the  
28 external signals of the parallel port.  
111 = Reserved.  
Serial Port 1 Mode Control Bits. The bits control the pin multiplexing of the MMC1, McSPI, and  
GPIO pins on serial port 1. For more details, see Table 4-21.  
00 = Mode 0 (MMC1 and SD1). All 6 signals of the MMC1 and SD1 module are routed to the 6  
external signals of the serial port 1.  
11:10  
SP1MODE  
01 = Mode 1 (McSPI). 6 signals of the McSPI module signals are routed to the 6 external signals of  
the serial port 1.  
10 = Mode 2 (GP[11:6]). 6 GPIO signals (GP[11:6]) are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial  
port 1.  
11 = Reserved.  
Serial Port 0 Mode Control Bits. The bits control the pin multiplexing of the MMC0, I2S0, McBSP,  
and GPIO pins on serial port 0. For more details, see Section 4.3.3.  
00 = Mode 0 (MMC0 and SD0). All 6 signals of the MMC0 and SD0 module are routed to the 6  
external signals of the serial port 0.  
9:8  
7-6  
SP0MODE  
Reserved  
01 = Mode 1 (I2S0 and GP[5:4]). 4 signals of the I2S0 module and 2 GP[5:4] signals are routed to  
the 6 external signals of the serial port 0.  
10 = Mode 2 (GP[5:0]). 6 GPIO signals (GP[5:0]) are routed to the 6 external signals of the serial  
port 0.  
11 = Mode 3 (McBSP). 6 signals of the McBSP module are routed to the 6 external signal port 0.  
Reserved. Read-only, writes have no effect.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
77  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-6. EBSR Register Field Descriptions (continued)  
Bit  
Field  
Description  
A20 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 20 (EM_A[20]) and  
general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]) pin functions.  
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 20 (EM_A[20]).  
5
A20_MODE  
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 26 (GP[26]).  
This is the default mode at reset and the pin is configured as an Input.  
Approximately 10 cycles after the rising edge of RESET, the state on this pin is latched into the  
BootMode register to specify the boot method.  
A19 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 19 (EM_A[19]) and  
general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]) pin functions.  
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 19 (EM_A[19]).  
4
A19_MODE  
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 25 (GP[25]).  
This is the default mode at reset and the pin is configured as an Input.  
Approximately 10 cycles after the rising edge of RESET, the state on this pin is latched into the  
BootMode register to specify the boot method.  
A18 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 18 (EM_A[18]) and  
general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]) pin functions.  
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 18 (EM_A[18]).  
3
A18_MODE  
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 24 (GP[24]).  
This is the default mode at reset and the pin is configured as an Input.  
Approximately 10 cycles after the rising edge of RESET, the state on this pin is latched into the  
BootMode register to specify the boot method.  
A17 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 17 (EM_A[17]) and  
general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 4-22,  
MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing.  
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 17 (EM_A[17]).  
2
A17_MODE  
A16_MODE  
A15_MODE  
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 23 (GP[23]).  
This is the default mode at reset and the pin is configured as an Input.  
Approximately 10 cycles after the rising edge of RESET, the state on this pin is latched into the  
BootMode register to specify the boot method.  
A16 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 16 (EM_A[16]) and  
general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 4-22,  
MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing.  
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 16 (EM_A[16]).  
1
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 22 (GP[22]).  
This is the default mode at reset and the pin is configured as an Input.  
Approximately 10 cycles after the rising edge of RESET, the state on this pin is latched into the  
BootMode register to specify the boot method.  
A15 Pin Mode Bit. This bit controls the pin multiplexing of the EMIF address 15 (EM_A[15]) and  
general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]) pin functions. For more details, see Table 4-22,  
MMC0, I2S0, McBSP, and GP[5:0] Pin Multiplexing.  
0 = Pin function is EMIF address pin 15 (EM_A[15]).  
0
1 = Pin function is general-purpose input/output pin 21 (GP[21]).  
This is the default mode at reset and the pin is configured as an Input.  
Approximately 10 cycles after the rising edge of RESET, the state on this pin is latched into the  
BootMode register to specify the boot method.  
78  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.3.5.2 LDO Control Register [7004h]  
When the DSP_LDO is enabled by the DSP_LDO_EN pin being tied low, the DSP_LDOO voltage is set  
by the DSP_LDO_V bit in this register. The reset state of this bit causes the DSP_LDOO output to be set  
to 1.3 V at boot. The DSP_LDOO voltage can be programmed to be either 1.05 V or 1.3 V via the  
DSP_LDO_V bit (bit 1) in the LDO Control Register (LDOCNTL).  
At reset, the USB_LDO state is dependent on the CLK_SEL pin. At reset, if CLK_SEL is high  
(CLK_SEL=1), the USB LDO is disabled but can be enabled via the USBLDOEN bit (bit 0) in the  
LDOCNTL register. If CLK_SEL is low (CLK_SEL=0), the USB LDO is enabled and cannot be disabled.  
For more detailed information on the LDOs, see Section 5.7.2.1.1, LDO Configuration.  
5.7.3.5.3 EMIF and USB System Control Registers (ESCR and USBSCR) [1C33h and 1C32h]  
After reset, by default, the CPU performs 16-bit accesses to the EMIF and USB registers and data space.  
To perform 8-bit accesses to the EMIF data space, the user must set the BYTEMODE bits to 01b for the  
"high byte" or 10b for the "low byte" in the EMIF System Control Register (ESCR). Similarly, the  
BYTEMODE bits in the USB System Control Register (USBSCR) must also be configured for byte access.  
5.7.3.5.4 Peripheral Clock Gating Control Registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2) [1C02h and 1C03h]  
After hardware reset, the DSP executes the on-chip bootloader from ROM. Depending on the BootMode  
used, the bootloader may leave the PCGCR1 and the PCGCR2 registers in various states. This is also  
true of the ICR and the ISR registers.  
Programmers should always verify the state of these registers and appropriately set them. Their states  
after boot loading are not determined by their reset conditions.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
79  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.3.5.5 Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Registers (PUDINHIBR1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7) [1C17h, 1C18h, 1C19h,  
1C4Ch, 1C4Dh, 1C4Fh, and 1C50h, respectively]  
Each internal pullup and pulldown (IPU and IPD) resistor on the device can be individually controlled  
through the IPU and IPD registers (PUDINHIBR1 [1C17h] , PUDINHIBR2 [1C18h], PUDINHIBR3 [1C19h],  
PUDINHIBR4 [1C4Ch], PUDINHIBR5 [1C4Dh], PUDINHIBR6 [1C4Fh], and PUDINHIBR7 [1C50h]). To  
minimize power consumption, internal pullup or pulldown resistors should be disabled in the presence of  
an external pullup or pulldown resistor or external driver. Most internal pullups and pulldowns are enabled  
at reset to help ensure no pins are left floating. Section 5.7.20.1.1, Pullup and Pulldown Resistors,  
describes other situations in which an pullup and pulldown resistors are required.  
When CVDD is powered down, pullup and pulldown resistors will be forced disabled and an internal bus-  
holder will be enabled. For more detailed information, see Section 5.7.2.3, Digital I/O Behavior When Core  
Power (CVDD) is Down.  
5.7.3.5.6 Output Slew Rate Control Register (OSRCR) [1C16h]  
To provide the lowest power consumption setting, the DSP has configurable slew rate control on the EMIF  
and CLKOUT output pins. The output slew rate control register (OSRCR) is used to set a subset of the  
device I/O pins, namely CLKOUT and EMIF pins, to either fast or slow slew rate. The slew rate feature is  
implemented by staging and delaying turn-on times of the parallel p-channel drive transistors and parallel  
n-channel drive transistors of the output buffer. In the slow slew rate configuration, the delay is longer, but  
ultimately the same number of parallel transistors are used to drive the output high or low. Thus, the drive  
strength is ultimately the same. The slower slew rate control can be used for power savings and has the  
greatest effect at lower DVDDIO and DVDDEMIF voltages.  
80  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.4 Clock Specifications  
5.7.4.1 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior  
All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic  
manner.  
5.7.4.2 Clock Considerations  
The system clock, which is used by the CPU and most of the DSP peripherals, is controlled by the system  
clock generator. The system clock generator features a software-programmable PLL multiplier and several  
dividers. The clock generator accepts an input reference clock from the CLKIN pin or the output clock of  
the on-chip USB oscillator. The selection of the input reference clock is based on the state of the  
CLK_SEL pin. The CLK_SEL pin is required to be statically tied high or low and cannot change  
dynamically after reset.  
If CLK_SEL=0 at reset, the on-chip USB oscillator is selected as the source of the system clock generator  
and the USB PLL as well. In this configuration, the on-chip USB oscillator cannot be turned off.  
If CLK_SEL=1 at reset, the external clock via the CLKIN pin will be used as the source of the system clock  
generator and the on-chip USB oscillator is used only for the USB PLL input. In this configuration, the on-  
chip USB oscillator can be turned off if the USB peripheral is not being used.  
In addition, the DSP requires a reference clock for the real-time clock (RTC). The RTC reference clock is  
generated using a dedicated on-chip oscillator with a 32.768-kHz external crystal connected to the  
RTC_XI and RTC_XO pins.  
The 32.768-kHz crystal can be disabled if the RTC peripheral is not being used. However, when the RTC  
oscillator is disabled, the RTC peripheral will not operate and the RTC registers (I/O address range  
1900h – 197Fh) will not be accessible. This includes the RTC power management register (RTCPMGT)  
which controls the RTCLKOUT and WAKEUP pins. To disable the RTC oscillator, connect the RTC_XI pin  
to CVDDRTC and the RTC_XO pin to ground.  
For more information on crystal specifications for the RTC oscillator and the USB oscillator, see  
Section 5.7.4.3.3, External Clock Input From RTC_XI, CLKIN, and USB_MXI Pins.  
5.7.4.2.1 Clock Configurations After Device Reset  
After reset, the on-chip Bootloader programs the system clock generator based on the value of  
EM_A[20:15] or GP[26:21], which are latched into the BootMode[5:0] bits in the BootMode register  
([1C34h]) at reset. (See Section 6.4, Boot Modes, for details.)  
5.7.4.2.1.1 Device Clock Frequency  
After the boot process is complete, the user is allowed to re-program the system clock generator to bring  
the device up to the desired clock frequency and the desired peripheral clock state (clock gating or not).  
The user must adhere to various clock requirements when programming the system clock generator. For  
more information, see Section 5.7.4.3, Clock PLLs.  
Note: The on-chip Bootloader allows for DSP registers to be configured during the boot process.  
However, this feature must not be used to change the output frequency of the system clock generator  
during the boot process. The bootloader also uses Timer0 to calculate the settling time of BG_CAP until  
executing bootloader code. The bootloader register modification feature must not modify the Timer0  
registers.  
5.7.4.2.1.2 Peripheral Clock State  
The clock and reset state of each of peripheral is controlled through a set of system registers. The  
peripheral clock gating control registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2) are used to enable and disable  
peripheral clocks. The peripheral software reset counter register (PSRCR) and the peripheral reset control  
register (PRCR) are used to assert and de-assert peripheral reset signals.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
81  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
After hardware reset, the DSP boots via the bootloader code in ROM. During the boot process, the  
bootloader chooses a peripheral or method to boot from based on the value of BootMode[5:0] bits in the  
BootMode register ([1C34h]) and queries the peripheral to determine if it can boot from that peripheral. At  
that time, the individual peripheral clock will be enabled for the query and then disabled again when the  
bootloader is finished with the peripheral. By the time the bootloader releases control to the user code, all  
peripheral clocks will be off and all domains in the ICR, except the CPU domain, will be idled.  
5.7.4.2.1.3 USB Oscillator Control  
At reset, if CLK_SEL = 0, the on-chip USB oscillator is enabled and is used as the clock source of the  
system clock generator. Since the USB oscillator is the system's clock source, it is not possible to disable  
the USB oscillator when CLK_SEL = 0.  
When CLK_SEL = 1, the USB Oscillator is disabled at reset but can be enabled or disabled by writing to  
the USB system control register (USBSCR). To enable the oscillator, the USBOSCDIS and  
USBOSCBIASDIS bits must be cleared to 0. The user must wait until the USB oscillator stabilizes before  
proceeding with the USB configuration. The USB oscillator stabilization time is typically 100 µs, with a 10  
ms maximum. (Note: The startup time is highly dependent on the ESR and capacitive load on the crystal.)  
5.7.4.3 PLLs  
The device DSP uses a software-programmable PLL to generate frequencies required by the CPU, DMA,  
and peripherals. The reference clock for the PLL is taken from either the CLKIN pin or the USB on-chip  
oscillator (as specified through the CLK_SEL pin).  
5.7.4.3.1 PLL Device-Specific Information  
There is a minimum and maximum operating frequency for CLKIN, PLLIN, and the system clock  
(SYSCLK). The system clock generator must be configured not to exceed any of these constraints  
documented in this section (certain combinations of external clock inputs, internal dividers, and PLL  
multiply ratios are not supported).  
Table 5-7. PLL Clock Frequency Ranges  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V  
CLOCK SIGNAL  
NAME  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP MAX  
MIN  
TYP MAX  
MIN  
TYP MAX  
11.2896,  
12.0,  
12.288,  
16.8,  
or  
11.2896,  
12.0,  
12.288,  
16.8,  
or  
11.2896,  
12.0,  
12.288,  
16.8,  
or  
CLKIN(1)  
MHz  
19.2  
19.2  
19.2  
PLLIN  
1.7  
60  
6.79  
120  
1.7  
60  
6.79  
120  
1.7  
60  
6.79 MHz  
120  
PLLOUT  
VCO Output(2)  
(before output  
divider OD and  
OD2)  
125  
0
625  
125  
0
625  
125  
0
625 MHz  
200 MHz  
SYSCLK  
75  
4
175  
4
PLL_LOCKTIME  
4
ms  
(1) These CLKIN values are used when the CLK_SEL pin = 1.  
(2) To use less PLL power, ensure VCO max is close to the SYSCLK max.  
82  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
The PLL has lock time requirements that must be followed. The PLL lock time is the amount of time  
needed for the PLL to complete its phase-locking sequence.  
5.7.4.3.2 Clock PLL Considerations With External Clock Sources  
If the CLKIN pin is used to provide the reference clock to the PLL, to minimize the clock jitter a single  
clean power supply should power both the device and the external clock oscillator circuit. The minimum  
CLKIN rise and fall times should also be observed. For the input clock timing requirements, see  
Section 5.7.4.4, Input and Output Clocks Electrical Data and Timing.  
Rise and fall times, duty cycles (high and low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external  
clock source must meet the device requirements in this data manual (see Section 5.3.2, Electrical  
Characteristics, and Section 5.7.4.4, Input and Output Clocks Electrical Data and Timing.  
5.7.4.3.3 External Clock Input From RTC_XI, CLKIN, and USB_MXI Pins  
The device DSP includes two options to provide an external clock input to the system clock generator:  
Use the on-chip USB oscillator with an external 12-MHz crystal connected to the USB_MXO and  
USB_MXI pins.  
Use an external LVCMOS clock input fed into the CLKIN pin that operates at the same voltage as the  
DVDDIO supply (1.8-, 2.75-, or 3.3-V).  
The CLK_SEL pin determines which input is used as the clock source for the system clock generator. For  
more details, see Section 5.7.3.4.1.  
If CLK_SEL = 0 at reset, the on-chip USB oscillator is used as the source of the system clock generator  
and the USB PLL as well.  
If CLK_SEL= 1 at reset, the external LVCMOS clock input fed into the CLKIN pin will be used as the  
source of the system clock generator and the on-chip USB oscillator is used only for the USB PLL source.  
In this configuration, the on-chip USB oscillator can be turned off if the USB peripheral is not being used.  
Additionally, the DSP requires a reference clock for the on-chip real time clock (RTC). The RTC reference  
clock is generated using a dedicated on-chip oscillator with a 32.768-kHz external crystal connected to the  
RTC_XI and RTC_XO pins. The crystal for the RTC oscillator is not required if the RTC is not used,  
however the RTC must still be powered by an external power source. None of the on-chip LDOs can  
power CVDDRTC. The RTC registers starting at I/O address 1900h will not be accessible without an RTC  
clock. This includes the RTC Power Management Register which provides control to the on-chip LDOs  
and WAKEUP and RTC_CLKOUT pins. Section 5.7.4.3.3.2, Real-Time Clock (RTC) On-Chip Oscillator  
With External Crystal, provides more details on using the RTC on-chip oscillator with an external crystal.  
5.7.4.3.3.1 USB On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal  
The USB on-chip oscillator requires an external 12-MHz crystal connected across the USB_MXI and  
USB_MXO pins, along with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-11. The external crystal load  
capacitors must be connected only to the USB oscillator ground pin (USB_VSSOSC). Do not connect to  
board ground (VSS). The USB_VDDOSC pin can be connected to the same power supply as USB_VDDA3P3  
.
If the external clock input via the CLKIN pin is used as the source of the system clock generator  
(CLK_SEL =1 at reset) and the USB peripheral is not being used, then the on-chip USB oscillator can be  
permanently disabled. To permanently disable the USB oscillator, connect the USB_MXI pin to ground  
(VSS) and leave the USB_MXO pin unconnected. The USB oscillator power pins (USB_VDDOSC and  
USB_VSSOSC) should also be connected to ground, as shown in Figure 5-12.  
When using an external 12-MHz oscillator, the external oscillator clock signal should be connected to the  
USB_MXI pin and the amplitude of the oscillator clock signal must meet the VIH requirement (see  
Section 5.2, Recommended Operating Conditions). The USB_MXO is left unconnected and the  
USB_VSSOSC signal is connected to board ground (VSS).  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
83  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
USB_MXI  
USB_MXO  
USB_VSSOSC USB_VDDOSC  
VSS  
USB_VDDA3P3  
Crystal  
12 MHz  
C1  
C2  
3.3 V  
3.3 V  
Figure 5-11. 12-MHz USB Oscillator  
USB_MXI  
USB_MXO  
USB_VSSOSC USB_VDDOSC  
VSS  
USB_VDDA3P3  
Figure 5-12. Connections when USB Oscillator is Permanently Disabled  
The crystal should be in fundamental-mode operation, and parallel resonant, with a maximum effective  
series resistance (ESR) specified in Table 5-8. The load capacitors, C1 and C2 are the total capacitance  
of the circuit board and components, excluding the IC and crystal. The load capacitor value is usually  
approximately twice the value of the crystal's load capacitance, CL, which is specified in the crystal  
manufacturer's datasheet and should be chosen such that the equation below is satisfied. All discrete  
components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the  
associated oscillator pins (USB_MXI and USB_MXO) and to the USB_VSSOSC pin.  
C C  
1
2
C
=
L
C
+ C  
2
(
)
1
Table 5-8. Input Requirements for Crystal on the 12-MHz USB Oscillator  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
NOM  
0.100  
12  
MAX  
UNIT  
ms  
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency of 12 MHz)(1)  
10  
Oscillation frequency  
ESR  
MHz  
kΩ  
100  
±100  
5
(2)  
Frequency stability  
ppm  
pF  
Maximum shunt capacitance  
Maximum crystal drive  
330  
µW  
(1) The startup time is highly dependent on the ESR and the capacitive load of the crystal.  
(2) If the USB is used, a 12-MHz, ±100-ppm crystal is recommended.  
84  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.4.3.3.2 Real-Time Clock (RTC) On-Chip Oscillator With External Crystal  
The on-chip RTC oscillator requires an external 32.768-kHz crystal connected across the RTC_XI and  
RTC_XO pins, along with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-13. The external crystal load  
capacitors must be connected only to the RTC oscillator ground pin (VSSRTC). Do not connect to board  
ground (VSS). Position the VSS lead on the board between RTC_XI and RTC_XO as a shield to reduce  
direct capacitance between RTC_XI and RTC_XO leads on the board. The CVDDRTC pin can be connected  
to the same power supply as CVDD, or may be connected to a different supply that meets the  
recommended operating conditions (see Section 5.2, Recommended Operating Conditions), if desired.  
RTC_XI  
RTC_XO  
VSSRTC  
CVDDRTC  
VSS  
CVDD  
Crystal  
32.768 kHz  
C1  
C2  
0.998-CVDD  
V
1.05/1.3/1.4 V  
Figure 5-13. 32.768-kHz RTC Oscillator  
The RTC oscillator can be optionally disabled by connecting RTC_XI to CVDDRTC and RTC_XO to ground  
(VSS). However, when the RTC oscillator is disabled the RTC registers starting at I/O address 1900h will  
not be accessible. This includes the RTC Power Management Register which provides control to the on-  
chip LDOs and WAKEUP and RTC_CLKOUT pins. Note: The RTC must still be powered even if the RTC  
oscillator is disabled.  
RTC_XI  
CVDDRTC  
RTC_XO  
VSS  
V SSRTC  
0.998–CVDD  
V
Figure 5-14. Connections when RTC Oscillator is Permanently Disabled  
The crystal should be in fundamental-mode function, and parallel resonant, with a maximum effective  
series resistance (ESR) specified in Table 5-9. The load capacitors, C1 and C2, are the total capacitance  
of the circuit board and components, excluding the IC and crystal. The load capacitors values are usually  
approximately twice the value of the crystal's load capacitance, CL, which is specified in the crystal  
manufacturer's datasheet and should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied. All discrete  
components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the  
associated oscillator pins (RTC_XI and RTC_XO) and to the VSSRTC pin.  
C C  
1
2
C
=
L
C
+ C  
2
(
)
1
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
85  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-9. Input Requirements for Crystal on the 32.768-kHz RTC Oscillator  
PARAMETER  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX  
UNIT  
sec  
kHz  
kΩ  
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency of 32.768-kHz)(1)  
0.2  
2
Oscillation frequency  
ESR  
32.768  
100  
1.6  
1.0  
Maximum shunt capacitance  
Maximum crystal drive  
pF  
µW  
(1) The startup time is highly dependent on the ESR and the capacitive load of the crystal.  
5.7.4.3.3.3 CLKIN Pin With LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input (Optional)  
Note: If CLKIN is not used, the pin must be tied low.  
A LVCMOS-compatible clock can be fed into the CLKIN pin for use by the DSP system clock generator.  
The external connections are shown in Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16. The bootloader assumes that the  
CLKIN pin is connected to the LVCMOS-compatible clock source with a frequency of 11.2896, 12.0,  
12.288, 16.8, or 19.2 MHz based on the value of BootMode[5:4] bits at reset. (See Section 6.4, Boot  
Mode, for details.) Note: The CLKIN pin operates at the same voltage as the DVDDIO supply (1.8, 2.75, or  
3.3 V).  
In this configuration the RTC oscillator can be optionally disabled by connecting RTC_XI to CVDDRTC and  
RTC_XO to ground (VSS). However, when the RTC oscillator is disabled the RTC registers starting at I/O  
address 1900h will not be accessible. This includes the RTC Power Management Register which provides  
control to the on-chip LDOs and WAKEUP and RTC_CLKOUT pins. Note: The RTC must still be powered  
by an external power source even if the RTC oscillator is disabled. None of the on-chip LDOs can power  
CVDDRTC  
.
USB_MXI  
USB_MXO USB_VSSOSC USB_VDDOSC  
VSS  
USB_VDDA3P3  
CLKIN  
Crystal  
12 MHz  
C1  
C2  
3.3 V  
3.3 V  
Figure 5-15. LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input With USB Oscillator Enabled  
86  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
USB_MXI  
USB_MXO  
USB_VSSOSC  
USB_VDDOSC  
VSS  
USB_VDDA3P3  
CLKIN  
Figure 5-16. LVCMOS-Compatible Clock Input With USB Oscillator Disabled  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
87  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.4.4 Input and Output Clocks Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-10. Timing Requirements for CLKIN(1) (2) (see Figure 5-17)  
CVDD = 1.05/1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MAX  
MIN  
NOM  
11.2896  
12.0,  
12.288,  
16.8,  
or  
1
2
tc(CLKIN)  
Cycle time, external clock driven on CLKIN  
Pulse duration, CLKIN high  
MHz  
19.2  
0.466 *  
tc(CLKIN)  
tw(CLKINH)  
ns  
ns  
0.466 *  
tc(CLKIN)  
3
4
tw(CLKINL)  
tt(CLKIN)  
Pulse duration, CLKIN low  
Transition time, CLKIN  
4
ns  
(1) The CLKIN frequency and PLL multiply factor should be chosen such that the resulting clock frequency is within the specific range for  
CPU operating frequency.  
(2) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.  
1
4
1
2
CLKIN  
3
4
Figure 5-17. CLKIN Timing  
Table 5-11. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT  
[I/O = 3.3/2.75 V](1) (2)  
(see Figure 5-18)  
CVDD = 1.05/1.3/1.4 V  
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
1
2
tc(CLKOUT)  
Cycle time, CLKOUT  
10  
ns  
ns  
0.466 *  
tc(CLKOUT)  
tw(CLKOUTH)  
Pulse duration, CLKOUT high  
0.466 *  
tc(CLKOUT)  
3
tw(CLKOUTL)  
Pulse duration, CLKOUT low  
ns  
4
5
tt(CLKOUTR)  
tt(CLKOUTF)  
Transition time (rise), CLKOUT  
Transition time (fall), CLKOUT  
5
5
ns  
ns  
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.  
(2) P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when SYSCLK frequency is 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
88  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-12. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT  
[I/O = 1.8 V](1) (2)  
(see Figure 5-18)  
CVDD = 1.05/1.3/1.4 V  
VDDA_PLL = 1.3 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
1
2
tc(CLKOUT)  
Cycle time, CLKOUT  
20  
ns  
ns  
0.466 *  
tc(CLKOUT)  
tw(CLKOUTH)  
Pulse duration, CLKOUT high  
0.466 *  
tc(CLKOUT)  
3
tw(CLKOUTL)  
Pulse duration, CLKOUT low  
ns  
4
5
tt(CLKOUTR)  
tt(CLKOUTF)  
Transition time (rise), CLKOUT  
Transition time (fall), CLKOUT  
5
5
ns  
ns  
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.  
(2) P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when SYSCLK frequency is 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
2
5
1
CLKOUT  
3
4
Figure 5-18. CLKOUT Timing  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
89  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.4.5 Wake-up Events, Interrupts, and XF  
The device has a number of interrupts to service the needs of its peripherals. The interrupts can be  
selectively enabled or disabled.  
5.7.4.5.1 Interrupts Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-13. Timing Requirements for Interrupts(1) (see Figure 5-19)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
2P  
MAX  
1
2
tw(INTH)  
tw(INTL)  
Pulse duration, interrupt high CPU active  
Pulse duration, interrupt low CPU active  
ns  
ns  
2P  
(1) P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns. For example, when the  
CPU core is clocked at 175 MHz, use P = 5.71 ns.  
1
INTx  
2
Figure 5-19. External Interrupt Timings  
5.7.4.5.2 Wake-Up From IDLE Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-14. Timing Requirements for Wake-Up From IDLE (see Figure 5-20)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
1
tw(WKPL)  
Pulse duration, WAKEUP or INTx low, SYSCLKDIS = 1  
30.5  
μs  
Table 5-15. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions For Wake-Up From  
IDLE(1)(2)(3)(4) (see Figure 5-20)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN TYP  
MAX  
IDLE3 Mode(5) with SYSCLKDIS = 1,  
WAKEUP or INTx event, CLK_SEL = 1  
D
ns  
td(WKEVTH-C  
KLGEN)  
Delay time, WAKEUP pulse  
complete to CPU active  
2
IDLE3 Mode(5) with SYSCLKDIS = 1,  
WAKEUP or INTx event, CLK_SEL = 0  
C
ns  
ns  
IDLE2 Mode(5); INTx event  
3P  
(1) D = 1/ External Clock Frequency (CLKIN).  
(2) C = 1/RTCCLK= 30.5 µs. RTCCLK is the clock output of the 32.768-kHz RTC oscillator.  
(3) P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
(4) Assumes the internal LDOs are used with a 0.1uF bandgap capacitor.  
(5) For a description of IDLE2 and IDLE3 mode, see the System chapter in the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor Technical  
Reference Manual [literature number SPRUH16].  
90  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
2
CLKOUT  
1
WAKEUP  
INTx  
A. INT[1:0]  
can  
only  
be  
used  
as  
a
wake-up  
event  
for  
IDLE3  
and  
IDLE2  
modes.  
For a description of IDLE2 and IDLE3 mode, see the System chapter in the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor  
Technical Reference Manual [literature number SPRUH16].  
B. RTC interrupt (internal signal) can be used as wake-up event for IDLE3 and IDLE2 modes.  
C. Any unmasked interrupt can be used to exit the IDLE2 mode.  
D. CLKOUT reflects either the CPU clock, SAR, USB PHY, or PLL clock dependent on the setting of the CLOCKOUT  
Clock Source Register. For this diagram, CLKOUT refers to the CPU clock.  
Figure 5-20. Wake-Up From IDLE Timings  
5.7.4.5.3 XF Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-16. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions For XF(1) (2)  
(see Figure 5-21)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
10.2 ns  
1
td(XF)  
Delay time, CLKOUT high to XF high  
0
(1) P = 1/SYSCLK clock frequency in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
(2) C = 1/RTCCLK= 30.5 µs. RTCCLK is the clock output of the 32.768-kHz RTC oscillator.  
CLKOUT(A)  
1
XF  
A. CLKOUT reflects either the CPU clock, SAR, USB PHY, or PLL clock dependent on the setting of the CLOCKOUT  
Clock Source Register. For this diagram, CLKOUT refers to the CPU clock.  
Figure 5-21. XF Timings  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
91  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.5 Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller  
The DMA controller is used to move data among internal memory, external memory, and peripherals  
without intervention from the CPU and in the background of CPU operation.  
The DSP includes a total of four DMA controllers. Aside from the DSP resources they can access, all four  
DMA controllers are identical.  
The DMA controller has the following features:  
Operation that is independent of the CPU.  
Four channels, which allow the DMA controller to keep track of the context of four independent block  
transfers.  
Event synchronization. DMA transfers in each channel can be made dependent on the occurrence of  
selected events.  
An interrupt for each channel. Each channel can send an interrupt to the CPU on completion of the  
programmed transfer.  
Ping-Pong mode allows the DMA controller to keep track of double buffering context without CPU  
intervention.  
A dedicated clock idle domain. The four device DMA controllers can be put into a low-power state by  
independently turning off their input clocks.  
5.7.5.1 DMA Channel Synchronization Events  
The DMA controllers allow activity in their channels to be synchronized to selected events. The DSP  
supports 20 separate synchronization events and each channel can be tied to separate sync events  
independent of the other channels. Synchronization events are selected by programming the CHnEVT  
field in the DMAn channel event source registers (DMAnCESR1 and DMAnCESR2).  
92  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.6 External Memory Interface (EMIF)  
The device supports several memories and external device interfaces, including: NOR Flash, NAND  
Flash, SRAM, Non-Mobile SDRAM, and Mobile SDRAM (mSDRAM).  
Note: The device can support non-mobile SDRAM under certain circumstances. The device also always  
uses mobile SDRAM initialization, but it is able to support SDRAM memories that ignore the BA0 and BA1  
pins for the 'load mode register' command. During the mobile SDRAM initialization, the device issues the  
'load mode register' initialization command to two different addresses that differ in only the BA0 and BA1  
address bits. These registers are the Extended Mode register and the Mode register. The Extended mode  
register exists only in mSDRAM and not in non-mSDRAM. If a non-mobile SDRAM memory ignores bits  
BA0 and BA1, the second loaded register value overwrites the first, leaving the desired value in the Mode  
register and the non-mobile SDRAM will work with the device.  
The EMIF provides an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus, an address bus width up to 21 bits, and 6 chip selects,  
along with memory control signals.  
The EM_A[20:15] address signals are multiplexed with the GPIO peripheral and controlled by the External  
Bus Selection Register (EBSR). For more detail on the pin muxing, see Section 5.7.3.5.1, External Bus  
Selection Register (EBSR).  
5.7.6.1 EMIF Asynchronous Memory Support  
The EMIF supports asynchronous:  
SRAM memories  
NAND Flash memories  
NOR Flash memories  
The EMIF data bus can be configured for both 8- or 16-bit width. The device supports up to 21 address  
lines and four external wait and interrupt inputs. Up to four asynchronous chip selects are supported by  
EMIF (EM_CS[5:2]).  
Each chip select has the following individually programmable attributes:  
Data bus width  
Read cycle timings: setup, hold, strobe  
Write cycle timings: setup, hold, strobe  
Bus turn around time  
Select Strobe Option  
NAND flash controller supports 1-bit and 4-bit ECC calculation on blocks of 512 bytes  
Each chip select shares the following programmable attribute: Extended Wait Option with Programmable  
Timeout.  
5.7.6.2 EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported  
The EMIF supports 16-bit non-mobile and mobile single data rate (SDR) SDRAM in addition to the  
asynchronous memories listed in Section 5.7.6.1, EMIF Asynchronous Memory Support. The supported  
SDRAM and mobile SDRAM configurations are:  
One, two, and four bank SDRAM and mSDRAM devices  
Supports devices with eight, nine, ten, and eleven column addresses  
CAS latency of two or three clock cycles  
16-bit data-bus width  
3.3-, 2.75-, and 1.8 -V LVCMOS interface that is separate from the rest of the chip I/Os.  
One (EM_CS0) or two (EM_CS[1:0]) chip selects  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
93  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Additionally, the SDRAM and mSDRAM interface of EMIF supports placing the SDRAM and mSDRAM in  
"Self-Refresh" and "Powerdown Modes". Self-Refresh mode allows the SDRAM and mSDRAM to be put  
into a low-power state while still retaining memory contents; since the SDRAM and mSDRAM will continue  
to refresh itself even without clocks from the DSP. Powerdown mode achieves even lower power, except  
the DSP must periodically wake the SDRAM and mSDRAM up and issue refreshes if data retention is  
required. To achieve the lowest power consumption, the SDRAM and mSDRAM interface has configurable  
slew rate on the EMIF pins.  
The device has limitations to the clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin based on the CVDD and  
DVDDEMIF  
:
The clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin can be configured either as SYSCLK (DSP operating  
frequency) or SYSCLK/2 via bit 0 of the ECDR Register (1C26h).  
When CVDD = 1.3 V or 1.4 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V or 2.75 V, the max clock frequency on the  
EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 100 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 100 MHz). Therefore, if SYSCLK 100 MHz, the  
EM_SDCLK can be configured either as SYSCLK or SYSCLK/2. If SYSCLK > 100 MHz, the  
EM_SDCLK must be configured as SYSCLK/2 and 100 MHz.  
When CVDD =1.05 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V or 2.75 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin  
is limited to 75 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 75 MHz). Therefore, if SYSCLK 75 MHz, the EM_SDCLK can be  
configured as either SYSCLK or SYSCLK/2. If SYSCLK > 75 MHz, the EM_SDCLK must be configured  
as SYSCLK/2 and 75 MHz.  
When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, regardless of the CVDD voltage, the clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin  
must be configured as SYSCLK/2 and 50 MHz.  
94  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.6.3 EMIF Electrical Data and Timing CVDD = 1.05 V, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/1.8 V  
Table 5-17. Timing Requirements for EMIF SDRAM and mSDRAM Interface(1) (see Figure 5-22 and  
Figure 5-23)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
DVDDEMIF  
=
NO.  
UNIT  
3.3/2.75 V  
MIN MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
Input setup time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] before  
EM_SDCLK rising  
19 tsu(DV-CLKH)  
20 th(CLKH-DIV)  
4.07  
2.1  
5.86  
ns  
ns  
Input hold time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] after EM_SDCLK  
rising  
2.6  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
Table 5-18. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF SDRAM and  
mSDRAM Interface(1)(2) (see Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-23)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
1
2
tc(CLK)  
tw(CLK)  
Cycle time, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK  
13.33(3)  
20(4)  
ns  
ns  
Pulse duration, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK high  
or low  
6.67  
10  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to  
EMA_CS[1:0] valid  
3
5
7
9
td(CLKH-CSV)  
td(CLKH-DQMV)  
td(CLKH-AV)  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
13.46  
13.46  
13.46  
13.46  
13.46  
13.46  
13.46  
13.46  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to  
EM_DQM[1:0] valid  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_A[20:0]  
and EM_BA[1:0] valid  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_D[15:0]  
valid  
td(CLKH-DV)  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDRAS  
valid  
11 td(CLKH-RASV)  
13 td(CLKH-CASV)  
15 td(CLKH-WEV)  
21 td(CLKH-CKEV)  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCAS  
valid  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_WE  
valid  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCKE  
valid  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 100 MHz, E = 13.33 or 10 ns, respectively. For more detail on the  
EM_SDCLK speed see Section 5.7.6.2, EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported.  
(3) When CVDD = 1.05 V, and DVDDEMIF = 3.3 V or 2.75 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 75 MHz  
(EM_SDCLK = 75 MHz). For more information, see the EMIF chapter in the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor Technical  
Reference Manual [literature number SPRUH16].  
(4) When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 50 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 50 MHz). For more  
information, see the EMIF chapter in the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor Technical Reference Manual [literature number  
SPRUH16].  
Table 5-19. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V(1)(2) (see Figure 5-24,  
Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX  
READS and WRITES  
2
tw(EM_WAIT)  
Pulse duration, EM_WAITx assertion and deassertion  
2E  
ns  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 100 MHz, E = 13.33 or 10 ns, respectively.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Specifications  
95  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-19. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V(1)(2) (see Figure 5-24,  
Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27) (continued)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX  
READS  
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high  
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high  
12 tsu(EMDV-EMOEH)  
13 th(EMOEH-EMDIV)  
18  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
14 tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT) Setup time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase(3)  
4E + 18  
WRITES  
28 tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT) Setup time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase(3)  
4E + 18  
ns  
(3) Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAITx must be asserted to add extended  
wait states. Figure 5-26 and Figure 5-27 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE  
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where  
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.  
Table 5-20. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V(1)(2) (see  
Figure 5-24, Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN NOM MAX  
READS and WRITES  
Pulse duration, EM_WAITx assertion and deassertion  
READS  
2
tw(EM_WAIT)  
2E  
ns  
12 tsu(EMDV-EMOEH)  
13 th(EMOEH-EMDIV)  
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high  
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high  
17  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
14 tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT) Setup time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase(3)  
4E + 17  
WRITES  
28 tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT) Setup time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase(3)  
4E + 17  
ns  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 100 MHz, E = 13.33 or 10 ns, respectively.  
(3) Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAITx must be asserted to add extended  
wait states. Figure 5-26 and Figure 5-27 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE  
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where  
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.  
96  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-21. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V(1)(2) (3) (see  
Figure 5-25 and Figure 5-27)(4)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
READS and WRITES  
1
td(TURNAROUND)  
Turn around time  
(TA)*E - 18  
(TA)*E  
(TA)*E + 18  
ns  
READS  
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)  
(RS+RST+RH)*E - 18  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E - 18  
(RS)*E - 11  
(RS+RST+RH)*E  
(RS+RST+RH)*E + 18  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3
4
5
tc(EMRCYCLE)  
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E + 18  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 0)  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 1)  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)  
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid  
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_OE low  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid  
EM_OE active low pulse (EW = 0)  
(RS)*E  
(RS)*E + 11  
+11  
tsu(EMCEL-EMOEL)  
-11  
0
(RH)*E - 11  
(RH)*E  
(RH)*E + 11  
+11  
th(EMOEH-EMCEH)  
-11  
0
(RS)*E  
6
7
8
9
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)  
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)  
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)  
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)  
(RS)*E - 11  
(RS)*E + 11  
(RH)*E + 18  
(RS)*E + 11  
(RH)*E + 18  
(RST)*E + 18  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E + 11  
4E + 18  
(RH)*E - 18  
(RH)*E  
(RS)*E - 11  
(RS)*E  
(RH)*E - 18  
(RH)*E  
(RST)*E - 18  
(RST)*E  
10  
11  
tw(EMOEL)  
EM_OE active low pulse (EW = 1)  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E - 18  
4E - 18  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E  
4E  
td(EMWAITH-EMOEH)  
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_OE high  
WRITES  
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)  
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)  
(WS+WST+WH)*E - 18  
(WS+WST+WH)*E  
(WS+WST+WH)*E + 18  
ns  
ns  
15  
tc(EMWCYCLE)  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E +  
18  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E - 18  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 0)  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 1)  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)  
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid  
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid  
(WS)*E - 18  
-18  
(WS)*E  
0
(WS)*E + 18  
+18  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
16  
17  
tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL)  
(WH)*E - 11  
-11  
(WH)*E  
0
(WH)*E + 11  
+11  
th(EMWEH-EMCSH)  
18  
19  
20  
21  
tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)  
tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMAIV)  
(WS)*E - 11  
(WH)*E - 11  
(WS)*E - 11  
(WH)*E - 11  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E + 11  
(WH)*E + 11  
(WS)*E + 11  
(WH)*E + 11  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold, MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These  
parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Configuration and Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers.  
(3) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 100 MHz, E = 13.33 or 10 ns, respectively.  
(4) EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAITx input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that the maximum wait time before timeout is specified  
by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
97  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-21. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V(1)(2) (3) (see  
Figure 5-25 and Figure 5-27)(4) (continued)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
EM_WE active low pulse (EW = 0)  
(WST)*E - 18  
(WST)*E  
(WST)*E + 18  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
22  
tw(EMWEL)  
EM_WE active low pulse (EW = 1)  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E - 18  
3E - 18  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E + 18  
4E + 18  
23  
24  
25  
td(EMWAITH-EMWEH)  
tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMDIV)  
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_WE high  
Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid  
4E  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E - 18  
(WS)*E + 18  
(WH)*E - 11  
(WH)*E + 11  
98  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-22. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V(1)(2) (3)  
(see Figure 5-25 and Figure 5-27)(4)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
READS and WRITES  
1
td(TURNAROUND)  
Turn around time  
(TA)*E - 17  
(TA)*E  
(TA)*E + 17  
ns  
READS  
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)  
(RS+RST+RH)*E - 17  
(RS+RST+RH)*E  
(RS+RST+RH)*E + 17  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3
4
5
tc(EMRCYCLE)  
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E - 17  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E + 17  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 0)  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 1)  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)  
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid  
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_OE low  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid  
EM_OE active low pulse (EW = 0)  
(RS)*E - 9  
-9  
(RS)*E  
(RS)*E + 9  
+9  
tsu(EMCEL-EMOEL)  
0
(RH)*E - 9  
(RH)*E  
(RH)*E + 9  
+9  
th(EMOEH-EMCEH)  
-9  
0
(RS)*E  
6
7
8
9
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)  
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)  
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)  
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)  
(RS)*E - 9  
(RS)*E + 9  
(RH)*E + 17  
(RS)*E + 9  
(RH)*E + 17  
(RST)*E + 17  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E + 9  
4E + 17  
(RH)*E - 17  
(RS)*E - 9  
(RH)*E  
(RS)*E  
(RH)*E - 17  
(RST)*E - 17  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E - 17  
4E - 17  
(RH)*E  
(RST)*E  
10  
11  
tw(EMOEL)  
EM_OE active low pulse (EW = 1)  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E  
4E  
td(EMWAITH-EMOEH)  
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_OE high  
WRITES  
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)  
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)  
(WS+WST+WH)*E - 17  
(WS+WST+WH)*E  
(WS+WST+WH)*E + 17  
ns  
ns  
15  
tc(EMWCYCLE)  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E +  
17  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E - 17  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 0)  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 1)  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)  
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid  
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid  
(WS)*E - 17  
-17  
(WS)*E  
0
(WS)*E + 17  
+17  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
16  
17  
tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL)  
(WH)*E - 9  
-9  
(WH)*E  
0
(WH)*E + 9  
+9  
th(EMWEH-EMCSH)  
18  
19  
20  
21  
tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)  
tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMAIV)  
(WS)*E - 9  
(WH)*E - 9  
(WS)*E - 9  
(WH)*E - 9  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E + 9  
(WH)*E + 9  
(WS)*E + 9  
(WH)*E + 9  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold, MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These  
parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Configuration and Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers.  
(3) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 100 MHz, E = 13.33 or 10 ns, respectively.  
(4) EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAITx input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that the maximum wait time before timeout is specified  
by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
99  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-22. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V(1)(2) (3)  
(see Figure 5-25 and Figure 5-27)(4) (continued)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
EM_WE active low pulse (EW = 0)  
(WST)*E - 17  
(WST)*E  
(WST)*E + 17  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
22  
tw(EMWEL)  
EM_WE active low pulse (EW = 1)  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E - 17  
3E - 17  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E + 17  
4E + 17  
23  
24  
25  
td(EMWAITH-EMWEH)  
tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMDIV)  
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_WE high  
Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid  
4E  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E - 17  
(WS)*E + 17  
(WH)*E - 9  
(WH)*E + 9  
100  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.6.4 EMIF Electrical Data and Timing CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75/1.8 V  
Table 5-23. Timing Requirements for EMIF SDRAM and mSDRAM Interface(1) (see Figure 5-22 and  
Figure 5-23)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
DVDDEMIF  
=
NO.  
UNIT  
3.3/2.75 V  
MIN MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
Input setup time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] before  
EM_SDCLK rising  
19 tsu(DV-CLKH)  
20 th(CLKH-DIV)  
4.07  
2.1  
3.28  
ns  
ns  
Input hold time, read data valid on EM_D[15:0] after EM_SDCLK  
rising  
3.1  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
Table 5-24. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF SDRAM and  
mSDRAM Interface(1)(2) (see Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-23)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
1
2
tc(CLK)  
tw(CLK)  
Cycle time, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK  
10(3)  
20(4)  
ns  
ns  
Pulse duration, EMIF clock EM_SDCLK high  
or low  
5
10  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to  
EMA_CS[1:0] valid  
3
5
7
9
td(CLKH-CSV)  
td(CLKH-DQMV)  
td(CLKH-AV)  
0.9  
0.9  
0.9  
0.9  
0.9  
0.9  
0.9  
0.9  
7.88  
7.88  
7.88  
7.88  
7.88  
7.88  
7.88  
7.88  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
1.1  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
10.67  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to  
EM_DQM[1:0] valid  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_A[20:0]  
and EM_BA[1:0] valid  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_D[15:0]  
valid  
td(CLKH-DV)  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDRAS  
valid  
11 td(CLKH-RASV)  
13 td(CLKH-CASV)  
15 td(CLKH-WEV)  
21 td(CLKH-CKEV)  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCAS  
valid  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_WE  
valid  
Delay time, EM_SDCLK rising to EM_SDCKE  
valid  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 100 MHz, E = 13.33 or 10 ns, respectively. For more detail on the  
EM_SDCLK speed see Section 5.7.6.2, EMIF Non-Mobile and Mobile Synchronous DRAM Memory Supported.  
(3) The maximum clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 100 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 100 MHz). For more information, see the  
EMIF chapter in the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor Technical Reference Manual [literature number SPRUH16].  
(4) When DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V, the max clock frequency on the EM_SDCLK pin is limited to 50 MHz (EM_SDCLK = 50 MHz). For more  
information, see the EMIF chapter in the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor Technical Reference Manual [literature number  
SPRUH16].  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
101  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-25. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V(1)(2) (see Figure 5-24,  
Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX  
READS and WRITES  
Pulse duration, EM_WAITx assertion and deassertion  
READS  
2
tw(EM_WAIT)  
2E  
ns  
12 tsu(EMDV-EMOEH)  
13 th(EMOEH-EMDIV)  
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high  
11  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high  
14 tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT) Setup Time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase(3)  
4E + 10  
WRITES  
28 tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT) Setup Time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase(3)  
4E + 10  
ns  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 100 MHz, E = 13.33 or 10 ns, respectively.  
(3) Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAITx must be asserted to add extended  
wait states. Figure 5-26 and Figure 5-27 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE  
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where  
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.  
102  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-26. Timing Requirements for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V(1)(2) (see  
Figure 5-24, Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN NOM MAX  
READS and WRITES  
Pulse duration, EM_WAITx assertion and deassertion  
READS  
2
tw(EM_WAIT)  
2E  
ns  
12 tsu(EMDV-EMOEH)  
13 th(EMOEH-EMDIV)  
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high  
11  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high  
14 tsu (EMOEL-EMWAIT) Setup Time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase(3)  
4E + 9  
WRITES  
28 tsu (EMWEL-EMWAIT) Setup Time, EM_WAITx asserted before end of Strobe Phase(3)  
4E + 9  
ns  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 200 MHz, E = 13.33 or 5 ns, respectively.  
(3) Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAITx must be asserted to add extended  
wait states. Figure 5-26 and Figure 5-27 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE  
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where  
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
103  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-27. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V(1)(2) (3) (4)  
(see Figure 5-24, Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
READS and WRITES  
1
td(TURNAROUND)  
Turn around time  
(TA)*E - 10  
(TA)*E  
(TA)*E + 10  
ns  
READS  
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)  
(RS+RST+RH)*E - 10  
(RS+RST+RH)*E  
(RS+RST+RH)*E + 10  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3
4
5
tc(EMRCYCLE)  
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E - 10  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E (RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E + 10  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 0)  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 1)  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CE[5:2] high (SS = 1)  
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid  
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_OE low  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid  
EM_OE active low pulse (EW = 0)  
(RS)*E - 4  
-4  
(RS)*E  
(RS)*E + 4  
+4  
tsu(EMCSL-EMOEL)  
0
(RH)*E - 4  
(RH)*E  
(RH)*E + 4  
th(EMOEH-EMCSH)  
-4  
0
(RS)*E  
+4  
6
7
8
9
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)  
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)  
tsu(EMAV-EMOEL)  
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)  
(RS)*E - 4  
(RS)*E + 4  
(RH)*E - 10  
(RS)*E - 4  
(RH)*E  
(RH)*E + 10  
(RS)*E + 4  
(RS)*E  
(RH)*E - 10  
(RST)*E - 10  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E - 10  
4E - 10  
(RH)*E  
(RH)*E + 10  
(RST)*E + 10  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E + 10  
4E + 10  
(RST)*E  
10  
11  
tw(EMOEL)  
EM_OE active low pulse (EW = 1)  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E  
4E  
td(EMWAITH-EMOEH)  
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_OE high  
WRITES  
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)  
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)  
(WS+WST+WH)*E - 10  
(WS+WST+WH)*E  
(WS+WST+WH)*E + 10  
ns  
ns  
15  
tc(EMWCYCLE)  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E +  
10  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E - 10  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 0)  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 1)  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)  
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid  
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid  
(WS)*E - 10  
-10  
(WS)*E  
0
(WS)*E +10  
+10  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
16  
17  
tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL)  
(WH)*E - 4  
-4  
(WH)*E  
0
(WH)*E + 4  
+4  
th(EMWEH-EMCSH)  
18  
19  
20  
21  
tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)  
tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMAIV)  
(WS)*E - 4  
(WH)*E - 4  
(WS)*E - 4  
(WH)*E - 4  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E + 4  
(WH)*E + 4  
(WS)*E + 4  
(WH)*E + 4  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold, MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These  
parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Configuration and Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers.  
(3) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 200 MHz, E = 13.33 or 5 ns, respectively.  
(4) EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAITx input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that the maximum wait time before timeout is specified  
by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register.  
104  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-27. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V(1)(2) (3) (4)  
(see Figure 5-24, Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27) (continued)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 1.8 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
EM_WE active low pulse (EW = 0)  
(WST)*E - 10  
(WST)*E  
(WST)*E + 10  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
22  
tw(EMWEL)  
EM_WE active low pulse (EW = 1)  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E - 10  
3E - 10  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E + 10  
4E + 10  
23  
24  
25  
td(EMWAITH-EMWEH)  
tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMDIV)  
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_WE high  
Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid  
4E  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E - 10  
(WS)*E + 10  
(WH)*E - 4  
(WH)*E + 4  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
105  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-28. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V(1)(2) (3)  
(4) (see Figure 5-24, Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
READS and WRITES  
1
td(TURNAROUND)  
Turn around time  
(TA)*E - 9  
(TA)*E  
(TA)*E + 9  
ns  
READS  
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)  
(RS+RST+RH)*E - 9  
(RS+RST+RH)*E  
(RS+RST+RH)*E + 9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3
4
5
tc(EMRCYCLE)  
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E - 9  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E  
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*16))*E + 9  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 0)  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_OE low (SS = 1)  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_CE[5:2] high (SS = 1)  
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_OE low  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid  
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_OE low  
Output hold time, EM_OE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid  
EM_OE active low pulse (EW = 0)  
(RS)*E - 4  
(RS)*E  
(RS)*E + 4  
+4  
tsu(EMCSL-EMOEL)  
-4  
0
(RH)*E - 4  
(RH)*E  
(RH)*E + 4  
+4  
th(EMOEH-EMCSH)  
-4  
(RS)*E - 4  
0
(RS)*E  
6
7
8
9
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)  
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)  
tsu(EMAV-EMOEL)  
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)  
(RS)*E + 4  
(RH)*E + 9  
(RS)*E + 4  
(RH)*E + 9  
(RST)*E + 9  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E + 9  
4E + 9  
(RH)*E - 9  
(RH)*E  
(RS)*E - 4  
(RS)*E  
(RH)*E - 9  
(RH)*E  
(RST)*E - 9  
(RST)*E  
10  
11  
tw(EMOEL)  
EM_OE active low pulse (EW = 1)  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E - 9  
4E - 9  
(RST+(EWC*16))*E  
4E  
td(EMWAITH-EMOEH)  
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_OE high  
WRITES  
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)  
(WS+WST+WH)*E - 9  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E - 9  
(WS)*E - 9  
(WS+WST+WH)*E  
(WS+WST+WH)*E + 9  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
15  
16  
17  
tc(EMWCYCLE)  
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)  
(WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E (WS+WST+WH+(EWC*16))*E + 9  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 0)  
Output setup time, EM_CS[5:2] low to EM_WE low (SS = 1)  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 0)  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_CS[5:2] high (SS = 1)  
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_BA[1:0] invalid  
Output setup time, EM_A[20:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_A[20:0] invalid  
EM_WE active low pulse (EW = 0)  
(WS)*E  
(WS)*E +9  
+9  
tsu(EMCSL-EMWEL)  
-9  
0
(WH)*E  
(WH)*E - 4  
(WH)*E + 4  
+4  
th(EMWEH-EMCSH)  
-4  
0
18  
19  
20  
21  
tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)  
tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMAIV)  
(WS)*E - 4  
(WS)*E  
(WS)*E + 4  
(WH)*E + 4  
(WS)*E + 4  
(WH)*E + 4  
(WST)*E + 9  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E + 9  
(WH)*E - 4  
(WH)*E  
(WS)*E - 4  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E - 4  
(WH)*E  
(WST)*E - 9  
(WST)*E  
22  
tw(EMWEL)  
EM_WE active low pulse (EW = 1)  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E - 9  
(WST+(EWC*16))*E  
(1) Timing parameters are obtained with 10pF loading on the EMIF pins.  
(2) TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold, MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These  
parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Configuration and Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Registers.  
(3) E = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when SYSCLK is set to 75 or 200 MHz, E = 13.33 or 5 ns, respectively.  
(4) EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAITx input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that the maximum wait time before timeout is specified  
by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register.  
106  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-28. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for EMIF Asynchronous Memory, DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V(1)(2) (3)  
(4) (see Figure 5-24, Figure 5-26, and Figure 5-27) (continued)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
DVDDEMIF = 3.3/2.75 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
23  
24  
25  
td(EMWAITH-EMWEH)  
tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)  
th(EMWEH-EMDIV)  
Delay time from EM_WAITx deasserted to EM_WE high  
Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to EM_WE low  
Output hold time, EM_WE high to EM_D[15:0] invalid  
3E - 9  
(WS)*E - 9  
(WH)*E - 4  
4E  
(WS)*E  
(WH)*E  
4E + 9  
(WS)*E + 9  
(WH)*E + 4  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
107  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
1
BASIC mSDRAM  
WRITE OPERATION  
2
2
EM_SDCLK  
EM_CS[1:0]  
EM_DQM[1:0]  
EM_BA[1:0]  
EM_A[20:0]  
3
5
7
7
9
3
5
7
7
9
EM_D[15:0]  
EM_SDRAS  
EM_SDCAS  
EM_WE  
11  
11  
13  
15  
15  
Figure 5-22. EMIF Basic SDRAM and mSDRAM Write Operation  
1
BASIC mSDRAM  
READ OPERATION  
2
2
EM_SDCLK  
EM_CS[1:0]  
EM_DQM[1:0]  
EM_BA[1:0]  
EM_A[20:0]  
3
5
7
7
3
5
7
7
19  
20  
2 EM_CLK Delay  
17  
17  
EM_D[15:0]  
EM_SDRAS  
11  
11  
13  
13  
EM_SDCAS  
EM_WE  
Figure 5-23. EMIF Basic SDRAM and mSDRAM Read Operation  
108  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
3
1
EM_CS[5:2]  
EM_BA[1:0]  
EM_A[20:0]  
4
8
5
9
7
6
10  
EM_OE  
13  
12  
EM_D[15:0]  
EM_WE  
Figure 5-24. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIF  
15  
1
EM_CS[5:2]  
EM_BA[1:0]  
EM_A[20:0]  
16  
18  
20  
17  
19  
21  
22  
EM_WE  
25  
24  
EM_D[15:0]  
EM_OE  
Figure 5-25. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIF  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
109  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
SETUP  
STROBE  
Extended Due to EM_WAITx  
STROBE HOLD  
EM_CS[5:2]  
EM_BA[1:0]  
EM_A[20:0]  
EM_D[15:0]  
14  
11  
EM_OE  
2
2
EM_WAITx  
Asserted  
Deasserted  
Figure 5-26. EM_WAITx Read Timing Requirements  
SETUP  
STROBE  
Extended Due to EM_WAITx  
STROBE HOLD  
EM_CS[5:2]  
EM_BA[1:0]  
EM_A[20:0]  
EM_D[15:0]  
28  
25  
EM_WE  
2
Asserted  
2
EM_WAITx  
Deasserted  
Figure 5-27. EM_WAITx Write Timing Requirements  
110  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.7 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)  
The GPIO peripheral provides general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs.  
When configured as an output, you can write to an internal register to control the state driven on the  
output pin. When configured as an input, you can detect the state of the input by reading the state of the  
internal register. External input clocks on certain GPIOs can also be used to drive the timers on this  
device. The GPIO can also be used to send interrupts to the CPU.  
The GPIO peripheral supports the following:  
Up to 26 GPIOs plus 1 general-purpose output (XF and 4 Special-Purpose Outputs for Use With SAR)  
The 26 GPIO pins have internal pulldowns (IPDs) which can be individually disabled  
The 26 GPIOs can be configured to generate edge detected interrupts to the CPU on either the rising  
or falling edge  
The device GPIO pin functions are multiplexed with various other signals. For more detailed information  
on what signals are multiplexed with the GPIO and how to configure them, see Section 4.2, Signal  
Descriptions and Section 4.3, Pin Multiplexing of this document.  
5.7.7.1 GPIO Peripheral Input/Output Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-29. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs(1) (see Figure 5-28)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V/1.4  
NO.  
UNIT  
V
MIN  
MAX  
1
2
tw(ACTIVE)  
Pulse duration, GPIO input/external interrupt pulse active  
Pulse duration, GPIO input/external interrupt pulse inactive  
2C(1)(2)  
C(1)(2)  
ns  
ns  
tw(INACTIVE)  
(1) The pulse duration given is sufficient to get latched into the GPIO_IFR register and to generate an interrupt. However, if a user wants to  
have the device recognize the GPIO changes through software polling of the GPIO Data In (GPIO_DIN) register, the GPIO duration  
must be extended to allow the device enough time to access the GPIO register through the internal bus.  
(2) C = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when running parts at 100 MHz, use C = 10 ns.  
Table 5-30. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs  
(see Figure 5-28)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V/1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
3C(1)(2)  
3C(1)(2)  
MAX  
3
4
tw(GPOH)  
tw(GPOL)  
Pulse duration, GP[x] output high  
Pulse duration, GP[x] output low  
ns  
ns  
(1) This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the  
GPIO is dependent upon internal bus activity.  
(2) C = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when running parts at 100 MHz, use C = 10 ns.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
111  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
2
2
1
1
GP[x] Input  
(With IOINTEDGy = 0)  
GP[x] Input  
(With IOINTEDGy = 1)  
4
3
GP[x] Output  
Figure 5-28. GPIO Port Timing  
5.7.7.2 GPIO Peripheral Input Latency Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-31. Timing Requirements for GPIO Input Latency(1)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
5
MAX  
Polling GPIO_DIN register  
cyc  
cyc  
cyc  
1
tL(GPI) Latency, GP[x] input  
Polling GPIO_IFR register  
Interrupt Detection  
7
8
(1) The pulse duration given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt. However, if a user wants to have the device recognize the GP[x] input  
changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GP[x] input duration must be extended to allow device enough time to access  
the GPIO register through the internal bus.  
112  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.8 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)  
The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between the device and other devices  
compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus™) specification version 2.1. External  
components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit and receive 2 to 8-bit data to and from the DSP  
through the I2C module. The I2C port does not support CBUS compatible devices.  
The I2C port supports the following features:  
Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Version 2.1 (January 2000)  
Data Transfer Rate from 10 kbps to 400 kbps (Philips Fast-Mode Rate)  
Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or Less  
Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes  
Master (Transmit and Receive) and Slave (Transmit and Receive) Functionality  
One Read DMA Event and One Write DMA Event, which can be used by the DMA Controller  
One Interrupt that can be used by the CPU  
Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers  
The I2C module clock must be in the range from 6.7 MHz to 13.3 MHz. This is necessary for proper  
operation of the I2C module. With the I2C module clock in this range, the noise filters on the SDA and  
SCL pins suppress noise that has a duration of 50 ns or shorter. The I2C module clock is derived from the  
DSP clock divided by a programmable prescaler.  
5.7.8.1 I2C Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-32. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings(1) (see Figure 5-29)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
STANDARD  
MODE  
FAST MODE  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
1
2
tc(SCL)  
Cycle time, SCL  
10  
2.5  
µs  
µs  
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START  
condition)  
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)  
4.7  
4
0.6  
0.6  
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a  
repeated START condition)  
3
th(SCLL-SDAL)  
µs  
4
5
6
7
tw(SCLL)  
tw(SCLH)  
Pulse duration, SCL low  
Pulse duration, SCL high  
4.7  
4
1.3  
0.6  
100(2)  
µs  
µs  
ns  
µs  
tsu(SDAV-SCLH) Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high  
250  
0(3)  
th(SDA-SCLL)  
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low  
0(3) 0.9(4)  
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START  
conditions  
8
tw(SDAH)  
4.7  
1.3  
µs  
(6)  
(6)  
9
tr(SDA)  
tr(SCL)  
Rise time, SDA(5)  
Rise time, SCL(5)  
1000 20 + 0.1Cb  
1000 20 + 0.1Cb  
300  
300  
ns  
ns  
10  
(1) The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered  
down. Also these pins are not 3.6 V-tolerant (their VIH cannot go above DVDDIO + 0.3 V).  
(2) A Fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH)= 250 ns must then be  
met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch  
the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH)= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns  
(according to the Standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.  
(3) A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the  
undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.  
(4) The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.  
(5) The rise and fall times are measured at 30% and 70% of DVDDIO. The fall time is only slightly influenced by the external bus load ©b)  
and external pullup resistor. However, the rise time (tr) is mainly determined by the bus load capacitance and the value of the pullup  
resistor. The pullup resistor must be selected to meet the I2C rise and fall time values specified.  
(6) Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
113  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-32. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings(1) (see Figure 5-29) (continued)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MAX  
STANDARD  
MODE  
FAST MODE  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
(6)  
(6)  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
tf(SDA)  
tf(SCL)  
Fall time, SDA(5)  
Fall time, SCL(5)  
300 20 + 0.1Cb  
300 20 + 0.1Cb  
300  
300  
ns  
ns  
µs  
ns  
pF  
tsu(SCLH-SDAH) Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)  
4
0.6  
0
tw(SP)  
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)  
Capacitive load for each bus line  
50  
(6)  
Cb  
400  
400  
11  
9
SDA  
6
8
14  
4
13  
5
10  
SCL  
1
12  
3
7
2
3
Stop  
Start  
Repeated  
Start  
Stop  
Figure 5-29. I2C Receive Timings  
114  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-33. Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings(1) (see Figure 5-30)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
STANDARD  
MODE  
FAST MODE  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
16  
17  
tc(SCL)  
td(SCLH-SDAL)  
td(SDAL-SCLL)  
Cycle time, SCL  
10  
2.5  
µs  
µs  
Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START  
condition)  
4.7  
4
0.6  
0.6  
Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a  
repeated START condition)  
18  
µs  
19  
20  
21  
22  
tw(SCLL)  
tw(SCLH)  
Pulse duration, SCL low  
Pulse duration, SCL high  
4.7  
4
1.3  
0.6  
100  
0
µs  
µs  
ns  
µs  
td(SDAV-SCLH) Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high  
250  
0
tv(SCLL-SDAV)  
Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low  
0.9  
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START  
conditions  
23  
tw(SDAH)  
4.7  
1.3  
µs  
Rise time, SDA(2)  
Rise time, SCL(2)  
Fall time, SDA(2)  
Fall time, SCL(2)  
1000 20 + 0.1Cb  
1000 20 + 0.1Cb  
300 20 + 0.1Cb  
300 20 + 0.1Cb  
300  
300  
300  
300  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
pF  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
(1)  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
tr(SDA)  
tr(SCL)  
tf(SDA)  
tf(SCL)  
td(SCLH-SDAH) Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition)  
Cp Capacitance for each I2C pin  
4
0.6  
10  
10  
(1) Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.  
(2) The rise and fall times are measured at 30% and 70% of DVDDIO. The fall time is only slightly influenced by the external bus load ©b)  
and external pullup resistor. However, the rise time (tr) is mainly determined by the bus load capacitance and the value of the pullup  
resistor. The pullup resistor must be selected to meet the I2C rise and fall time values specified.  
26  
24  
SDA  
SCL  
21  
23  
19  
28  
20  
25  
16  
18  
27  
18  
17  
22  
Stop  
Start  
Repeated  
Start  
Stop  
Figure 5-30. I2C Transmit Timings  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
115  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.9 Inter-IC Sound (I2S)  
The device I2S peripherals allow serial transfer of full-duplex streaming data, usually audio data, between  
the device and an external I2S peripheral device such as an audio codec.  
The device supports three independent dual-channel I2S peripherals, each with the following features:  
Full-duplex (transmit and receive) dual-channel communication  
Double buffered data registers that allow for continuous data streaming  
I2S/Left-justified and DSP data format with a data delay of 1 or 2 bits  
Data word-lengths of 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 24, or 32 bits  
Ability to sign-extend received data samples for easy use in signal processing algorithms  
Programmable polarity for both frame synchronization and bit clocks  
Stereo (in I2S/Left-justified or DSP data formats) or mono (in DSP data format) mode  
Detection of over-run, under-run, and frame-sync error conditions  
116  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.9.1 Inter-IC Sound (I2S) Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-34. Timing Requirements for I2S [I/O = 3.3 and 2.75 V](1) (see Figure 5-31)  
MASTER  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
MIN MAX  
2P(1)(2)  
P(1)(2)  
P(1)(2)  
SLAVE  
NO.  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
MIN MAX  
2P(1)(2)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
MIN MAX  
UNIT  
MIN MAX  
1
2
3
tc(CLK)  
Cycle time, I2S_CLK  
2P(1)(2)  
P(1)(2)  
P(1)(2)  
2P(1)(2)  
P(1)(2)  
P(1)(2)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tw(CLKH)  
tw(CLKL)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low  
P(1)(2)  
P(1)(2)  
Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S CLK high  
(CLKPOL = 0)  
tsu(RXV-CLKH)  
tsu(RXV-CLKL)  
th(CLKH-RXV)  
th(CLKL-RXV)  
tsu(FSV-CLKH)  
tsu(FSV-CLKL)  
th(CLKH-FSV)  
th(CLKL-FSV)  
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
3
3
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
7
8
Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S_CLK low  
(CLKPOL = 1)  
5
Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK high  
(CLKPOL = 0)  
3
3
Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK low  
(CLKPOL = 1)  
3
12.5  
3
Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK high  
(CLKPOL = 0)  
6.5  
6.5  
9
Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK low  
(CLKPOL = 1)  
12.5  
Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK high  
(CLKPOL = 0)  
tw(CLKH) + 0.7(3)  
tw(CLKL) + 0.7(3)  
tw(CLKH) + 0.7(3)  
tw(CLKL) + 0.7(3)  
10  
Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK low  
(CLKPOL = 1)  
(1) P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
(2) Use whichever value is greater.  
(3) In Slave Mode, I2S_FS is required to be latched on both edges of I2S input clock (I2S_CLK).  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
117  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-35. Timing Requirements for I2S [I/O = 1.8 V](1) (see Figure 5-31)  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
NO.  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
MIN  
2P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
2P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
MAX  
MIN  
2P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
MAX  
MAX  
MIN  
2P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
MAX  
1
2
3
tc(CLK)  
Cycle time, I2S_CLK  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tw(CLKH)  
tw(CLKL)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low  
P(1) (2)  
Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S CLK  
high (CLKPOL = 0)  
tsu(RXV-CLKH)  
tsu(RXV-CLKL)  
th(CLKH-RXV)  
th(CLKL-RXV)  
tsu(FSV-CLKH)  
tsu(FSV-CLKL)  
th(CLKH-FSV)  
th(CLKL-FSV)  
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
3.5  
3.5  
3
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
7
8
Setup time, I2S_RX valid before I2S_CLK  
low (CLKPOL = 1)  
Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK high  
(CLKPOL = 0)  
3
Hold time, I2S_RX valid after I2S_CLK low  
(CLKPOL = 1)  
3
3
Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK  
high (CLKPOL = 0)  
12.5  
12.5  
15  
15  
9
Setup time, I2S_FS valid before I2S_CLK  
low (CLKPOL = 1)  
Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK high  
(CLKPOL = 0)  
tw(CLKH)  
+
tw(CLKH)  
+
0.7(3)  
0.71(3)  
10  
Hold time, I2S_FS valid after I2S_CLK low  
(CLKPOL = 1)  
tw(CLKL)  
+
tw(CLKL)  
+
0.7(3)  
0.71(3)  
(1) P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
(2) Use whichever value is greater.  
(3) In Slave Mode, I2S_FS is required to be latched on both edges of I2S input clock (I2S_CLK).  
118  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-36. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2S Output  
[I/O = 3.3 and 2.75 V] (see Figure 5-31)  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
0
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
1
2
tc(CLK)  
Cycle time, I2S_CLK  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
0
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
0
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tw(CLKH)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0)  
tw(CLKL)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1)  
tw(CLKL)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 0)  
3
4
5
tw(CLKH)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 1)  
tdmax(CLKL-DXV)  
tdmax(CLKH-DXV)  
tdmax(CLKL-FSV)  
tdmax(CLKH-FSV)  
Output Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 0)  
Output Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 1)  
Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 0)  
Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 1)  
14.5  
11  
14.5  
11  
0
14.5  
7
0
11  
5
0
14.5  
0
11  
-2  
-1.74  
-1.74  
-2  
7
5
(1) P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
(2) Use whichever value is greater.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
119  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-37. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for I2S Output  
[I/O = 1.8 V] (see Figure 5-31)  
MASTER  
CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
MIN MAX MIN MAX  
50 or 40 or  
SLAVE  
CVDD = 1.05 V CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
MIN MAX MIN MAX  
50 or 40 or  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
1
2
tc(CLK)  
Cycle time, I2S_CLK  
ns  
2P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
0
2P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
0
2P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
0
2P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
P(1) (2)  
0
tw(CLKH)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 0)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tw(CLKL)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 1)  
tw(CLKL)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK low (CLKPOL = 0)  
3
4
5
tw(CLKH)  
Pulse duration, I2S_CLK high (CLKPOL = 1)  
tdmax(CLKL-DXV)  
tdmax(CLKH-DXV)  
tdmax(CLKL-FSV)  
tdmax(CLKH-FSV)  
Output Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 0)  
Output Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_DX valid (CLKPOL = 1)  
Delay time, I2S_CLK low to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 0)  
Delay time, I2S_CLK high to I2S_FS valid (CLKPOL = 1)  
17.7  
14.5  
17.7  
14.5  
0
17.7  
7
0
14.5  
5
0
17.7  
0
14.5  
-2  
-2  
-2  
7
-2  
5
(1) P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
(2) Use whichever value is greater.  
120  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
1
3
2
I2S_CLK  
(CLKPOL = 0)  
I2S_CLK  
(CLKPOL = 1)  
5
I2S_FS  
(Output, MODE = 1)  
9
10  
I2S_FS  
(Input, MODE = 0)  
4
I2S_DX  
I2S_RX  
7
8
Figure 5-31. I2S Input and Output Timings  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
121  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.10 Multichannel Serial Port Interface (McSPI)  
The multichannel SPI (McSPI) is a master and slave synchronous serial bus. McSPI allows a duplex,  
synchronous, serial communication to SPI-compliant external devices (slaves and masters).  
The McSPI instances include the following main features:  
Serial clock with programmable frequency, polarity, and phase for each channel  
Wide selection of SPI word lengths ranging from 4 to 32 bits  
Up to three master channels or single channel in slave mode  
Master multichannel mode:  
Full duplex and half duplex  
Transmit-only and receive-only and transmit-and-receive modes  
Flexible I/O port controls per channel  
Two direct memory access (DMA) requests (read and write) per channel  
Single interrupt line for multiple interrupt source events  
Power management through wake-up capabilities  
Enable the addition of a programmable start-bit for SPI transfer per channel (start-bit mode)  
Support start-bit write command  
128-bytes built-in FIFO available for a single channel  
Force CS mode for continuous transfers  
5.7.10.1 McSPI Electrical Data and Timing  
The multichannel SPI is a master and slave synchronous serial bus.  
The following tables assume testing over the recommended operating conditions.  
5.7.10.1.1 McSPI in Slave Mode  
Table 5-38. McSPI Interface Timing Requirements – Slave Mode  
NO.  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
SS2 tsu(SIMOV-CLKAE)  
SS3 th(SIMOV-CLKAE)  
SS4 tsu(CS0V-CLKFE)  
SS5 th(CS0I-CLKLE)  
Setup time, McSPI_SIMO valid before McSPI_CLK  
active edge  
4
3
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Hold time, McSPI_SIMO valid after McSPI_CLK  
active edge  
3.8  
6.9  
6.9  
2.8  
6.9  
6.9  
Setup time, McSPI_CS0 valid before McSPI_CLK  
first edge  
Hold time, McSPI_CS0 invalid after McSPI_CLK last  
edge  
122  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-39. McSPI Interface Switching Characteristics — Slave Mode [I/O = 3.3 V]  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
22  
SS0  
Clock period  
14  
MHz  
ns  
SS1 tw(CLK)  
SS6  
Pulse duration, McSPI_CLK high or low  
0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1) 0.45*P(1)  
0.55*P(1)  
Output Delay time, McSPI_CLK active edge to  
McSPI_SOMI valid  
0
31  
15  
15  
0
19  
ns  
SS7  
SS7  
Delay time, McSPI_CSn active edge to McSPIn_SOMI  
shifted, Mode 0  
8.7  
8.7  
ns  
ns  
Delay time, McSPI_CSn active edge to McSPIn_SOMI  
shifted, Mode 2  
(1) P = McSPI_CLK clock period.  
Table 5-40. McSPI Interface Switching Characteristics — Slave Mode [I/O = 2.75 V]  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
19  
SS0  
Clock period  
12  
MHz  
ns  
SS1 tw(CLK)  
SS6  
Pulse duration, McSPI_CLK high or low  
0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1) 0.45*P(1)  
0.55*P(1)  
Output Delay time, McSPI_CLK active edge to  
McSPI_SOMI valid  
0
36  
0
22.5  
ns  
SS7  
Delay time, McSPI_CSn active edge to Modes 0 and 2  
McSPIn_SOMI shifted  
15  
12  
ns  
(1) P = McSPI_CLK clock period.  
Table 5-41. McSPI Interface Switching Characteristics — Slave Mode [I/O = 1.8 V]  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
18  
SS0  
Clock period  
12  
MHz  
ns  
SS1 tw(CLK)  
SS6  
Pulse duration, McSPI_CLK high or low  
0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1) 0.45*P(1)  
0.55*P(1)  
Output Delay time, McSPI_CLK active edge to  
McSPI_SOMI valid  
0
36  
0
24  
ns  
SS7  
Delay time, McSPI_CSn active edge to Modes 0 and 2  
McSPIn_SOMI shifted  
17  
15  
ns  
(1) P = McSPI_CLK clock period.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
123  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Mode 0 and 2  
McSPI_CS0(EPOL=1)  
SS0  
SS1  
SS4  
SS5  
McSPI_CLK(POL=0)  
McSPI_CLK(POL=1)  
SS0  
SS1  
SS2  
SS3  
Bit n-1  
SS7  
Bit n-1  
McSPI_SIMO  
McSPI_SOMI  
Bit n-2  
SS6  
Bit n-3  
Bit n-4  
Bit n-4  
Bit 0  
Bit n-2  
Bit n-3  
Bit 0  
Mode 1 and 3  
McSPI_CS0(EPOL=1)  
McSPI_CLK(POL=0)  
McSPI_CLK(POL=1)  
SS0  
SS1  
SS0  
SS1  
SS4  
SS5  
SS3  
SS2  
Bit n-1  
SS6  
Bit n-1  
McSPI_SIMO  
McSPI_SOMI  
Bit n-2  
Bit n-2  
Bit n-3  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Bit 0  
Bit n-3  
Bit 1  
Figure 5-32. McSPI Interface — Transmit and Receive in Slave Mode  
124  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.10.1.2 McSPI in Master Mode  
The following tables assume testing over the recommended operating conditions (see Figure 5-33).  
Table 5-42. McSPI Interface Timing Requirements – Master Mode [I/O = 3.3, 2.75 V]  
NO.  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
SM2  
SM3  
Setup time, McSPI_SOMI valid before McSPI_CLK  
active edge  
4
3
ns  
ns  
Hold time, McSPI_SOMI valid after McSPI_CLK active  
edge  
3.8  
2.8  
Table 5-43. McSPI Interface Timing Requirements – Master Mode [I/O = 1.8 V]  
NO.  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
SM2  
SM3  
Setup time, McSPI_SOMI valid before McSPI_CLK  
active edge  
7.5  
3
ns  
ns  
Hold time, McSPI_SOMI valid after McSPI_CLK active  
edge  
3.8  
2.8  
Table 5-44. McSPI Interface Switching Characteristics – Master Mode [I/O = 3.3 V]  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
SM0  
SM1  
SM4  
Clock period  
22  
42  
MHz  
ns  
Pulse duration, McSPI_CLK high or low  
0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1) 0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1)  
Delay time, McSPI_CLK active edge to  
McSPI_SIMO valid  
0
18  
10  
-1  
8.9  
ns  
SM5  
SM6  
SM7  
Delay time, McSPI_CSx active to  
McSPI_CLK first edge  
Modes  
0–3  
3.1  
3.1  
3.1  
3.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Delay time, McSPI_CLK last edge to  
McSPI_CSx inactive  
Modes  
0–3  
Delay time, McSPI_CSx active edge to Modes 0  
6
McSPI_SIMO shifted  
and 2  
(1) P = McSPI_CLK clock period  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
125  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-45. McSPI Interface Switching Characteristics – Master Mode [I/O = 2.75 V]  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
SM0  
SM1  
SM4  
Clock period  
22  
38  
MHz  
ns  
Pulse duration, McSPI_CLK high or low  
0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1) 0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1)  
Delay time, McSPI_CLK active edge to McSPI_SIMO  
valid  
0
18  
10  
-1  
10  
ns  
SM5  
SM6  
SM7  
Delay time, McSPI_CSx active to  
McSPI_CLK first edge  
Modes 0–3  
3.1  
3.1  
3.1  
3.1  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Delay time, McSPI_CLK last edge to  
McSPI_CSx inactive  
Modes 0–3  
Delay time, McSPI_CSx active edge to Modes 0  
McSPI_SIMO shifted and 2  
6
(1) P = McSPI_CLK clock period  
Table 5-46. McSPI Interface Switching Characteristics – Master Mode [I/O = 1.8 V]  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
SM0  
SM1  
SM4  
Clock period  
19  
38  
MHz  
ns  
Pulse duration, McSPI_CLK high or low  
0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1) 0.45*P(1) 0.55*P(1)  
Delay time, McSPI_CLK active edge to  
McSPI_SIMO valid  
0
18.5  
-1  
10  
ns  
SM5  
SM6  
SM7  
Delay time, McSPI_CSx active to  
McSPI_CLK first edge  
Modes 0–3  
Modes 0–3  
2.75  
2.75  
3
ns  
ns  
ns  
Delay time, McSPI_CLK last edge to  
McSPI_CSx inactive  
3
Delay time, McSPI_CSx active edge to Modes 0  
11  
5
McSPI_SIMO shifted  
and 2  
(1) P = McSPI_CLK clock period  
126  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Mode 0 and 2  
McSPI_CSx(EPOL=1)  
McSPI_CLK(POL=0)  
McSPI_CLK(POL=1)  
McSPI_SIMO  
SM0  
SM1  
SM5  
SM6  
SM0  
SM1  
SM7  
SM4  
Bit n-2  
Bit n-1  
SM2  
Bit n-3  
Bit n-4  
Bit n-4  
Bit 0  
SM3  
Bit n-1  
McSPI_SOMI  
Bit n-2  
Bit n-3  
Bit 0  
Mode 1 and 3  
McSPI_CSx(EPOL=1)  
SM0  
SM1  
McSPI_CLK(POL=0)  
SM0  
SM1  
SM5  
SM6  
McSPI_CLK(POL=1)  
McSPI_SIMO  
SM4  
Bit n-1  
SM2  
Bit n-2  
Bit n-3  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
SM3  
McSPI_SOMI  
Bit n-1  
Bit n-2  
Bit n-3  
Bit 0  
Figure 5-33. McSPI Interface — Transmit and Receive in Master Mode  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
127  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.11 Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP)  
The McBSP provides these functions:  
Full-duplex communication  
Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream  
Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit  
Direct interface to industry-standard codecs, analog interface chips (AICs), and other serially  
connected analog-to-digital (A/D) and digital-to-analog (D/A) devices  
External shift clock or an internal, programmable frequency shift clock for data transfer  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Buffers allow the McBSP to operate at a higher sample rate by making it  
more tolerant to DMA latency  
If the internal clock is used, the CLKGDV field of the Sample Rate Generator Register (SRGR) must  
always be set to a value of 3 or greater.  
5.7.11.1 McBSP Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-47. Timing Requirements for McBSP, DVDDIO 1.8 V (see Figure 5-34)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
DVDDIO 1.8 V  
MAX  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
MIN  
MAX  
2
3
tc(CKRX)  
tw(CKRX)  
Cycle time, CLKR/X  
CLKR/X ext  
CLKR/X ext  
15  
9
ns  
ns  
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X  
low  
P-1(1)  
P-1(1)  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
29.5  
3.5  
4.5  
4.5  
18.5  
2.5  
-4  
29.5  
3.5  
4.5  
4.5  
18.5  
2.5  
-4  
Setup time, external FSR high before  
CLKR low  
5
6
tsu(FRH-CKRL)  
th(CKRL-FRH)  
tsu(DRV-CKRL)  
th(CKRL-DRV)  
tsu(FXH-CKXL)  
th(CKXL-FXH)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR  
low  
7
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low  
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low  
8
5.5  
26.5  
7.5  
0.5  
2.5  
5.5  
26.5  
7.5  
0.5  
2.5  
Setup time, external FSX high before  
CLKX low  
10  
11  
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX  
low  
(1) This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.  
128  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-48. Timing Requirements for McBSP,  
DVDDIO 3.3/2.75 V (see Figure 5-34)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
DVDDIO 3.3/2.75 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
2
3
tc(CKRX)  
tw(CKRX)  
Cycle time, CLKR/X  
CLKR/X ext  
CLKR/X ext  
18  
9
ns  
ns  
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X  
low  
P-1(1)  
P-1(1)  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKR int  
CLKR ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
24  
4
24  
4
Setup time, external FSR high before  
CLKR low  
5
6
tsu(FRH-CKRL)  
th(CKRL-FRH)  
tsu(DRV-CKRL)  
th(CKRL-DRV)  
tsu(FXH-CKXL)  
th(CKXL-FXH)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
4
4
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR  
low  
5
5
22.5  
2.5  
-3  
6
22.5  
2.5  
-3  
6
7
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low  
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low  
8
23  
7
23  
7
Setup time, external FSX high before  
CLKX low  
10  
11  
2
2
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX  
low  
3
3
(1) This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
129  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-49. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP,  
DVDDIO 1.8 V  
(see Figure 5-34)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
DVDDIO 1.8 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
5.5  
MAX  
MIN  
5.5  
MAX  
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal  
CLKR/X generated from CLKS input  
1
2
3
td(CKSH-CKRXH)  
tc(CKRX)  
25  
25  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Cycle time, CLKR/X  
CLKR/X int  
15  
9
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or  
CLKR/X low  
tw(CKRX)  
CLKR/X int  
C+2(1)  
C+2(1)  
Delay time, CLKR high to internal  
FSR valid  
4
9
td(CKRH-FRV)  
td(CKXH-FXV)  
CLKR int  
-6.5  
6
-6.5  
6
ns  
ns  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
FSX int  
-2  
4
1
23  
-2  
4
1
23  
Delay time, CLKX high to internal  
FSX valid  
-5  
3
-5  
3
Disable time, DX high impedance  
following last data bit from CLKX high  
12  
13  
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)  
ns  
ns  
3
24.5  
4
3
24.5  
4
-4.5  
3.5  
-4  
-4.5  
3.5  
-4  
td(CKXH-DXV)  
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid  
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid  
25.5  
4
25.5  
4
14  
td(FXH-DXV)  
ns  
ONLY applies when in data  
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode  
FSX ext  
-2  
3
-2  
3
(1) C = H or L  
S = sample rate generator input clock = P if CLKSM = 1 (P = SYSCLK period)  
S = sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)  
H = CLKX high pulse duration = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even  
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd  
L = CLKX low pulse duration = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even  
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd  
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see (4) above).  
130  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-50. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP,  
DVDDIO 3.3/2.75 V  
(see Figure 5-34)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
DVDDIO 3.3/2.75 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
4.25  
18  
MAX  
MIN  
4.5  
MAX  
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal  
CLKR/X generated from CLKS input  
1
2
3
td(CKSH-CKRXH)  
tc(CKRX)  
24  
24  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Cycle time, CLKR/X  
CLKR/X int  
9
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or  
CLKR/X low  
tw(CKRX)  
CLKR/X int  
C-2(1)  
C-2(1)  
Delay time, CLKR high to internal  
FSR valid  
4
9
td(CKRH-FRV)  
td(CKXH-FXV)  
CLKR int  
-4  
8
-4  
8
ns  
ns  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
CLKX int  
CLKX ext  
FSX int  
-2  
3.5  
-2.5  
3
2
20  
4
-2  
3.5  
-2.5  
-3  
2
20  
4
Delay time, CLKX high to internal  
FSX valid  
Disable time, DX high impedance  
following last data bit from CLKX high  
12  
13  
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)  
ns  
ns  
21  
5
21  
5
-2.5  
3
-2.5  
3
td(CKXH-DXV)  
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid  
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid  
22.5  
4
22.5  
4
-1.5  
-1.5  
14  
td(FXH-DXV)  
ns  
ONLY applies when in data  
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode  
FSX ext  
-1.5  
3.5  
-1.5  
3.5  
(1) C = H or L  
S = sample rate generator input clock = P if CLKSM = 1 (P = SYSCLK period)  
S = sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)  
H = CLKX high pulse duration = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even  
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd  
L = CLKX low pulse duration = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even  
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd  
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see (4) above).  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
131  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
CLKS  
1
2
3
3
CLKR  
FSR (int)  
FSR (ext)  
DR  
4
4
5
6
7
8
Bit(n-1)  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
2
3
3
CLKX  
9
FSX (int)  
11  
10  
FSX (ext)  
FSX (XDATDLY=00b)  
(A)  
13  
14  
13  
(A)  
12  
DX  
Bit 0  
Bit(n-1)  
(n-2)  
(n-3)  
A. Parameter No. 13 applies to the first data bit only when XDATDLY 0.  
B. McBSP_CLKS and McBSP_CLKR are shared on the same pin. See Table 4-7, Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports  
(McBSP) Signal Descriptions, for how each is selected.  
Figure 5-34. McBSP Timing  
Table 5-51. Timing Requirements for FSR When GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 5-35)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
DVDDIO 3.3/2.75/1.8 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
5
MAX  
MIN  
5
MAX  
1
2
tsu(FRH-CKSH)  
th(CKSH-FRH)  
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high  
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high  
ns  
ns  
4
4
CLKS  
1
2
FSR external  
CLKR/X (no need to resync)  
CLKR/X (needs resync)  
Figure 5-35. FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1  
132  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.12 Multimedia Card and Secure Digital (eMMC, MMC, SD, and SDHC)  
The device includes two MMC and SD controllers which are compliant with eMMC V4.3, MMC V3.31,  
Secure Digital Part 1 Physical Layer Specification V2.0, and Secure Digital Input Output (SDIO) V2.0  
specifications. The MMC and SD card controller supports these industry standards and assumes the  
reader is familiar with these standards.  
Each MMC and SD Controller in the device has the following features:  
Multimedia Card and Secure Digital (eMMC, MMC, SD, and SDHC) protocol support  
Programmable clock frequency  
256-bit Read and Write FIFO to lower system overhead  
Slave DMA transfer capability  
The MMC and SD card controller transfers data between the CPU and DMA controller on one side and  
MMC and SD card on the other side. The CPU and DMA controller can read and write the data in the card  
by accessing the registers in the MMC and SD controller.  
The MMC and SD controller on this device, does not support the SPI mode of operation.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
133  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.12.1 MMC and SD Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-52. Timing Requirements for MMC and SD (see Figure 5-36 and Figure 5-39)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V CVDD = 1.05 V  
FAST MODE STD MODE  
NO  
.
UNIT  
MIN  
3
MAX  
MIN  
3
MAX  
1
2
3
4
tsu(CMDV-CLKH)  
th(CLKH-CMDV)  
tsu(DATV-CLKH)  
th(CLKH-DATV)  
Setup time, MMCx_CMD data input valid before MMCx_CLK high  
Hold time, MMCx_CMD data input valid after MMCx_CLK high  
Setup time, MMC_Dx data input valid before MMCx_CLK high  
Hold time, MMC_Dx data input valid after MMCx_CLK high  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
3
3
3
3.1  
3
3
Table 5-53. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MMC Output(1) (see  
Figure 5-36 and Figure 5-39)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V CVDD = 1.05 V  
FAST MODE STD MODE  
NO  
.
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
0
MAX  
50(2)  
MIN  
0
MAX  
25(2) MHz  
7
8
9
f(CLK)  
Operating frequency, MMCx_CLK  
Identification mode frequency, MMCx_CLK  
Pulse duration, MMCx_CLK low  
Pulse duration, MMCx_CLK high  
Rise time, MMCx_CLK  
f(CLK_ID)  
tw(CLKL)  
0
400  
0
400 kHz  
7
10  
10  
ns  
ns  
10 tw(CLKH)  
11 tr(CLK)  
12 tf(CLK)  
7
3
3
3
3
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Fall time, MMCx_CLK  
13 td(MDCLKL-CMDIV) Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_CMD data output invalid  
14 td(MDCLKL-CMDV) Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_CMD data output valid  
15 td(MDCLKL-DATIV) Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_Dx data output invalid  
-4.53  
-4.53  
-4.77  
-4.77  
4.1  
4.1  
5.4  
5.4  
16 td(MDCLKL-DATV)  
Delay time, MMCx_CLK low to MMC_Dx data output valid  
(1) For MMC and SD, the parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V and 2.75 V.  
(2) Use this value or SYS_CLK/2 whichever is smaller.  
7
9
10  
MMCx_CLK  
13  
14  
VALID  
MMCx_CMD  
Figure 5-36. MMC and SD Host Command Write Timing  
9
10  
7
MMCx_CLK  
MMCx_Dx  
4
4
3
Start  
3
D0  
D1  
Dx  
End  
Figure 5-37. MMC and SD Card Response Timing  
134  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
9
10  
7
MMCx_CLK  
MMCx_CMD  
1
2
START  
XMIT  
Valid  
Valid  
Valid  
END  
Figure 5-38. MMC and SD Host Write Timing  
7
9
10  
MMCx_CLK  
MMCx_DAT  
16  
15  
VALID  
Figure 5-39. MMC and SD Data Write Timing  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
135  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.13 Real-Time Clock (RTC)  
The device includes a Real-Time Clock (RTC) with its own separate power supply and isolation circuits.  
The RTC has the capability to wake up the device from idle states via alarms, periodic interrupts, or an  
external WAKEUP input.  
To prevent unintentional access to the RTC registers, gate-keeper registers must be programmed with a  
specific signature—0x95A4_F1E0—before changing the RTC registers.  
Note: The RTC Core (CVDDRTC) must be powered by an external power source even though RTC is not  
used. None of the on-chip LDOs can power CVDDRTC  
.
The device RTC provides the following features:  
100-year calendar up to year 2099.  
Counts milliseconds, seconds, minutes, hours, day of the week, date, month, and year with leap year  
compensation  
Millisecond time correction  
Binary-coded-decimal (BCD) representation of time, calendar, and alarm  
24-hour clock mode  
Second, minute, hour, or day alarm interrupt  
Periodic interrupt: every millisecond, second, minute, hour, or day  
Alarm interrupt: precise time of day  
Single interrupt to the DSP CPU  
32.768-kHz crystal oscillator with frequency calibration  
Bidirectional IO pin that can be set up as:  
Input for an external device to wake up the DSP  
Output to wake up an external device  
Control of the RTC is maintained through a set of I/O memory mapped registers (see Table 6-19). Note  
that any write to these registers will be synchronized to the RTC 32.768-kHz clock; thus, the CPU must  
run at least 3X faster than the RTC. Writes to these registers will not be evident until the next two 32.768-  
kHz clock cycles later.  
Furthermore, three conditions must be met to write to the RTC registers:  
1. The RTC oscillator must be enabled.  
2. A 1 must be written to the RTC system control register (RSCR) to bring the RTC out of isolation.  
3. The gate-keeper registers (RGKR_LSW and RGKR_MSW) must contain the key 0x95A4_F1E0.  
If these conditions are not met, the RTC remains isolated and protected from power glitches.  
For more information, see the Static Power Management section of the TMS320C5517 Digital Signal  
Processor Technical Reference Manual [literature number SPRUH16].  
The RTC has its own power-on-reset (POR) circuit which resets the registers in the RTC core domain  
when power is first applied to the CVDDRTC power pin. The RTC flops are not reset by the device's RESET  
pin nor the digital core's POR (powergood signal).  
The scratch registers in the RTC can be used to take advantage of this unique reset domain to keep track  
of when the DSP boots and whether the RTC time registers have already been initialized to the current  
clock time or whether the software needs to go into a routine to prompt the user to set the time and date.  
5.7.13.1 RTC Electrical Data and Timing  
For more detailed information on RTC electrical timings, specifically WAKEUP, see Section 5.7.3.3, Reset  
Electrical Data and Timing.  
136  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.14 SAR ADC (10-Bit)  
The device includes a 10-bit SAR ADC using a switched capacitor architecture which converts an analog  
input signal to a digital value at a maximum rate of 62.5-k samples per second (ksps) for use by the DSP.  
This SAR module supports six channels that are connected to four general purpose analog pins (GPAIN  
[3:0]) which can be used as general purpose outputs.  
The device SAR supports the following features:  
Up to 62.5 ksps (2-MHz clock with 32 cycles per conversion)  
Single conversion and continuous back-to-back conversion modes  
Interrupt driven or polling conversion or DMA event generation  
Internal configurable bandgap reference voltages of 1 V or 0.8 V; or external Vref of VDDA_ANA  
One 3.6-V Tolerant analog input (GPAIN0) with internal voltage division for conversion of battery  
voltage  
Software controlled power down  
Individually configurable general-purpose digital outputs  
5.7.14.1 SAR ADC Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-54. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for ADC Characteristics  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
tC(SCLC)  
td(CONV)  
SDNL  
SINL  
Cycle time, ADC internal conversion clock  
Delay time, ADC conversion time  
Static differential non-linearity error (DNL measured for 9 bits)  
Static integral non-linearity error  
MHz  
ns  
32tC(SCLC)  
±0.6  
±1  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
MΩ  
dB  
Zset  
Zero-scale offset error (INL measured for 9 bits)  
Full-scale offset error  
2
2
Fset  
Analog input impedance  
1
Signal-to-noise ratio  
54  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
137  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.15 Serial Port Interface (SPI)  
The device serial port interface (SPI) is a high-speed synchronous serial input/output port that allows a  
serial bit stream of programmed length (1 to 32 bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a  
programmed bit-transfer rate. The SPI supports multi-chip operation of up to four SPI slave devices. The  
SPI can operate as a master device only, slave mode is not supported. Note: The SPI is not supported by  
the device DMA controller, so DMA cannot be used in transferring data between the SPI and the on-chip  
RAM.  
The SPI is normally used for communication between the DSP and external peripherals. Typical  
applications include an interface to external I/O or peripheral expansion via devices such as shift registers,  
display drivers, SPI EEPROMs, and analog-to-digital converters.  
The SPI has the following features:  
Programmable divider for serial data clock generation  
Four pin interface (SPI_CLK, SPI_CSn, SPI_RX, and SPI_TX)  
Programmable data length (1 to 32 bits)  
4 external chip select signals  
Programmable transfer or frame size (1 to 4096 characters)  
Optional interrupt generation on character completion  
Optional interrupt generation on frame completion  
Programmable SPI_CSn to SPI_TX delay from 0 to 3 SPI_CLK cycles  
Programmable signal polarities  
Programmable active clock edge  
Internal loopback mode for testing  
5.7.15.1 SPI Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-55. Timing Requirements for SPI Inputs (see Figure 5-40 through Figure 5-43)  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
V
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
4P(1)(2)  
30  
MAX  
MIN  
4P(1)(2)  
MAX  
4
5
6
tC(SCLK)  
tw(SCLKH)  
tw(SCLKL)  
Cycle time, SPI_CLK  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high  
19  
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low  
30  
19  
Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK high  
Setup time, SPI_RX valid before SPI_CLK low  
Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK high  
Hold time, SPI_RX valid after SPI_CLK low  
Modes 0, 2, and 3  
Mode 1  
16.1  
16.1  
0
13.9  
13.9  
0
tsu(SRXV-  
SCLK)  
7
8
Modes 0 and 3  
Modes 1 and 2  
th(SCLK-SRXV)  
0
0
(1) P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 100 MHz, use P = 10 ns.  
(2) Use whichever value is greater.  
138  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-56. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Outputs [I/O =  
2.75 and 3.3 V]  
(see Figure 5-40 through Figure 5-43)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO  
.
UNI  
T
PARAMETER  
MIN  
-4.2  
-4.2  
MAX  
MIN  
-4.9  
-4.9  
MAX  
Delay time, SPI_CLK low to SPI_TX valid  
Delay time, SPI_CLK high to SPI_TX valid  
Modes 0 and 3  
Modes 1 and 2  
8.9  
8.9  
5.3 ns  
5.3 ns  
1
td(SCLK-STXV)  
tc - 8 +  
D(1)  
tc - 8 +  
D(1)  
2
3
td(SPICS-SCLK) Delay time, SPI_CS active to SPI_CLK active  
toh(SCLKI-  
ns  
ns  
0.5tc -  
1.9  
0.5tc -  
1.9  
Output hold time, SPI_CS inactive to SPI_CLK inactive  
SPICSI)  
(1) D is the programable data delay in ns. Data delay can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 SPICLK clock cycles.  
Table 5-57. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Outputs [I/O =  
1.8 V]  
(see Figure 5-40 through Figure 5-43)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
NO  
.
UNI  
T
PARAMETER  
MIN  
-6.7  
-6.7  
MAX  
MIN  
-6.7  
-6.7  
MAX  
Delay time, SPI_CLK low to SPI_TX valid  
Delay time, SPI_CLK high to SPI_TX valid  
Modes 0 and 3  
Modes 1 and 2  
8.9  
8.9  
5.8 ns  
5.8 ns  
1
td(SCLK-STXV)  
tc - 9.2 +  
D(1)  
tc - 8 +  
D(1)  
2
3
td(SPICS-SCLK) Delay time, SPI_CS active to SPI_CLK active  
toh(SCLKI-  
ns  
ns  
0.5tc -  
1.9  
0.5tc -  
1.9  
Output hold time, SPI_CS inactive to SPI_CLK inactive  
SPICSI)  
(1) D is the programable data delay in ns. Data delay can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 SPICLK clock cycles.  
4
5
6
SPI_CLK  
SPI_TX  
1
Bn-2  
Bn-2  
Bn-1  
Bn-1  
B0  
B0  
B1  
B1  
SPI_RX  
SPI_CS  
7
8
2
3
A. Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown.  
B. Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown.  
Figure 5-40. SPI Mode 0 Transfer (CKPn = 0, CKPHn = 0)  
4
5
6
SPI_CLK  
SPI_TX  
SPI_RX  
1
2
Bn-2  
Bn-2  
Bn-1  
Bn-1  
B0  
B1  
B1  
B1  
7
8
3
SPI_CS  
A. Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown.  
B. Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown.  
Figure 5-41. SPI Mode 1 Transfer (CKPn = 0, CKPHn = 1)  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Specifications  
139  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
4
5
6
SPI_CLK  
1
B0  
B0  
B1  
B1  
Bn-2  
Bn-2  
Bn-1  
Bn-1  
SPI_TX  
SPI_RX  
3
7
8
2
SPI_CS  
A. Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown.  
B. Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown.  
Figure 5-42. SPI Mode 2 Transfer (CKPn = 1, CKPHn = 0)  
4
6
5
SPI_CLK  
SPI_TX  
SPI_RX  
SPI_CS  
1
2
Bn-2  
Bn-2  
Bn-1  
Bn-1  
B0  
B0  
B1  
B1  
7
8
3
A. Character length is programmable between 1 and 32 bits; 8-bit character length shown.  
B. Polarity of SPI_CSn is configurable, active-low polarity is shown.  
Figure 5-43. SPI Mode 3 Transfer (CKPn = 1, CKPHn = 1)  
140  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.16 Timers  
The device has three 32-bit software programmable Timers. Each timer can be used as a general-  
purpose (GP) timer. Timer2 can be configured as either a GP or a Watchdog (WD) or both. General-  
purpose timers are typically used to provide interrupts to the CPU to schedule periodic tasks or a delayed  
task. A watchdog timer is used to reset the CPU in case it gets into an infinite loop. The GP timers are 32-  
bit timers with a 13-bit prescaler that can divide the CPU clock and uses this scaled value as a reference  
clock. These timers can be used to generate periodic interrupts. The Watchdog Timer is a 16-bit counter  
with a 16-bit prescaler used to provide a recovery mechanism for the device in the event of a fault  
condition, such as a non-exiting code loop.  
The device Timers support the following:  
32-bit Programmable Countdown Timer  
13-bit Prescaler Divider  
Timer Modes:  
32-bit General-Purpose Timer  
32-bit Watchdog Timer (Timer2 only)  
Auto Reload Option  
Generates a single interrupt to the CPU, which can be configured as a timer interrupt (TINT) or as a  
non-maskable interrupt (NMI). The interrupt is individually latched to determine which timer triggered  
the interrupt.  
Generates an active low pulse to the hardware reset (Watchdog only)  
Interrupt can be used for DMA Event  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
141  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.17 Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter (UART)  
The UART performs serial-to-parallel conversions on data received from an external peripheral device and  
parallel-to-serial conversions on data transmitted to an external peripheral device via a serial bus.  
The device has one UART peripheral with the following features:  
Programmable baud rates (frequency pre-scale values from 1 to 65535)  
Fully programmable serial interface characteristics:  
5, 6, 7, or 8-bit characters  
Even, odd, or no PARITY bit generation and detection  
1, 1.5, or 2 STOP bit generation  
16-byte depth transmitter and receiver FIFOs:  
The UART can be operated with or without the FIFOs  
1, 4, 8, or 14 byte selectable receiver FIFO trigger level for autoflow control and DMA  
DMA signaling capability for both received and transmitted data  
CPU interrupt capability for both received and transmitted data  
False START bit detection  
Line break generation and detection  
Internal diagnostic capabilities:  
Loopback controls for communications link fault isolation  
Break, parity, overrun, and framing error simulation  
Programmable autoflow control using CTS and RTS signals  
5.7.17.1 UART Electrical Data and Timing [Receive and Transmit]  
Table 5-58. Timing Requirements for UART Receive(1)(2) (see Figure 5-44)  
CVDD = 1.05/1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
U - 3.5  
U - 3.5  
MAX  
U + 3  
U + 3  
4
5
tw(URXDB)  
tw(URXSB)  
Pulse duration, receive data bit (UART_RXD) [15/30 pF]  
Pulse duration, receive start bit [15/30 pF]  
ns  
ns  
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.  
(2) These parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, and 1.8 V.  
Table 5-59. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions  
for UART Transmit(1) (2)  
(see Figure 5-44)  
CVDD = 1.05/1.3/1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
fmax/16  
1
2
3
f(baud)  
Maximum programmable bit rate  
MHz  
ns  
tw(UTXDB)  
tw(UTXSB)  
Pulse duration, transmit data bit (UART_TXD) [15/30 pF]  
Pulse duration, transmit start bit [15/30 pF]  
U - 3.5  
U - 3.5  
U + 4  
U + 4  
ns  
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.  
(2) These parametric values are measured at DVDDIO = 3.3 V, 2.75 V, and 1.8 V.  
142  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
3
2
Start  
Bit  
UART_TXD  
Data Bits  
5
4
Start  
Bit  
UART_RXD  
Data Bits  
Figure 5-44. UART Transmit and Receive Timing  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
143  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.18 Universal Host-Port Interface (UHPI)  
The device includes a user-configurable 16-bit universal host-port interface (UHPI16). The UHPI provides  
a parallel port interface through which an external host processor can directly access the processor's  
resources (configuration and program and data memories). The external host device is asynchronous to  
the CPU clock and functions as a master to the UHPI interface. The UHPI enables a host device and the  
processor to exchange information via internal memory. Dedicated address (UHPIA) and data (UHPID)  
registers within the UHPI provide the data path between the external host interface and the processor  
resources. A UHPI control register (UHPIC) is available to the host and the CPU for various configuration  
and interrupt functions.  
5.7.18.1 UHPI Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-60. Timing Requirements for Host-Port Interface, DVDDIO = 3.3/2.75 V  
DVDDIO = 3.3/2.75 V  
NO.  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
6.5  
3
MAX  
MIN  
5
MAX  
1
2
3
tsu(SELV-HSTBL) Setup time, select signals(1) valid before HSTROBE low  
ns  
ns  
ns  
th(HSTBL-SELV)  
tw(HSTBL)  
Hold time, select signals(1) valid after HSTROBE low  
2
Pulse duration, HSTROBE active low  
19  
17  
Pulse duration, HSTROBE inactive high between consecutive  
accesses  
4
tw(HSTBH)  
2P(2)  
2P(2)  
ns  
11 tsu(HDV-HSTBH) Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high  
7.8  
3.3  
5
ns  
ns  
12 th(HSTBH-HDV)  
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high  
2.5  
Hold time, HSTROBE high after UHPI_HRDY high. HSTROBE  
13 th(HRDYL-HSTBH) should not be inactivated until UHPI_HRDY is active (high);  
otherwise, UHPI writes will not complete properly.  
2
2
ns  
(1) Select signals include: UHPI_HCNTL[1:0], UHPI_HR_NW and UHPI_HHWIL.  
(2) P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 200 MHz, P = 5 ns.  
Table 5-61. Timing Requirements for Host-Port Interface, DVDDIO = 1.8 V  
DVDDIO = 1.8 V  
NO.  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3/1.4 V  
UNIT  
MIN  
7.3  
3
MAX  
MIN  
5
MAX  
1
2
3
tsu(SELV-HSTBL) Setup time, select signals(1) valid before HSTROBE low  
ns  
ns  
ns  
th(HSTBL-SELV)  
tw(HSTBL)  
Hold time, select signals(1) valid after HSTROBE low  
2
Pulse duration, HSTROBE active low  
24  
19  
Pulse duration, HSTROBE inactive high between consecutive  
accesses  
4
tw(HSTBH)  
2P(2)  
2P(2)  
ns  
11 tsu(HDV-HSTBH) Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high  
8.6  
3.3  
5
ns  
ns  
12 th(HSTBH-HDV)  
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high  
2.5  
Hold time, HSTROBE high after UHPI_HRDY high. HSTROBE  
13 th(HRDYL-HSTBH) should not be inactivated until UHPI_HRDY is active (high);  
otherwise, UHPI writes will not complete properly.  
2
2
ns  
(1) Select signals include: UHPI_HCNTL[1:0], UHPI_HR_NW and UHPI_HHWIL.  
(2) P = SYSCLK period in ns. For example, when the CPU core is clocked at 200 MHz, P = 5 ns.  
144  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 5-62. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Host-Port Interface,  
DVDDIO = 3.3/2.75 V  
DVDDIO = 3.3/2.75 V  
CVDD = 1.05  
V
CVDD  
1.3/1.4 V  
=
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN MAX  
For UHPI Write, UHPI_HRDY can go  
low (not ready) for these UHPI Write  
conditions; otherwise, UHPI_HRDY  
stays high (ready):  
Case 1: Back-to-back HPIA writes (can  
be either first or second half-word)  
Case 2: HPIA write following a  
PREFETCH command (can be either  
first or second half-word)  
Case 3: HPID write when FIFO is full or  
flushing (can be either first or second  
half-word)  
Case 4: HPIA write and Write FIFO not  
empty  
For UHPI Read, UHPI_HRDY can go  
low (not ready) for these UHPI Read  
conditions:  
Case 1: UHPID read (with auto-  
increment) and data not in Read FIFO  
(can only happen to first half-word of  
HPID access)  
Delay time, HSTROBE low to  
UHPI_HRDY valid  
5
td(HSTBL-HRDYV)  
0
22.3  
0
15.5  
ns  
Case 2: First half-word access of HPID  
Read without auto-increment  
For UHPI Read, UHPI_HRDY stays  
high (ready) for these UHPI Read  
conditions:  
Case 1: HPID read with auto-increment  
and data is already in Read FIFO  
(applies to either half-word of HPID  
access)  
Case 2: HPID read without auto-  
increment and data is already in Read  
FIFO (always applies to second half-  
word of HPID access)  
Case 3: HPIC or HPIA read (applies to  
either half-word access)  
6
7
ten(HSTBL-HDLZ)  
td(HRDYL-HDV)  
toh(HSTBH-HDV)  
tdis(HSTBH-HDHZ)  
Enable time, UHPI_HD driven from HSTROBE low  
Delay time, UHPI_HRDY high to HD valid  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0
1.1  
8
Output hold time, UHPI_HD valid after HSTROBE high  
Disable time, HD high-impedance from HSTROBE high  
14  
24.3  
15.8  
For UHPI Read. Applies to conditions  
where data is already residing in  
HPID/FIFO:  
Case 1: HPIC or HPIA read  
Case 2: First half-word of HPID read  
with auto-increment and data is already  
in Read FIFO  
Delay time, HSTROBE low to  
HD valid  
15  
td(HSTBL-HDV)  
24.3  
15.8  
ns  
Case 3: Second half-word of HPID  
read with or without auto-increment  
For UHPI Write, UHPI_HRDY can go  
low (not ready) for these UHPI Write  
conditions; otherwise, UHPI_HRDY  
stays high (ready):  
Case 1: HPID write when Write FIFO is  
full (can happen to either half-word)  
Case 2: HPIA write (can happen to  
either half-word)  
Delay time, HSTROBE high to  
UHPI_HRDY valid  
18  
td(HSTBH-HRDYV)  
24.3  
15.8  
ns  
Case 3: HPID write without auto-  
increment (only happens to second  
half-word)  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
145  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 5-63. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Host-Port Interface,  
DVDDIO = 1.8 V  
DVDDIO = 1.8 V  
CVDD = 1.05  
V
CVDD  
1.3/1.4 V  
=
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN MAX  
For UHPI Write, UHPI_HRDY can go  
low (not ready) for these UHPI Write  
conditions; otherwise, UHPI_HRDY  
stays high (ready):  
Case 1: Back-to-back HPIA writes (can  
be either first or second half-word)  
Case 2: HPIA write following a  
PREFETCH command (can be either  
first or second half-word)  
Case 3: HPID write when FIFO is full or  
flushing (can be either first or second  
half-word)  
Case 4: HPIA write and Write FIFO not  
empty  
For UHPI Read, UHPI_HRDY can go  
low (not ready) for these UHPI Read  
conditions:  
Case 1: UHPID read (with auto-  
increment) and data not in Read FIFO  
(can only happen to first half-word of  
HPID access)  
Delay time, HSTROBE low to  
UHPI_HRDY valid  
5
td(HSTBL-HRDYV)  
0
26.5  
0
19  
ns  
Case 2: First half-word access of HPID  
Read without auto-increment  
For UHPI Read, UHPI_HRDY stays  
high (ready) for these UHPI Read  
conditions:  
Case 1: HPID read with auto-increment  
and data is already in Read FIFO  
(applies to either half-word of HPID  
access)  
Case 2: HPID read without auto-  
increment and data is already in Read  
FIFO (always applies to second half-  
word of HPID access)  
Case 3: HPIC or HPIA read (applies to  
either half-word access)  
6
7
ten(HSTBL-HDLZ)  
td(HRDYL-HDV)  
toh(HSTBH-HDV)  
tdis(HSTBH-HDHZ)  
Enable time, UHPI_HD driven from HSTROBE low  
Delay time, UHPI_HRDY high to HD valid  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
1.1  
1.1  
8
Output hold time, UHPI_HD valid after HSTROBE high  
Disable time, HD high-impedance from HSTROBE high  
14  
26.8  
20.5  
For UHPI Read. Applies to conditions  
where data is already residing in HPID  
or FIFO:  
Case 1: HPIC or HPIA read  
Case 2: First half-word of HPID read  
with auto-increment and data is already  
in Read FIFO  
Delay time, HSTROBE low to  
HD valid  
15  
td(HSTBL-HDV)  
26.8  
20.5  
ns  
Case 3: Second half-word of HPID  
read with or without auto-increment  
For UHPI Write, UHPI_HRDY can go  
low (not ready) for these UHPI Write  
conditions; otherwise, UHPI_HRDY  
stays high (ready):  
Case 1: HPID write when Write FIFO is  
full (can happen to either half-word)  
Case 2: HPIA write (can happen to  
either half-word)  
Delay time, HSTROBE high to  
UHPI_HRDY valid  
18  
td(HSTBH-HRDYV)  
26.5  
19  
ns  
Case 3: HPID write without auto-  
increment (only happens to second  
half-word)  
146  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
UHPI_HCS  
(D)  
UHPI_HAS  
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
UHPI_HCNTL[1:0]  
UHPI_HR_NW  
UHPI_HHWIL  
2
2
2
2
4
3
3
(A)(C)  
HSTROBE  
15  
15  
14  
14  
8
6
8
6
UHPI_HD[15:0]  
(output)  
13  
7
1st Half-Word  
2nd Half-Word  
5
(B)  
UHPI_HRDY  
A. HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on UHPI_HCS, UHPI_HDS1, and UHPI_HDS2: [NOT(UHPI_HDS1  
XOR UHPI_HDS2)] OR UHPI_HCS.  
B. Depending on the type of write or read operation (HPID without auto-incrementing; HPIA, HPIC, or HPID with auto-  
incrementing) and the state of the FIFO, transitions on UHPI_HRDY may or may not occur.  
For more information on the UHPI peripheral, see the UHPI chapter in the TMS320C5517 Technical Reference  
Manual [literature number SPRUH16].  
C. Typical UHPI_HCS behavior is reflected when HSTROBE assertion is caused by UHPI_HDS1 or UHPI_HDS2.  
UHPI_HCS timing requirements are reflected by parameters for HSTROBE.  
D. For proper UHPI operation, UHPI_HAS must be pulled up via an external resistor.  
Figure 5-45. UHPI Read Timing (UHPI_HAS Not Used, Tied High)  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
147  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
UHPI_HCS  
(D)  
UHPI_HAS  
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
UHPI_HCNTL[1:0]  
1
2
UHPI_HR_NW  
1
2
2
3
UHPI_HHWIL  
3
4
(A)(C)  
HSTROBE  
11  
11  
12  
12  
UHPI_HD[15:0]  
(input)  
1st Half-Word  
2nd Half-Word  
18  
5
18  
13  
13  
5
(B)  
UHPI_HRDY  
A. HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on UHPI_HCS, UHPI_HDS1, and UHPI_HDS2: [NOT(UHPI_HDS1  
XOR UHPI_HDS2)] OR UHPI_HCS.  
B. Depending on the type of write or read operation (HPID without auto-incrementing; HPIA, HPIC, or HPID with auto-  
incrementing) and the state of the FIFO, transitions on UHPI_HRDY may or may not occur.  
For more information on the UHPI peripheral, see the UHPI chapter in the TMs320C5517 Technical Reference  
Manual [literature number SPRUH16].  
C. Typical UHPI_HCS behavior is reflected when HSTROBE assertion is caused by UHPI_HDS1 or UHPI_HDS2.  
UHPI_HCS timing requirements are reflected by parameters for HSTROBE.  
D. For proper UHPI operation, UHPI_HAS must be pulled up via an external resistor.  
Figure 5-46. UHPI Write Timing (UHPI_HAS Not Used, Tied High)  
148  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
5.7.19 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 Controller  
The device USB2.0 peripheral supports the following features:  
USB2.0 peripheral at speeds high-speed (480Mb/s) and full-speed (12Mb/s)  
All transfer modes (control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous mode)  
4 Transmit (TX) and 4 Receive (RX) Endpoints in addition to Control Endpoint 0  
FIFO RAM  
4K endpoint  
Programmable size  
Integrated USB2.0 High Speed PHY  
RNDIS mode for accelerating RNDIS type protocols using short packet termination over USB  
The USB2.0 peripheral on this device, does not support:  
Host Mode (Peripheral and Device Modes supported only)  
On-Chip Charge Pump  
On-the-Go (OTG) Mode  
5.7.19.1 USB 2.0 Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-64. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for USB 2.0 (see  
Figure 5-47)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
FULL SPEED  
12 Mbps  
HIGH SPEED  
480 Mbps(1)  
MIN  
4
MAX  
MIN  
0.5  
0.5  
MAX  
1
2
tr(D)  
Rise time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals(2)  
Fall time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals(2)  
Rise and Fall time, matching(3)  
Output signal cross-over voltage(2)  
Pulse duration, EOP transmitter(4)  
Pulse duration, EOP receiver(4)  
Data Rate  
20  
20  
ns  
ns  
%
V
tf(D)  
4
3
trfM  
90  
1.3  
160  
82  
111  
2
4
VCRS  
tw(EOPT)  
tw(EOPR)  
t(DRATE)  
ZDRV  
ZINP  
7
175  
ns  
ns  
8
9
12  
480 Mb/s  
10  
11  
Driver Output Resistance  
40.5  
49.5  
40.5  
-
49.5  
-
Ω
Ω
Receiver Input Impedance  
100k  
(1) For more detailed information, see the Universal Serial Bus Specification, Revision 2.0, Chapter 7.  
(2) Full Speed and High Speed CL = 50 pF  
(3) tRFM = (tr/tf) x 100. [Excluding the first transaction from the Idle state.]  
(4) Must accept as valid EOP  
t t  
per - jr  
USB_DM  
V
90% V  
OH  
CRS  
10% V  
OL  
USB_DP  
t
f
t
r
Figure 5-47. USB2.0 Integrated Transceiver Interface Timing  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
149  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.20 Emulation and Debug  
5.7.20.1 Debugging Considerations  
5.7.20.1.1 Pullup and Pulldown Resistors  
Proper board design should ensure that input pins to the DSP are always at a valid logic level and not  
floating. This may be achieved via pullup and pulldown resistors. The DSP features internal pullup (IPU)  
and internal pulldown (IPD) resistors on many pins to eliminate the need, unless otherwise noted, for  
external pullup and pulldown resistors.  
An external pullup and pulldown resistor may need to be used in the following situations:  
Configuration Pins: An external pullup and pulldown resistor is recommended to set the desired value  
or state (see the configuration pins listed in Table 5-5, Default Functions Affected by Device  
Configuration Pins). Note that some configuration pins must be connected directly to ground or to a  
specific supply voltage.  
Input Pins (I, I/O, I/O/Z): They are required to be driven at all times. To achieve the lowest power, input  
pins must not be allowed to float. When they are configured as input or tri-stated, and not driven to a  
known state, they may cause an excessive IO-supply current. Prevent this current by externally  
terminating it or enabling IPD and IPU, if applicable.  
Other Input Pins: If the IPU and IPD does not match the desired value or state, use an external pullup  
and pulldown resistor to pull the signal to the opposite rail.  
For the configuration pins (listed in Table 5-5, Default Functions Affected by Device Configuration Pins), if  
they are both routed out and 3-stated (not driven), it is strongly recommended that an external pullup and  
pulldown resistor be implemented. In addition, applying external pullup and pulldown resistors on the  
configuration pins adds convenience to the user in debugging and flexibility in switching operating modes.  
When an external pullup or pulldown resistor is used on a pin, the pin’s internal pullup or pulldown resistor  
should be disabled through the Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Registers (PUDINHIBR1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7)  
to minimize power consumption.  
Tips for choosing an external pullup and pulldown resistor:  
Consider the total amount of current that may pass through the pullup or pulldown resistor. Make sure  
to include the leakage currents of all the devices connected to the net, as well as any internal pullup or  
pulldown (IPU and IPD) resistors.  
Decide a target value for the net. For a pulldown resistor, this should be below the lowest VIL level of  
all inputs connected to the net. For a pullup resistor, this should be above the highest VIH level of all  
inputs on the net. A reasonable choice would be to target the VOL or VOH levels for the logic family of  
the limiting device; which, by definition, have margin to the VIL and VIH levels.  
Select a pullup and pulldown resistor with the largest possible value; but, which can still ensure that the  
net will reach the target pulled value when maximum current from all devices on the net is flowing  
through the resistor. The current to be considered includes leakage current plus, any other internal and  
external pullup and pulldown resistors on the net.  
For bidirectional nets, there is an additional consideration which sets a lower limit on the resistance  
value of the external resistor. Verify that the resistance is small enough that the weakest output buffer  
can drive the net to the opposite logic level (including margin).  
Remember to include tolerances when selecting the resistor value.  
For pullup resistors, also remember to include tolerances on the DVDD rail.  
For most systems, a 1-kΩ resistor can be used to oppose the IPU and IPD while meeting the above  
criteria. Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific application.  
For most systems, a 20-kΩ resistor can be used to compliment the IPU and IPD on the configuration pins  
while meeting the above criteria. Users should confirm this resistor value is correct for their specific  
application.  
150  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
For more detailed information on input current (II), and the low- and high-level input voltages (VIL and VIH)  
for the device DSP, see Section 5.3.2, Electrical Characteristics.  
For the internal pullup and pulldown resistors for all device pins, see the peripheral and system-specific  
signal descriptions table in this document.  
5.7.20.1.2 Bus Holders  
The device has special I/O bus-holder structures to ensure pins are not left floating when CVDD power is  
removed while I/O power is applied. When CVDD is "ON", the bus-holders are disabled and the internal  
pullups or pulldowns, if applicable, function normally. But when CVDD is "OFF" and the I/O supply is "ON",  
the bus-holders become enabled and any applicable internal pullups and pulldowns are disabled.  
The bus-holders are weak drivers on the pin and, for as long as CVDD is "OFF" and I/O power is "ON",  
they hold the last state on the pin. If an external device is strongly driving the device I/O pin to the  
opposite state then the bus-holder will flip state to match the external driver and DC current will stop.  
This bus-holder feature prevents unnecessary power consumption when CVDD is "OFF"and I/O supply is  
"ON". For example, current caused by undriven pins (input buffer oscillation) or DC current flowing through  
pullups or pulldowns.  
If external pullup or pulldown resistors are implemented, then care should be taken that those pullup and  
pulldown resistors can exceed the internal bus-holder's max current and thereby cause the bus-holder to  
flip state to match the state of the external pullup or pulldown. Otherwise, DC current will flow  
unnecessarily. When CVDD power is applied, the bus holders are disabled (for further details on bus  
holders, see Section 5.7.2.3, Digital I/O Behavior When Core Power (CVDD) is Down).  
5.7.20.1.3 CLKOUT Pin  
For debug purposes, the DSP includes a CLKOUT pin which can be used to tap different clocks within the  
clock generator. The SRC bits of the CLKOUT Configuration Register (CLKOUTCR) can be used to  
specify the source for the CLKOUT pin.  
Note: The bootloader disables the CLKOUT pin via CLKOFF bit in the ST3_55 CPU register.  
For more information on the ST3_55 CPU register, see the C55x 3.0 CPU Reference Guide (literature  
number: SWPU073).  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Specifications  
151  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
5.7.21 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG  
The JTAG interface is used for Boundary-Scan testing and emulation of the device.  
TRST should only to be deasserted when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the device or  
exercise the device's boundary scan functionality.  
The device includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin to ensure that TRST will always be  
asserted upon power up and the device's internal emulation logic will always be properly initialized. An  
external pulldown should also be added to ensure proper device operation when an emulation or  
boundary scan JTAG controller is not connected to the JTAG pins. JTAG controllers from Texas  
Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party JTAG controllers may not drive TRST  
high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST. When using this type of JTAG controller, assert  
TRST to initialize the device after powerup and externally drive TRST high before attempting any  
emulation or boundary scan operations. The device will not operate properly if TRST is not asserted low  
during powerup.  
5.7.21.1 JTAG Test_port Electrical Data and Timing  
Table 5-65. Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 5-48)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
UNIT  
MIN  
60  
24  
24  
10  
6
MAX  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
tc(TCK)  
Cycle time, TCK  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tw(TCKH)  
Pulse duration, TCK high  
tw(TCKL)  
Pulse duration, TCK low  
tsu(TDIV-TCKH)  
tsu(TMSV-TCKH)  
th(TCKH-TDIV)  
th(TCKH-TDIV)  
Setup time, TDI valid before TCK high  
Setup time, TMS valid before TCK high  
Hold time, TDI valid after TCK high  
Hold time, TMS valid after TCK high  
5
4
Table 5-66. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port  
(see Figure 5-48)  
CVDD = 1.05 V  
CVDD = 1.3 V  
CVDD = 1.4 V  
NO.  
PARAMETER  
UNIT  
MIN  
MAX  
1
td(TCKL-TDOV)  
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid  
30.5  
ns  
2
3
4
TCK  
TDO  
1
1
7
8
5
6
TDI  
TMS  
Figure 5-48. JTAG Test-Port Timing  
152  
Specifications  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6 Detailed Description  
6.1 CPU  
This fixed-point digital signal processor (DSP) is based on the C55x CPU 3.3 generation processor core.  
The C55x DSP architecture achieves high performance and low power through increased parallelism and  
total focus on power savings. The CPU supports an internal bus structure that is composed of one  
program bus, three data read buses (one 32-bit data read bus and two 16-bit data read buses), two 16-bit  
data write buses, and additional buses dedicated to peripheral and DMA activity. These buses provide the  
ability to perform up to four data reads and two data writes in a single cycle. Each DMA controller can  
perform one 32-bit data transfer per cycle, in parallel and independent of the CPU activity.  
The C55x CPU provides two multiply-accumulate (MAC) units, each capable of 17-bit x 17-bit  
multiplication in a single cycle. A central 40-bit arithmetic and logic unit (ALU) is supported by an  
additional 16-bit ALU. Use of the ALUs is under instruction set control, providing the ability to optimize  
parallel activity and power consumption. These resources are managed in the Address Unit (AU) and Data  
Unit (DU) of the C55x CPU.  
The C55x DSP generation supports a variable byte width instruction set for improved code density. The  
Instruction Unit (IU) performs 32-bit program fetches from internal or external memory, stores them in a  
128-byte Instruction Buffer Queue, and queues instructions for the Program Unit (PU). The Program Unit  
decodes the instructions, directs tasks to AU and DU resources, and manages the fully protected pipeline.  
Predictive branching capability avoids pipeline flushes on execution of conditional instruction calls.  
For more detailed information on the CPU, see the C55x CPU 3.0 CPU Reference Guide [literature  
number SWPU073].  
The C55x core of the device can address 16M bytes of unified data and program space. The core also  
addresses 64K words of I/O space and includes three types of on-chip memory: 128 KB read-only  
memory (ROM), 256 KB single-access random access memory (SARAM), 64 KB dual-access random  
access memory (DARAM). The memory map is shown in Figure 6-1 .  
6.2 Memory  
6.2.1 Internal Memory  
6.2.1.1 On-Chip Dual-Access RAM (DARAM)  
The DARAM is located in the byte address range 000000h - 00FFFFh and is composed of eight blocks of  
4K words each (see Table 6-1). Each DARAM block can support two accesses per cycle (two reads, two  
writes, or a read and a write). The DARAM can be accessed by the internal program, data, or DMA buses.  
Table 6-1. DARAM Blocks  
CPU  
DMA CONTROLLER  
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE  
MEMORY BLOCK  
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE  
000000h – 001FFFh  
002000h – 003FFFh  
004000h – 005FFFh  
006000h – 007FFFh  
008000h – 009FFFh  
00A000h – 00BFFFh  
00C000h – 00DFFFh  
00E000h – 00FFFFh  
0001 0000h – 0001 1FFFh  
0001 2000h – 0001 3FFFh  
0001 4000h – 0001 5FFFh  
0001 6000h – 0001 7FFFh  
0001 8000h – 0001 9FFFh  
0001 A000h – 0001 BFFFh  
0001 C000h – 0001 DFFFh  
0001 E000h – 0001 FFFFh  
DARAM 0(1)  
DARAM 1  
DARAM 2  
DARAM 3  
DARAM 4  
DARAM 5  
DARAM 6  
DARAM 7  
(1) The first 192 bytes are reserved for memory-mapped registers (MMRs). See Figure 6-1 , Memory Map  
Summary.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
153  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
6.2.1.2 On-Chip Single-Access RAM (SARAM)  
The SARAM is located at the byte address range 010000h – 04FFFFh and is composed of 32 blocks of  
4K words each (see Table 6-2). Each SARAM block can support one access per cycle (one read or one  
write). SARAM can be accessed by the internal program, data, or DMA buses. SARAM is also accessed  
by the USB DMA buses.  
Table 6-2. SARAM Blocks  
CPU  
DMA and USB CONTROLLER  
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE  
MEMORY BLOCK  
BYTE ADDRESS RANGE  
010000h - 011FFFh  
012000h - 013FFFh  
014000h - 015FFFh  
016000h - 017FFFh  
018000h - 019FFFh  
01A000h - 01BFFFh  
01C000h - 01DFFFh  
01E000h - 01FFFFh  
020000h - 021FFFh  
022000h - 023FFFh  
024000h - 025FFFh  
026000h - 027FFFh  
028000h - 029FFFh  
02A000h - 02BFFFh  
02C000h - 02DFFFh  
02E000h - 02FFFFh  
030000h - 031FFFh  
032000h - 033FFFh  
034000h - 035FFFh  
036000h - 037FFFh  
038000h - 039FFFh  
03A000h - 03BFFFh  
03C000h - 03DFFFh  
03E000h - 03FFFFh  
040000h – 041FFFh  
042000h – 043FFFh  
044000h – 045FFFh  
046000h – 047FFFh  
048000h – 049FFFh  
04A000h – 04BFFFh  
04C000h – 04DFFFh  
04E000h – 04FFFFh  
0009 0000h – 0009 1FFFh  
0009 2000h – 0009 3FFFh  
0009 4000h – 0009 5FFFh  
0009 6000h – 0009 7FFFh  
0009 8000h – 0009 9FFFh  
0009 A000h – 0009 BFFFh  
0009 C000h – 0009 DFFFh  
0009 E000h – 0009 FFFFh  
000A 0000h – 000A 1FFFh  
000A 2000h – 000A 3FFFh  
000A 4000h – 000A 5FFFh  
000A 6000h – 000A 7FFFh  
000A 8000h – 000A 9FFFh  
000A A000h – 000A BFFFh  
000A C000h – 000A DFFFh  
000A E000h – 000A FFFFh  
000B 0000h – 000B 1FFFh  
000B 2000h – 000B 3FFFh  
000B 4000h – 000B 5FFFh  
000B 6000h – 000B 7FFFh  
000B 8000h – 000B 9FFFh  
000B A000h – 000B BFFFh  
000B C000h – 000B DFFFh  
000B E000h – 000B FFFFh  
000C 0000h – 000C 1FFFh  
000C 2000h – 000C 3FFFh  
000C 4000h – 000C 5FFFh  
000C 6000h – 000C 7FFFh  
000C 8000h – 000C 9FFFh  
000C A000h – 000C BFFFh  
000C C000h – 000C DFFFh  
000C E000h – 000C FFFFh  
SARAM 0  
SARAM 1  
SARAM 2  
SARAM 3  
SARAM 4  
SARAM 5  
SARAM 6  
SARAM 7  
SARAM 8  
SARAM 9  
SARAM 10  
SARAM 11  
SARAM 12  
SARAM 13  
SARAM 14  
SARAM 15  
SARAM 16  
SARAM 17  
SARAM 18  
SARAM 19  
SARAM 20  
SARAM 21  
SARAM 22  
SARAM 23  
SARAM 24  
SARAM 25  
SARAM 26  
SARAM 27  
SARAM 28  
SARAM 29  
SARAM 30  
SARAM 31(1)  
(1) SARAM31 (byte address range: 0x4E000 – 0x4EFFF) is reserved for the bootloader. After the boot  
process is complete, this memory space can be used.  
154  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.1.3 On-Chip Read-Only Memory (ROM)  
The zero-wait-state ROM is located at the byte address range FE0000h – FFFFFFh. The ROM is  
composed of four 16K-word blocks, for a total of 128K bytes of ROM. Each on-chip ROM block can  
support one read per cycle. The ROM address space can be mapped by software to the EMIF external  
memory or to the internal ROM.  
The standard device includes a Bootloader program resident in the ROM.  
When the MPNMC bit field of the ST3 status register is cleared (by default), the byte address range  
FE0000h – FFFFFFh is used for the on-chip ROM. When the MPNMC bit field of the ST3 status register is  
set through software, the on-chip ROM is disabled and not present in the memory map, and byte address  
range FE0000h – FFFFFFh is directed to the EMIF's external memory space on EM_CS5. A hardware  
reset always clears the MPNMC bit, so it is not possible to disable the ROM at reset. However, the  
software reset instruction does not affect the MPNMC bit. The ROM can be accessed by the CPU  
program and data buses.  
6.2.1.4 I/O Memory  
The device includes a 64K byte I/O space for the memory-mapped registers of the DSP peripherals and  
system registers used for idle control, status monitoring and system configuration. I/O space is separate  
from program and memory space and is accessed with separate instruction opcodes or via the DMA's.  
Table 6-3 lists the memory-mapped registers of the device. Note that not all addresses in the 64K byte I/O  
space are used; these addresses should be treated as RESERVED and not accessed by the CPU nor  
DMA. For the expanded tables of each peripheral, see Section 6.2.4, Register Map.  
Some of the DMA controllers have access to the I/O-Space memory-mapped registers of the following  
peripherals registers: I2C, UART, I2S, MMC and SD, EMIF, McBSP, McSPI, USB, and SAR ADC.  
Before accessing any peripheral memory-mapped register, make sure the peripheral being accessed is  
not held in reset via the Peripheral Reset Control Register (PRCR) and its internal clock is enabled via the  
Peripheral Clock Gating Control Registers (PCGCR1 and PCGCR2).  
Table 6-3. Peripheral I/O-Space Control Registers  
WORD ADDRESS  
0x0000 – 0x0004  
0x0005 – 0x0BFF  
0x0C00 – 0x0C7F  
0x0C80 – 0x0CFF  
0x0D00 – 0x0D7F  
0x0D80 – 0x0DFF  
0x0E00 – 0x0E7F  
0x0E80 – 0x0EFF  
0x0F00 – 0x0F7F  
0x0F80 – 0x0FFF  
0x1000 – 0x10DD  
0x10DE – 0x17FF  
0x1800 – 0x181F  
0x1820 – 0x183F  
0x1840 – 0x185F  
0x1860 – 0x187F  
0x1880 – 0x189F  
0x18A0 – 0x18FF  
0x1900 – 0x197F  
PERIPHERAL  
Idle Control  
Reserved  
DMA0  
Reserved  
DMA1  
Reserved  
DMA2  
Reserved  
DMA3  
Reserved  
EMIF  
Reserved  
Timer0  
Reserved  
Timer1  
Reserved  
Timer2  
Reserved  
RTC  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
155  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 6-3. Peripheral I/O-Space Control Registers (continued)  
WORD ADDRESS  
PERIPHERAL  
Reserved  
I2C  
0x1980 – 0x19FF  
0x1A00 – 0x1A6C  
0x1A6D – 0x1AFF  
0x1B00 – 0x1B1F  
0x1B20 – 0x1BFF  
0x1C00 – 0x1CFF  
0x1D00 – 0x1FFF through 0x2600 – 0x27FF  
0x2800 – 0x2840  
Reserved  
UART  
Reserved  
System Control  
Reserved  
I2S0  
0x2841 – 0x29FF  
0x2A00 – 0x2A40  
0x2A41 – 0x2AFF  
0x2B00 – 0x2B40  
0x2B41 – 0x2DFF  
0x2E00 – 0x2E81  
0x2E82 – 0x2FFF  
0x3000 – 0x300F  
0x3010 – 0x33FF  
0x3400 – 0x3749  
Reserved  
I2S2  
Reserved  
I2S3  
Reserved  
UHPI  
Reserved  
SPI  
Reserved  
McSPI  
0x3750 –0x39FF  
Reserved  
MMC0 and SD0  
Reserved  
MMC1 and SD1  
Reserved  
McBSP  
0x3A00 – 0x3A7F  
0x3A80 – 0x3AFF  
0x3B00 – 0x3B7F  
0x3B80 – 0x3FFF  
0x4000 – 0x407F  
0x4080 – 0x5FFF  
0x6000 – 0x60FF  
0x6100 – 0x6FFF  
0x7000 – 0x70FF  
0x7100 – 0x7FFF  
0x8000 – 0xFFFF  
Reserved  
McBSP DMA  
Reserved  
SAR and Analog Control Registers  
Reserved  
USB  
6.2.2 External Memory  
The external memory space of the device is located at the byte address range 050000h – FFFFFFh. The  
external memory space is divided into five chip select spaces: one dedicated to SDRAM and mobile  
SDRAM (EMIF CS0 or CS[1:0] space), and the remainder (EMIF CS2 through CS5 space) dedicated to  
asynchronous devices including flash. Each chip select space has a corresponding chip select pin (called  
EM_CSx) that is activated during an access to the chip select space.  
The external memory interface (EMIF) provides the means for the DSP to access external memories and  
other devices including: mobile single data rate (SDR) synchronous dynamic RAM (SDRAM and  
mSDRAM), NOR Flash, NAND Flash, and asynchronous static RAM (SRAM). Before accessing external  
memory, you must configure the EMIF through its memory-mapped registers.  
The EMIF provides a configurable 16- or 8-bit data bus, an address bus width of up to 21-bits, and 5  
dedicated chip selects, along with memory control signals. To maximize power savings, the I/O pins of the  
EMIF can be operated at an independent voltage from the other I/O pins on the device.  
156  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.3 Memory Map  
The device provides 16M bytes of total memory space composed of on-chip RAM, on-chip ROM, and  
external memory space supporting a variety of memory types. The on-chip, dual-access RAM allows two  
accesses to a given block during the same cycle. There are 8 blocks of 8K bytes of dual-access RAM.  
The on-chip, single-access RAM allows one access to a given block per cycle. In addition, there are 32  
blocks of 8K bytes of single-access RAM.  
The remainder of the memory map is divided into five external spaces, and on-chip ROM. Each external  
space has a chip select decode signal (called EM_CS0, EM_CS[2:5]) that indicates an access to the  
selected space. The external memory interface (EMIF) supports access to asynchronous memories such  
as SRAM, NAND, or NOR and Flash, and mobile single data rate (mSDR) and single data rate (SDR)  
SDRAM.  
The DSP memory is accessible by different master modules within the DSP, including the C55x CPU, the  
four DMA controllers, the UHPI, and the CDMA of USB (see Figure 6-1). However, only the UHPI and  
USB CDMA can access the SARAM.  
CPU BYTE  
DMA/USB  
ADDRESS(A) BYTE ADDRESS(A)  
MEMORY BLOCKS  
MMR (Reserved)(B)  
BLOCK SIZE  
000000h  
0000C0h  
0001 0000h  
0001 00C0h  
DARAM(D)  
SARAM  
64K Minus 192 Bytes  
010000h  
050000h  
0009 0000h  
0100 0000h  
256K Bytes  
External-CS0 Space(C)(E)  
8M Minus 320K Bytes SDRAM/mSDRAM  
800000h  
C00000h  
E00000h  
F00000h  
0200 0000h  
0300 0000h  
0400 0000h  
0500 0000h  
External-CS2 Space(C)  
External-CS3 Space(C)  
4M Bytes Asynchronous  
2M Bytes Asynchronous  
External-CS4 Space(C)  
External-CS5 Space(C)  
1M Bytes Asynchronous  
1M Minus 128K Bytes Asynchronous  
FE0000h  
FFFFFFh  
050E 0000h  
050F FFFFh  
External-CS5 Space(C)  
(if MPNMC=1)  
128K Bytes Asynchronous (if MPNMC=1)  
128K Bytes ROM (if MPNMC=0)  
ROM  
(if MPNMC=0)  
A. Address shown represents the first byte address in each block.  
B. The first 192 bytes are reserved for memory-mapped registers (MMRs).  
C. Out of the four DMA controllers, only DMA controller 3 has access to the external memory space.  
D. The USB controller and UHPI do not have access to DARAM.  
E. The CS0 space can be accessed by CS0 only or by CS0 and CS1.  
Figure 6-1. Memory Map  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Detailed Description  
157  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
6.2.4 Register Map  
6.2.4.1 DMA Peripheral Register Description  
The following tables show the registers associated with the four direct memory access (DMA) controllers.  
Table 6-4. System Registers Related to the DMA Controllers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
1C30h  
1C31h  
1C1Ah  
1C1Bh  
1C1Ch  
1C1Dh  
1C36h  
1C37h  
1C38h  
1C39h  
DMAIFR  
DMA Interrupt Flag Register  
DMAIER  
DMA Interrupt Enable Register  
DMA0CESRL  
DMA0CESRU  
DMA1CESRL  
DMA1CESRU  
DMA2CESRL  
DMA2CESRU  
DMA3CESRL  
DMA3CESRU  
DMA0 Channel Event Source Register Lower  
DMA0 Channel Event Source Register Upper  
DMA1 Channel Event Source Register Lower  
DMA1 Channel Event Source Register Upper  
DMA2 Channel Event Source Register Lower  
DMA2 Channel Event Source Register Upper  
DMA3 Channel Event Source Register Lower  
DMA3 Channel Event Source Register Upper  
Table 6-5. DMA Controller 0 (DMA0) Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
0C00h  
0C01h  
0C02h  
0C03h  
0C04h  
0C05h  
0C20h  
0C21h  
0C22h  
0C23h  
0C24h  
0C25h  
0C40h  
0C41h  
0C42h  
0C43h  
0C44h  
0C45h  
0C60h  
0C61h  
0C62h  
0C63h  
0C64h  
0C65h  
DMACH0SSAL  
DMACH0SSAU  
DMACH0DSAL  
DMACH0DSAU  
DMACH0TCRL  
DMACH0TCRU  
DMACH1SSAL  
DMACH1SSAU  
DMACH1DSAL  
DMACH1DSAU  
DMACH1TCRL  
DMACH1TCRU  
DMACH2SSAL  
DMACH2SSAU  
DMACH2DSAL  
DMACH2DSAU  
DMACH2TCRL  
DMACH2TCRU  
DMACH3SSAL  
DMACH3SSAU  
DMACH3DSAL  
DMACH3DSAU  
DMACH3TCRL  
DMACH3TCRU  
Channel 0 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 0 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 0 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 0 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 0 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 0 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 1 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 1 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 1 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 1 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 1 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 1 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 2 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 2 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 2 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 2 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 2 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 2 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 3 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 3 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 3 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 3 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 3 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 3 Transfer Control Register Upper  
158  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 6-6. DMA Controller 1 (DMA1) Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
0D00h  
0D01h  
0D02h  
0D03h  
0D04h  
0D05h  
0D20h  
0D21h  
0D22h  
0D23h  
0D24h  
0D25h  
0D40h  
0D41h  
0D42h  
0D43h  
0D44h  
0D45h  
0D60h  
0D61h  
0D62h  
0D63h  
0D64h  
0D65h  
DMACH0SSAL  
DMACH0SSAU  
DMACH0DSAL  
DMACH0DSAU  
DMACH0TCRL  
DMACH0TCRU  
DMACH1SSAL  
DMACH1SSAU  
DMACH1DSAL  
DMACH1DSAU  
DMACH1TCRL  
DMACH1TCRU  
DMACH2SSAL  
DMACH2SSAU  
DMACH2DSAL  
DMACH2DSAU  
DMACH2TCRL  
DMACH2TCRU  
DMACH3SSAL  
DMACH3SSAU  
DMACH3DSAL  
DMACH3DSAU  
DMACH3TCRL  
DMACH3TCRU  
Channel 0 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 0 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 0 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 0 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 0 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 0 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 1 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 1 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 1 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 1 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 1 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 1 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 2 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 2 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 2 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 2 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 2 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 2 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 3 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 3 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 3 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 3 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 3 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 3 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Table 6-7. DMA Controller 2 (DMA2) Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
0E00h  
0E01h  
0E02h  
0E03h  
0E04h  
0E05h  
0E20h  
0E21h  
0E22h  
0E23h  
0E24h  
0E25h  
0E40h  
0E41h  
0E42h  
0E43h  
0E44h  
0E45h  
DMACH0SSAL  
DMACH0SSAU  
DMACH0DSAL  
DMACH0DSAU  
DMACH0TCRL  
DMACH0TCRU  
DMACH1SSAL  
DMACH1SSAU  
DMACH1DSAL  
DMACH1DSAU  
DMACH1TCRL  
DMACH1TCRU  
DMACH2SSAL  
DMACH2SSAU  
DMACH2DSAL  
DMACH2DSAU  
DMACH2TCRL  
DMACH2TCRU  
Channel 0 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 0 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 0 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 0 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 0 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 0 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 1 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 1 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 1 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 1 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 1 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 1 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 2 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 2 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 2 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 2 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 2 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 2 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
159  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 6-7. DMA Controller 2 (DMA2) Registers (continued)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
0E60h  
0E61h  
0E62h  
0E63h  
0E64h  
0E65h  
DMACH3SSAL  
DMACH3SSAU  
DMACH3DSAL  
DMACH3DSAU  
DMACH3TCRL  
DMACH3TCRU  
Channel 3 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 3 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 3 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 3 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 3 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 3 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Table 6-8. DMA Controller 3 (DMA3) Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
0F00h  
0F01h  
0F02h  
0F03h  
0F04h  
0F05h  
0F20h  
0F21h  
0F22h  
0F23h  
0F24h  
0F25h  
0F40h  
0F41h  
0F42h  
0F43h  
0F44h  
0F45h  
0F60h  
0F61h  
0F62h  
0F63h  
0F64h  
0F65h  
DMACH0SSAL  
DMACH0SSAU  
DMACH0DSAL  
DMACH0DSAU  
DMACH0TCRL  
DMACH0TCRU  
DMACH1SSAL  
DMACH1SSAU  
DMACH1DSAL  
DMACH1DSAU  
DMACH1TCRL  
DMACH1TCRU  
DMACH2SSAL  
DMACH2SSAU  
DMACH2DSAL  
DMACH2DSAU  
DMACH2TCRL  
DMACH2TCRU  
DMACH3SSAL  
DMACH3SSAU  
DMACH3DSAL  
DMACH3DSAU  
DMACH3TCRL  
DMACH3TCRU  
Channel 0 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 0 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 0 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 0 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 0 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 0 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 1 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 1 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 1 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 1 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 1 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 1 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 2 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 2 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 2 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 2 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 2 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 2 Transfer Control Register Upper  
Channel 3 Source Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 3 Source Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 3 Destination Start Address Register Lower  
Channel 3 Destination Start Address Register Upper  
Channel 3 Transfer Control Register Lower  
Channel 3 Transfer Control Register Upper  
160  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.4.2 EMIF Peripheral Register Description  
Table 6-9 shows the EMIF registers.  
Table 6-9. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Peripheral Registers(1)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
1000h  
1001h  
1004h  
1005h  
1008h  
1009h  
100Ch  
1010h  
1011h  
1014h  
1015h  
1018h  
1019h  
101Ch  
101Dh  
1020h  
1021h  
103Ch  
1040h  
1044h  
1048h  
104Ch  
1060h  
1064h  
1065h  
1068h  
1069h  
1070h  
1071h  
1074h  
1075h  
1078h  
1079h  
107Ch  
107Dh  
10BCh  
10C0h  
10C1h  
10C4h  
10C5h  
10C8h  
10C9h  
REV  
STATUS  
Revision Register  
Status Register  
AWCCR1  
Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register 1  
Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register 2  
SDRAM and mSDRAM Configuration Register 1  
SDRAM and mSDRAM Configuration Register 2  
SDRAM and mSDRAM Refresh Control Register  
Asynchronous CS2 Configuration Register 1  
Asynchronous CS2 Configuration Register 2  
Asynchronous CS3 Configuration Register 1  
Asynchronous CS3 Configuration Register 2  
Asynchronous CS4 Configuration Register 1  
Asynchronous CS4 Configuration Register 2  
Asynchronous CS5 Configuration Register 1  
Asynchronous CS5 Configuration Register 2  
SDRAM and mSDRAM Timing Register 1  
SDRAM and mSDRAM Timing Register 2  
SDRAM and mSDRAM Self Refresh Exit Timing Register  
EMIF Interrupt Raw Register  
AWCCR2  
SDCR1  
SDCR2  
SDRCR  
ACS2CR1  
ACS2CR2  
ACS3CR1  
ACS3CR2  
ACS4CR1  
ACS4CR2  
ACS5CR1  
ACS5CR2  
SDTIMR1  
SDTIMR2  
SDSRETR  
EIRR  
EIMR  
EMIF Interrupt Mask Register  
EIMSR  
EMIF Interrupt Mask Set Register  
EIMCR  
EMIF Interrupt Mask Clear Register  
NANDFCR  
NANDFSR1  
NANDFSR2  
PAGEMODCTRL1  
PAGEMODCTRL2  
NCS2ECC1  
NCS2ECC2  
NCS3ECC1  
NCS3ECC2  
NCS4ECC1  
NCS4ECC2  
NCS5ECC1  
NCS5ECC2  
NAND4BITECCLOAD  
NAND4BITECC1  
NAND4BITECC2  
NAND4BITECC3  
NAND4BITECC4  
NAND4BITECC5  
NAND4BITECC6  
NAND Flash Control Register  
NAND Flash Status Register 1  
NAND Flash Status Register 2  
Page Mode Control Register 1  
Page Mode Control Register 2  
NAND Flash CS2 1-Bit ECC Register 1  
NAND Flash CS2 1-Bit ECC Register 2  
NAND Flash CS3 1-Bit ECC Register 1  
NAND Flash CS3 1-Bit ECC Register 2  
NAND Flash CS4 1-Bit ECC Register 1  
NAND Flash CS4 1-Bit ECC Register 2  
NAND Flash CS5 1-Bit ECC Register 1  
NAND Flash CS5 1-Bit ECC Register 2  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Load Register  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 1  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 2  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 3  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 4  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 5  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 6  
(1) Before reading or writing to the EMIF registers, be sure to set the BYTEMODE bits to 00b in the EMIF system control register to enable  
word accesses to the EMIF registers.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
161  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 6-9. External Memory Interface (EMIF) Peripheral Registers(1) (continued)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
10CCh  
10CDh  
10D0h  
10D1h  
10D4h  
10D5h  
10D8h  
10D9h  
10DCh  
10DDh  
NAND4BITECC7  
NAND4BITECC8  
NANDERRADD1  
NANDERRADD2  
NANDERRADD3  
NANDERRADD4  
NANDERRVAL1  
NANDERRVAL2  
NANDERRVAL3  
NANDERRVAL4  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 7  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Register 8  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 1  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 2  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 3  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Address Register 4  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 1  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 2  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 3  
NAND Flash 4-Bit ECC Error Value Register 4  
6.2.4.3 GPIO Peripheral Register Description  
The external parallel port interface includes a 16-bit general purpose I/O that can be individually  
programmed as input or output with interrupt capability. Control of the general purpose I/O is maintained  
through a set of I/O memory-mapped registers shown in Table 6-10.  
Table 6-10. GPIO Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
1C06h  
1C07h  
1C08h  
1C09h  
1C0Ah  
1C0Bh  
1C0Ch  
1C0Dh  
1C0Eh  
1C0Fh  
1C10h  
1C11h  
IODIR1  
IODIR2  
GPIO Direction Register 1  
GPIO Direction Register 2  
GPIO Data In Register 1  
GPIO Data In Register 2  
GPIO Data Out Register 1  
GPIO Data Out Register 2  
IOINDATA1  
IOINDATA2  
IODATAOUT1  
IODATAOUT2  
IOINTEDG1  
IOINTEDG2  
IOINTEN1  
GPIO Interrupt Edge Trigger Enable Register 1  
GPIO Interrupt Edge Trigger Enable Register 2  
GPIO Interrupt Enable Register 1  
IOINTEN2  
GPIO Interrupt Enable Register 2  
IOINTFLG1  
IOINTFLG2  
GPIO Interrupt Flag Register 1  
GPIO Interrupt Flag Register 2  
162  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.4.4 I2C Peripheral Register Description  
Table 6-11 shows the Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) registers.  
Table 6-11. Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
1A00h  
1A04h  
1A08h  
1A0Ch  
1A10h  
1A14h  
1A18h  
1A1Ch  
1A20h  
1A24h  
1A28h  
1A2Ch  
1A30h  
1A34h  
1A38h  
ICOAR  
ICIMR  
I2C Own Address Register  
I2C Interrupt Mask Register  
I2C Interrupt Status Register  
ICSTR  
ICCLKL  
ICCLKH  
ICCNT  
ICDRR  
ICSAR  
ICDXR  
ICMDR  
ICIVR  
I2C Clock Low-Time Divider Register  
I2C Clock High-Time Divider Register  
I2C Data Count Register  
I2C Data Receive Register  
I2C Slave Address Register  
I2C Data Transmit Register  
I2C Mode Register  
I2C Interrupt Vector Register  
I2C Extended Mode Register  
I2C Prescaler Register  
ICEMDR  
ICPSC  
ICPID1  
ICPID2  
I2C Peripheral Identification Register 1  
I2C Peripheral Identification Register 2  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
163  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
6.2.4.5 I2S Peripheral Register Description  
Table 6-12 through Table 6-14 show the I2S0, I2S2, and I2S3 registers.  
Table 6-12. I2S0 Registers  
CPU WORD  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
ADDRESS  
2800h  
2804h  
2808h  
2809h  
280Ch  
280Dh  
2810h  
2814h  
2828h  
2829h  
282Ch  
282Dh  
I2S0SCTRL  
I2S0SRATE  
I2S0TXLT1  
I2S0TXLT2  
I2S0TXRT1  
I2S0TXRT2  
I2S0INTFL  
I2S0 Serializer Control Register  
I2S0 Sample Rate Generator Register  
I2S0 Transmit Left Data Register 1  
I2S0 Transmit Left Data Register 2  
I2S0 Transmit Right Data Register 1  
I2S0 Transmit Right Data Register 2  
I2S0 Interrupt Flag Register  
I2S0INTMASK  
I2S0RXLT1  
I2S0RXLT2  
I2S0RXRT1  
I2S0RXRT2  
I2S0 Interrupt Mask Register  
I2S0 Receive Left Data Register 1  
I2S0 Receive Left Data Register 2  
I2S0 Receive Right Data Register 1  
I2S0 Receive Right Data Register 2  
Table 6-13. I2S2 Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
2A00h  
2A04h  
2A08h  
2A09h  
2A0Ch  
2A0Dh  
2A10h  
2A14h  
2A28h  
2A29h  
2A2Ch  
2A2Dh  
I2S2SCTRL  
I2S2SRATE  
I2S2TXLT1  
I2S2TXLT2  
I2S2TXRT1  
I2S2TXRT2  
I2S2INTFL  
I2S2 Serializer Control Register  
I2S2 Sample Rate Generator Register  
I2S2 Transmit Left Data Register 1  
I2S2 Transmit Left Data Register 2  
I2S2 Transmit Right Data Register 1  
I2S2 Transmit Right Data Register 2  
I2S2 Interrupt Flag Register  
I2S2INTMASK  
I2S2RXLT1  
I2S2RXLT2  
I2S2RXRT1  
I2S2RXRT2  
I2S2 Interrupt Mask Register  
I2S2 Receive Left Data Register 1  
I2S2 Receive Left Data Register 2  
I2S2 Receive Right Data Register 1  
I2S2 Receive Right Data Register 2  
Table 6-14. I2S3 Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
2B00h  
2B04h  
2B08h  
2B09h  
2B0Ch  
2B0Dh  
2B10h  
2B14h  
2B28h  
2B29h  
2B2Ch  
I2S3SCTRL  
I2S3SRATE  
I2S3TXLT1  
I2S3TXLT2  
I2S3TXRT1  
I2S3TXRT2  
I2S3INTFL  
I2S3 Serializer Control Register  
I2S3 Sample Rate Generator Register  
I2S3 Transmit Left Data Register 1  
I2S3 Transmit Left Data Register 2  
I2S3 Transmit Right Data Register 1  
I2S3 Transmit Right Data Register 2  
I2S3 Interrupt Flag Register  
I2S3INTMASK  
I2S3RXLT1  
I2S3RXLT2  
I2S3RXRT1  
I2S3 Interrupt Mask Register  
I2S3 Receive Left Data Register 1  
I2S3 Receive Left Data Register 2  
I2S3 Receive Right Data Register 1  
164  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 6-14. I2S3 Registers (continued)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
2B2Dh  
I2S3RXRT2  
I2S3 Receive Right Data Register 2  
6.2.4.6 McBSP Peripheral Register Descriptions  
Table 6-15 shows the McBSP peripheral registers.  
Table 6-15. McBSP Module Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
4000h  
4001h  
4004h  
4005h  
4008h  
4009h  
400Ch  
400Dh  
4010h  
4011h  
4014h  
4015h  
4018h  
4019h  
401Ch  
401Dh  
4020h  
4021h  
4024h  
4025h  
4028h  
4029h  
402Ch  
402Dh  
4030h  
4031h  
4034h  
4035h  
4038h  
4039h  
403Ch  
403Dh  
DRRL  
DRRU  
DXRL  
Data Receive Register Lower  
Data Receive Register Upper  
Data Transmit Register Lower  
Data Transmit Register Upper  
Serial Port Control Register Lower  
Serial Port Control Register Upper  
Receive Control Register Lower  
Receive Control Register Upper  
Transmit Control Register Lower  
Transmit Control Register Upper  
DXRU  
SPCRL  
SPCRU  
RCRL  
RCRU  
XCRL  
XCRU  
SRGRL  
Sample Rate Generator Register Lower  
Sample Rate Generator Register Upper  
Multichannel Control Register Lower  
Multichannel Control Register Upper  
SRGRU  
MCRL  
MCRU  
RCERA  
RCERB  
XCERA  
XCERB  
PCRL  
Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register Partition A  
Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register Partition B  
Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition A  
Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition B  
Pin Control Register Lower  
PCRU  
Pin Control Register Upper  
RCERC  
RCERD  
XCERC  
XCERD  
RCERE  
RCERF  
XCERE  
XCERF  
RCERG  
RCERH  
XCERG  
XCERH  
Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register Partition C  
Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register Partition D  
Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition C  
Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition D  
Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register Partition E  
Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register Partition F  
Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition E  
Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition F  
Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register Partition G  
Enhanced Receive Channel Enable Register Partition H  
Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition G  
Enhanced Transmit Channel Enable Register Partition H  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
165  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
6.2.4.7 McSPI Peripheral Register Descriptions  
Table 6-16 shows the McSPI peripheral registers.  
Table 6-16. McSPI Module Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REVISIONL  
REGISTER NAME  
3500h  
3510h  
3514h  
3518h  
3519h  
351Ch  
351Dh  
3520h  
3528h  
352Ch  
352Dh  
3530h  
3534h  
3538h  
3539h  
353Ch  
353Dh  
3540h  
3541h  
3544h  
3548h  
354Ch  
354Dh  
3550h  
3551h  
3554h  
3555h  
3558h  
355Ch  
3560h  
3561h  
3564h  
3565h  
357Ch  
357Dh  
3580h  
3581h  
35A0h  
35A1h  
Revision Register Lower  
SYSCONFIGL  
SYSSTATUSL  
IRQSTATUSL  
IRQSTATUSU  
IRQENABLEL  
IRQENABLEU  
WAKEUPENABLEL  
MODULCTRLL  
CH0CONFL  
CH0CONFU  
CH0STATL  
CH0CTRLL  
CH0TXL  
System Configuration Register Lower  
System Status Register Lower  
Interrupt Status Register Lower  
Interrupt Status Register Upper  
Interrupt Enable Register Lower  
Interrupt Enable Register Upper  
Wakeup Enable Register Lower  
Module Control Register Lower  
Channel 0 Configuration Register Lower  
Channel 0 Configuration Register Upper  
Channel 0 Status Register Lower  
Channel 0 Control Register Lower  
Channel 0 Transmitter Register Lower  
Channel 0 Transmitter Register Upper  
Channel 0 Receiver Register Lower  
Channel 0 Receiver Register Upper  
Channel 1 Configuration Register Lower  
Channel 1 Configuration Register Upper  
Channel 1 Status Register Lower  
CH0TXU  
CH0RXL  
CH0RXU  
CH1CONFL  
CH1CONFU  
CH1STATL  
CH1CTRLL  
CH1TXL  
Channel 1 Control Register Lower  
Channel 1 Transmitter Register Lower  
Channel 1 Transmitter Register Upper  
Channel 1 Receiver Register Lower  
Channel 1 Receiver Register Upper  
Channel 2 Configuration Register Lower  
Channel 2 Configuration Register Upper  
Channel 2 Status Register Lower  
CH1TXU  
CH1RXL  
CH1RXU  
CH2CONFL  
CH2CONFU  
CH2STATL  
CH2CTRLL  
CH2TXL  
Channel 2 Control Register Lower  
Channel 2 Transmitter Register Lower  
Channel 2 Transmitter Register Upper  
Channel 2 Receiver Register Lower  
Channel 2 Receiver Register Upper  
Transfer Levels Register Lower  
CH2TXU  
CH2RXL  
CH2RXU  
XFERLEVELL  
XFERLEVELU  
DAFTXL  
Transfer Levels Register Upper  
DMA Address Aligned FIFO Transmitter Register Lower  
DMA Address Aligned FIFO Transmitter Register Upper  
DMA Address Aligned FIFO Receiver Register Lower  
DMA Address Aligned FIFO Receiver Register Upper  
DAFTXU  
DAFRXL  
DAFRXU  
166  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.4.8 MMC and SD Peripheral Register Description  
Table 6-17 and Table 6-18 show the MMC and SD registers. The MMC0 and SD0 registers start at  
address 0x3A00 and the MMC1 and SD1 registers start at address 0x3B00.  
Table 6-17. MMC0 and SD0 Registers  
CPU WORD  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
ADDRESS  
3A00h  
3A04h  
3A08h  
3A0Ch  
3A10h  
3A14h  
3A18h  
3A1Ch  
3A20h  
3A24h  
3A28h  
3A29h  
3A2Ch  
3A2Dh  
3A30h  
3A31h  
3A34h  
3A35h  
3A38h  
3A39h  
3A3Ch  
3A3Dh  
3A40h  
3A41h  
3A44h  
3A45h  
3A48h  
3A50h  
3A64h  
3A68h  
3A6Ch  
3A70h  
3A74h  
MMCCTL  
MMCCLK  
MMC Control Register  
MMC Memory Clock Control Register  
MMC Status Register 0  
MMCST0  
MMCST1  
MMC Status Register 1  
MMCIM  
MMC Interrupt Mask Register  
MMC Response Time-Out Register  
MMC Data Read Time-Out Register  
MMC Block Length Register  
MMC Number of Blocks Register  
MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register  
MMC Data Receive Register Lower  
MMC Data Receive Register Upper  
MMC Data Transmit Register Lower  
MMC Data Transmit Register Upper  
MMC Command Register Lower  
MMC Command Register Upper  
MMC Argument Register Lower  
MMC Argument Register Upper  
MMC Response Register 0  
MMCTOR  
MMCTOD  
MMCBLEN  
MMCNBLK  
MMCNBLC  
MMCDRRL  
MMCDRRU  
MMCDXRL  
MMCDXRU  
MMCCMDL  
MMCCMDU  
MMCARGL  
MMCARGU  
MMCRSP0  
MMCRSP1  
MMCRSP2  
MMCRSP3  
MMCRSP4  
MMCRSP5  
MMCRSP6  
MMCRSP7  
MMCDRSP  
MMCCIDX  
SDIOCTL  
MMC Response Register 1  
MMC Response Register 2  
MMC Response Register 3  
MMC Response Register 4  
MMC Response Register 5  
MMC Response Register 6  
MMC Response Register 7  
MMC Data Response Register  
MMC Command Index Register  
SDIO Control Register  
SDIOST0  
SDIO Status Register 0  
SDIOIEN  
SDIO Interrupt Enable Register  
SDIO Interrupt Status Register  
MMC FIFO Control Register  
SDIOIST  
MMCFIFOCTL  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
167  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 6-18. MMC1 and SD1 Registers  
CPU WORD  
ACRONYM  
ADDRESS  
REGISTER NAME  
3B00h  
3B04h  
3B08h  
3B0Ch  
3B10h  
3B14h  
3B18h  
3B1Ch  
3B20h  
3B24h  
3B28h  
3B29h  
3B2Ch  
3B2Dh  
3B30h  
3B31h  
3B34h  
3B35h  
3B38h  
3B39h  
3B3Ch  
3B3Dh  
3B40h  
3B41h  
3B44h  
3B45h  
3B48h  
3B50h  
3B64h  
3B68h  
3B6Ch  
3B70h  
3B74h  
MMCCTL  
MMCCLK  
MMC Control Register  
MMC Memory Clock Control Register  
MMC Status Register 0  
MMCST0  
MMCST1  
MMC Status Register 1  
MMCIM  
MMC Interrupt Mask Register  
MMC Response Time-Out Register  
MMC Data Read Time-Out Register  
MMC Block Length Register  
MMC Number of Blocks Register  
MMC Number of Blocks Counter Register  
MMC Data Receive Register Lower  
MMC Data Receive Register Upper  
MMC Data Transmit Register Lower  
MMC Data Transmit Register Upper  
MMC Command Register Lower  
MMC Command Register Upper  
MMC Argument Register Lower  
MMC Argument Register Upper  
MMC Response Register 0  
MMCTOR  
MMCTOD  
MMCBLEN  
MMCNBLK  
MMCNBLC  
MMCDRRL  
MMCDRRU  
MMCDXRL  
MMCDXRU  
MMCCMDL  
MMCCMDU  
MMCARGL  
MMCARGU  
MMCRSP0  
MMCRSP1  
MMCRSP2  
MMCRSP3  
MMCRSP4  
MMCRSP5  
MMCRSP6  
MMCRSP7  
MMCDRSP  
MMCCIDX  
SDIOCTL  
MMC Response Register 1  
MMC Response Register 2  
MMC Response Register 3  
MMC Response Register 4  
MMC Response Register 5  
MMC Response Register 6  
MMC Response Register 7  
MMC Data Response Register  
MMC Command Index Register  
SDIO Control Register  
SDIOST0  
SDIO Status Register 0  
SDIOIEN  
SDIO Interrupt Enable Register  
SDIO Interrupt Status Register  
MMC FIFO Control Register  
SDIOIST  
MMCFIFOCTL  
168  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.4.9 RTC Peripheral Register Description  
Table 6-19 shows the RTC registers.  
Table 6-19. Real-Time Clock (RTC) Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
1900h  
1901h  
1904h  
1905h  
1908h  
1909h  
190Ch  
190Dh  
1910h  
1911h  
1914h  
1915h  
1918h  
1919h  
191Ch  
191Dh  
1920h  
1921h  
1924h  
1928h  
192Ch  
1930h  
1960h  
1961h  
1964h  
1965h  
196Ch  
196Dh  
RTCINTEN  
RTCUPDATE  
RTCMIL  
RTC Interrupt Enable Register  
RTC Update Register  
Milliseconds Register  
RTCMILA  
Milliseconds Alarm Register  
Seconds Register  
RTCSEC  
RTCSECA  
RTCMIN  
Seconds Alarm Register  
Minutes Register  
RTCMINA  
RTCHOUR  
RTCHOURA  
RTCDAY  
Minutes Alarm Register  
Hours Register  
Hours Alarm Register  
Days Register  
RTCDAYA  
RTCMONTH  
RTCMONTHA  
RTCYEAR  
RTCYEARA  
RTCINTFL  
RTCNOPWR  
RTCINTREG  
RTCDRIFT  
RTCOSC  
Days Alarm Register  
Months Register  
Months Alarm Register  
Years Register  
Years Alarm Register  
RTC Interrupt Flag Register  
RTC Lost Power Status Register  
RTC Interrupt Register  
RTC Compensation Register  
RTC Oscillator Register  
RTC Power Management Register  
RTC LSW Scratch Register 1  
RTC MSW Scratch Register 2  
RTC LSW Scratch Register 3  
RTC MSW Scratch Register 4  
RTC LSW Gate-Keeper Register  
RTC MSW Gate-Keeper Register  
RTCPMGT  
RTCSCR1  
RTCSCR2  
RTCSCR3  
RTCSCR4  
RGKR_LSW  
RGKR_MSW  
6.2.4.10 SAR ADC Peripheral Register Description  
Table 6-20 shows the SAR ADC peripheral registers.  
Table 6-20. SAR Analog Control Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
7012h  
7014h  
7016h  
7018h  
701Ah  
SARCTRL  
SARDATA  
SAR A/D Control Register  
SAR A/D Data Register  
SARCLKCTRL  
SARPINCTRL  
SARGPOCTRL  
SAR A/D Clock Control Register  
SAR A/D Reference and Pin Control Register  
SAR A/D GPO Control Register  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
169  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
6.2.4.11 SPI Peripheral Register Descriptions  
Table 6-21 shows the SPI registers.  
Table 6-21. SPI Module Registers  
CPU  
WORD  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
ADDRESS  
3000h  
3001h  
3002h  
3003h  
3004h  
3005h  
3006h  
3007h  
3008h  
3009h  
SPICDR  
SPICCR  
Clock Divider Register  
Clock Control Register  
SPIDCR1  
SPIDCR2  
SPICMD1  
SPICMD2  
SPISTAT1  
SPISTAT2  
SPIDAT1  
SPIDAT2  
Device Configuration Register 1  
Device Configuration Register 2  
Command Register 1  
Command Register 2  
Status Register 1  
Status Register 2  
Data Register 1  
Data Register 2  
170  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.4.12 System Registers  
The system registers are used to configure the device and monitor its status. Brief descriptions of the  
various system registers are shown in Table 6-22.  
Table 6-22. Idle Control, Status, and System Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
COMMENTS  
Register Description  
Idle Control Register  
0001h  
0002h  
1C00h  
ICR  
ISTR  
EBSR  
Idle Status Register  
see Section 5.7.3.5.1 of this  
document.  
External Bus Selection Register  
1C02h  
1C03h  
1C04h  
1C05h  
1C14h  
1C15h  
1C16h  
1C17h  
1C18h  
1C19h  
1C1Ah  
1C1Bh  
1C1Ch  
1C1Dh  
1C1Eh  
1C1Fh  
1C20h  
1C21h  
1C22h  
1C23h  
1C24h  
1C26h  
1C27h  
1C28h  
1C2Ah  
1C2Bh  
1C2Ch  
1C2Dh  
1C2Eh  
1C2Fh  
1C30h  
1C31h  
1C32h  
1C33h  
1C34h  
1C36h  
1C37h  
1C38h  
1C39h  
PCGCR1  
PCGCR2  
Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register 1  
Peripheral Clock Gating Control Register 2  
Peripheral Software Reset Counter Register  
Peripheral Reset Control Register  
Timer Interrupt Aggregation Flag Register  
McSPI Interrupt Aggregation Flag Register  
Output Slew Rate Control Register  
Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Register 1  
Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Register 2  
Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Register 3  
DMA0 Channel Event Source Register 1  
DMA0 Channel Event Source Register 2  
DMA1 Channel Event Source Register 1  
DMA1 Channel Event Source Register 2  
Clock Configuration Register 1  
PSRCR  
PRCR  
TIAFR  
MSIAFR  
OSRCR  
PUDINHIBR1  
PUDINHIBR2  
PUDINHIBR3  
DMA0CESR1  
DMA0CESR2  
DMA1CESR1  
DMA1CESR2  
CCR1  
CCR2  
Clock Configuration Register 2  
PMR  
PLL Multiplier Register  
PICR  
PLL Input Control Register  
PCR  
PLL Control Register  
PODCR  
PLL Output Divider Control Register  
CLKOUT Configuration Register  
CLKOUTCR  
ECDR  
EMIF Clock Divider Register  
RSCR  
RTC System Control Register  
RAMSLPMDCNTLR1  
RAMSLPMDCNTLR2  
RAMSLPMDCNTLR3  
RAMSLPMDCNTLR4  
RAMSLPMDCNTLR5  
PLLSSCR1  
PLLSSCR2  
DMAIFR  
RAM Sleep Mode Control Register 1  
RAM Sleep Mode Control Register 2  
RAM Sleep Mode Control Register 3  
RAM Sleep Mode Control Register 4  
RAM Sleep Mode Control Register 5  
PLL Spread Spectrum Control Register 1  
PLL Spread Spectrum Control Register 2  
DMA Interrupt Flag Aggregation Register  
DMA Interrupt Enable Register  
DMAIER  
USBSCR  
USB System Control Register  
ESCR  
EMIF System Control Register  
BMR  
BootMode Register  
DMA2CESR1  
DMA2CESR2  
DMA3CESR1  
DMA3CESR2  
DMA2 Channel Event Source Register 1  
DMA2 Channel Event Source Register 2  
DMA3 Channel Event Source Register 1  
DMA3 Channel Event Source Register 2  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
171  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 6-22. Idle Control, Status, and System Registers (continued)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
COMMENTS  
Register Description  
1C3Ah  
CLKSTOP1  
CLKSTOP2  
Peripheral Clock Stop Request and Acknowledge Register  
1
1C3Bh  
Peripheral Clock Stop Request and Acknowledge Register  
2
1C3Ch  
1C3Dh  
1C3Eh  
1C40h  
1C41h  
1C42h  
1C43h  
1C44h  
1C45h  
1C46h  
1C47h  
1C4Ch  
1C4Dh  
1C4Eh  
1C4Fh  
1C50h  
1C58h  
1C59h  
7004h  
MSPIFCDR  
MSIAER  
McSPI Reference Clock Divider Register  
McSPI Aggregation Interrupt Mask Register  
Timer Interrupt Selection Register  
Die ID Register 0  
TISR  
DIEIDR0  
DIEIDR1  
Die ID Register 1  
DIEIDR2  
Die ID Register 2  
DIEIDR3  
Die ID Register 3  
DIEIDR4  
Die ID Register 4  
DIEIDR5  
Die ID Register 5  
DIEIDR6  
Die ID Register 6  
DIEIDR7  
Die ID Register 7  
PUDINHIBR4  
PUDINHIBR5  
UHPICR  
Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Register 4  
Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Register 5  
UHPI Configuration Register  
Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Register 6  
Pullup and Pulldown Inhibit Register 7  
JTAG ID Code LSW Register  
JTAG ID Code MSW Register  
PUDINHIBR6  
PUDINHIBR7  
JTAGIDLSW  
JTAGIDMSW  
LDOCNTL  
see Section 5.7.2.1.1.2.1 of  
this document.  
LDO Control Register  
172  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.4.13 Timers Peripheral Register Description  
Table 6-23 through Table 6-26 show the Timer and Watchdog registers.  
Table 6-23. Watchdog Timer Registers (Timer2 only)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
1880h  
1882h  
1884h  
1886h  
1888h  
188Ah  
188Ch  
188Eh  
WDKCKLK  
WDKICK  
WDSVLR  
WDSVR  
WDENLOK  
WDEN  
Watchdog Kick Lock Register  
Watchdog Kick Register  
Watchdog Start Value Lock Register  
Watchdog Start Value Register  
Watchdog Enable Lock Register  
Watchdog Enable Register  
WDPSLR  
WDPS  
Watchdog Prescaler Lock Register  
Watchdog Prescaler Register  
Table 6-24. General-Purpose Timer 0 Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
1810h  
1812h  
1813h  
1814h  
1815h  
1816h  
T0CR  
Timer 0 Control Register  
TIM0PRD1  
TIM0PRD2  
TIM0CNT1  
TIM0CNT2  
T0INSR  
Timer 0 Period Register 1  
Timer 0 Period Register 2  
Timer 0 Counter Register 1  
Timer 0 Counter Register 2  
Timer 0 Input Selection Register  
Table 6-25. General-Purpose Timer 1 Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
1850h  
1852h  
1853h  
1854h  
1855h  
1856h  
T1CR  
Timer 1 Control Register  
TIM1PRD1  
TIM1PRD2  
TIM1CNT1  
TIM1CNT2  
T1INSR  
Timer 1 Period Register 1  
Timer 1 Period Register 2  
Timer 1 Counter Register 1  
Timer 1 Counter Register 2  
Timer 1 Input Selection Register  
Table 6-26. General-Purpose Timer 2 Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
1890h  
1892h  
1893h  
1894h  
1895h  
1896h  
T2CR  
Timer 2 Control Register  
TIM2PRD1  
TIM2PRD2  
TIM2CNT1  
TIM2CNT2  
T2INSR  
Timer 2 Period Register 1  
Timer 2 Period Register 2  
Timer 2 Counter Register 1  
Timer 2 Counter Register 2  
Timer 2 Input Selection Register  
Table 6-27. Timer Interrupt Selection Register  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
TISR  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
1C3Eh  
Timer Interrupt Selection Register  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
173  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
6.2.4.14 UART Peripheral Register Description  
Table 6-28 shows the UART registers.  
Table 6-28. UART Registers  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
1B00h  
1B00h  
1B02h  
1B04h  
1B04h  
1B06h  
1B08h  
1B0Ah  
1B0Eh  
1B10h  
1B12h  
1B18h  
RBR  
Receiver Buffer Register (read only)  
Transmitter Holding Register (write only)  
Interrupt Enable Register  
THR  
IER  
IIR  
Interrupt Identification Register (read only)  
FIFO Control Register (write only)  
Line Control Register  
FCR  
LCR  
MCR  
Modem Control Register  
LSR  
SCR  
Line Status Register  
Scratch Register  
DLL  
Divisor LSB Latch  
DLH  
Divisor MSB Latch  
PWREMU_MGMT  
Power and Emulation Management Register  
174  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.2.4.15 UHPI Peripheral Register Descriptions  
Table 6-29 shows the UHPI peripheral registers.  
Table 6-29. UHPI Module Registers  
CPU  
WORD  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER NAME  
ADDRESS  
2E00h  
2E01h  
2E04h  
2E08h  
2E09h  
2E0Ch  
2E0Dh  
2E10h  
2E11h  
2E14h  
2E15h  
2E18h  
2E19h  
2E1Ch  
2E1Dh  
2E20h  
2E21h  
2E24h  
2E25h  
2E30h  
2E34h  
2E35h  
2E38h  
2E39h  
PIDL  
PIDU  
PWREMU_MGMT Power Management and Emulation Register  
Peripheral Identification Register Lower  
Peripheral Identification Register Upper  
GPINT_CTRLL  
GPINT_CTRLU  
GPIO_ENL  
GPINT Control Register Lower  
GPINT Control Register Upper  
GPIO Enable Register Lower  
GPIO_ENU  
GPIO_DIR1L  
GPIO_DIR1U  
GPIO_DAT1L  
GPIO_DAT1U  
GPIO_DIR2L  
GPIO_DIR2U  
GPIO_DAT2L  
GPIO_DAT2U  
GPIO_DIR3L  
GPIO_DIR3U  
GPIO_DAT3L  
GPIO_DAT3U  
UHPICL  
GPIO Enable Register Upper  
GPIO Direction Register 1 Lower  
GPIO Direction Register 1 Upper  
GPIO Data Register 1 Lower  
GPIO Data Register 1 Upper  
GPIO Direction Register 2 Lower  
GPIO Direction Register 2 Upper  
GPIO Data Register 2 Lower  
GPIO Data Register 2 Upper  
GPIO Direction Register 3 Lower  
GPIO Direction Register 3 Upper  
GPIO Data Register 3 Lower  
GPIO Data Register 3 Upper  
Universal Host-Port Interface Control Register  
Universal Host-Port Interface Write Address Register Lower  
Universal Host-Port Interface Write Address Register Upper  
Universal Host-Port Interface Read Address Register Lower  
Universal Host-Port Interface Read Address Register Upper  
UHPIAWL  
UHPIAWU  
UHPIARL  
UHPIARU  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
175  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
6.2.4.16 USB2.0 Peripheral Register Descriptions  
Table 6-30 lists of the USB2.0 peripheral registers.  
Table 6-30. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Revision Identification Register 1  
8000h  
8001h  
8004h  
800Ch  
8010h  
8011h  
8014h  
801Ch  
801Dh  
8020h  
8021h  
8024h  
8025h  
8028h  
8029h  
802Ch  
802Dh  
8030h  
8031h  
8034h  
8035h  
8038h  
8039h  
803Ch  
8040h  
8041h  
8050h  
8051h  
8054h  
8055h  
8058h  
8059h  
805Ch  
805Dh  
REVID1  
REVID2  
Revision Identification Register 2  
Control Register  
CTRLR  
EMUR  
Emulation Register  
MODE1  
Mode Register 1  
MODE2  
Mode Register 2  
AUTOREQ  
TEARDOWN1  
TEARDOWN2  
INTSRCR1  
INTSRCR2  
INTSETR1  
Auto Request Register  
Teardown Register 1  
Teardown Register 2  
USB Interrupt Source Register 1  
USB Interrupt Source Register 2  
USB Interrupt Source Set Register 1  
USB Interrupt Source Set Register 2  
USB Interrupt Source Clear Register 1  
USB Interrupt Source Clear Register 2  
USB Interrupt Mask Register 1  
USB Interrupt Mask Register 2  
USB Interrupt Mask Set Register 1  
USB Interrupt Mask Set Register 2  
USB Interrupt Mask Clear Register 1  
USB Interrupt Mask Clear Register 2  
USB Interrupt Source Masked Register 1  
USB Interrupt Source Masked Register 2  
USB End of Interrupt Register  
USB Interrupt Vector Register 1  
USB Interrupt Vector Register 2  
Generic RNDIS EP1Size Register 1  
Generic RNDIS EP1Size Register 2  
Generic RNDIS EP2 Size Register 1  
Generic RNDIS EP2 Size Register 2  
Generic RNDIS EP3 Size Register 1  
Generic RNDIS EP3 Size Register 2  
Generic RNDIS EP4 Size Register 1  
Generic RNDIS EP4 Size Register 2  
INTSETR2  
INTCLRR1  
INTCLRR2  
INTMSKR1  
INTMSKR2  
INTMSKSETR1  
INTMSKSETR2  
INTMSKCLRR1  
INTMSKCLRR2  
INTMASKEDR1  
INTMASKEDR2  
EOIR  
INTVECTR1  
INTVECTR2  
GREP1SZR1  
GREP1SZR2  
GREP2SZR1  
GREP2SZR2  
GREP3SZR1  
GREP3SZR2  
GREP4SZR1  
GREP4SZR2  
(1) Before reading or writing to the USB registers, be sure to set the BYTEMODE bits to "00b" in the USB system control register to enable  
word accesses to the USB registers .  
176  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 6-30. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Common USB Registers  
8401h  
8402h  
8405h  
8406h  
8409h  
840Ah  
840Dh  
840Eh  
FADDR_POWER  
INTRTX  
Function Address Register, Power Management Register  
Interrupt Register for Endpoint 0 plus Transmit Endpoints 1 to 4  
Interrupt Register for Receive Endpoints 1 to 4  
Interrupt enable register for INTRTX  
INTRRX  
INTRTXE  
INTRRXE  
Interrupt Enable Register for INTRRX  
INTRUSB_INTRUSBE  
FRAME  
Interrupt Register for Common USB Interrupts, Interrupt Enable Register  
Frame Number Register  
Index Register for Selecting the Endpoint Status and Control Registers, Register to  
Enable the USB 2.0 Test Modes  
INDEX_TESTMODE  
USB Indexed Registers  
8411h  
8412h  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Transmit Endpoint. (Index register set  
to select Endpoints 1-4)  
TXMAXP_INDX  
PERI_CSR0_INDX  
PERI_TXCSR_INDX  
RXMAXP_INDX  
Control Status Register for Endpoint 0 in Peripheral Mode. (Index register set to  
select Endpoint 0)  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint. (Index register set to select  
Endpoints 1-4)  
8415h  
8416h  
8419h  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Receive Endpoint. (Index register set  
to select Endpoints 1-4)  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint. (Index register set to select  
Endpoints 1-4)  
PERI_RXCSR_INDX  
COUNT0_INDX  
Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO. (Index register set to select Endpoint  
0)  
Number of Bytes in Host Receive Endpoint FIFO. (Index register set to select  
Endpoints 1- 4)  
RXCOUNT_INDX  
841Ah  
841Dh  
841Eh  
-
-
Reserved  
Reserved  
CONFIGDATA_INDC  
(Upper byte of 841Eh)  
Returns details of core configuration. (index register set to select Endpoint 0)  
USB FIFO Registers  
8421h  
8422h  
8425h  
8426h  
8429h  
842Ah  
842Dh  
842Eh  
8431h  
8432h  
FIFO0R1  
FIFO0R2  
FIFO1R1  
FIFO1R2  
FIFO2R1  
FIFO2R2  
FIFO3R1  
FIFO3R2  
FIFO4R1  
FIFO4R2  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 0  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 0  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 1  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 1  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 2  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 2  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 3  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 3  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 1 for Endpoint 4  
Transmit and Receive FIFO Register 2 for Endpoint 4  
Dynamic FIFO Control Registers  
8461h  
8462h  
-
Reserved  
Transmit Endpoint FIFO Size, Receive Endpoint FIFO Size (Index register set to  
select Endpoints 1-4)  
TXFIFOSZ_RXFIFOSZ  
8465h  
8466h  
846Dh  
TXFIFOADDR  
RXFIFOADDR  
Transmit Endpoint FIFO Address (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4)  
Receive Endpoint FIFO Address (Index register set to select Endpoints 1-4)  
Hardware Version Register (See TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor Technical  
Reference Manual [SPRUH16].)  
HWVERS  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
177  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 6-30. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 0  
8501h  
8502h  
8505h  
8506h  
8509h  
850Ah  
850Dh  
-
Reserved  
PERI_CSR0  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Endpoint 0  
-
Reserved  
-
Reserved  
COUNT0  
Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint 0 FIFO  
Reserved  
-
-
Reserved  
CONFIGDATA  
(Upper byte of 850Eh)  
Returns details of core configuration.  
850Eh  
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 1  
8511h  
8512h  
8515h  
8516h  
8519h  
851Ah  
851Dh  
851Eh  
TXMAXP  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Transmit Endpoint  
PERI_TXCSR  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Receive Endpoint  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)  
Number of Bytes in the Receiving Endpoint's FIFO  
Reserved  
RXMAXP  
PERI_RXCSR  
RXCOUNT  
-
-
-
Reserved  
Reserved  
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 2  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Transmit Endpoint  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Receive Endpoint  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)  
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO  
Reserved  
8521h  
8522h  
8525h  
8526h  
8529h  
852Ah  
852Dh  
852Eh  
TXMAXP  
PERI_TXCSR  
RXMAXP  
PERI_RXCSR  
RXCOUNT  
-
-
-
Reserved  
Reserved  
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 3  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Transmit Endpoint  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Receive Endpoint  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)  
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO  
Reserved  
8531h  
8532h  
8535h  
8536h  
8539h  
853Ah  
853Dh  
853Eh  
TXMAXP  
PERI_TXCSR  
RXMAXP  
PERI_RXCSR  
RXCOUNT  
-
-
-
Reserved  
Reserved  
Control and Status Register for Endpoint 4  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Transmit Endpoint  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Transmit Endpoint (peripheral mode)  
Maximum Packet Size for Peripheral and Host Receive Endpoint  
Control Status Register for Peripheral Receive Endpoint (peripheral mode)  
Number of Bytes in Host Receive endpoint FIFO  
Reserved  
8541h  
8542h  
8545h  
8546h  
8549h  
854Ah  
854Dh  
854Eh  
TXMAXP  
PERI_TXCSR  
RXMAXP  
PERI_RXCSR  
RXCOUNT  
-
-
-
Reserved  
Reserved  
178  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 6-30. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
CPPI DMA (CMDA) Registers  
9000h  
9001h  
9004h  
9008h  
9800h  
9801h  
9808h  
9809h  
980Ch  
980Dh  
9810h  
9811h  
9820h  
9821h  
9828h  
9829h  
982Ch  
982Dh  
9830h  
9831h  
9840h  
9841h  
9848h  
9849h  
984Ch  
984Dh  
9850h  
9851h  
9860h  
9861h  
9868h  
9869h  
986Ch  
986Dh  
9870h  
9871h  
A000h  
A001h  
A800h + 4 × N  
A801h + 4 × N  
DMAREVID1  
DMAREVID2  
TDFDQ  
CDMA Revision Identification Register 1  
CDMA Revision Identification Register 2  
CDMA Teardown Free Descriptor Queue Control Register  
CDMA Emulation Control Register  
DMAEMU  
TXGCR1[0]  
Transmit Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 1  
Transmit Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 2  
Receive Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 1  
Receive Channel 0 Global Configuration Register 2  
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A  
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A  
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B  
Receive Channel 0 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B  
Transmit Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 1  
Transmit Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 2  
Receive Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 1  
Receive Channel 1 Global Configuration Register 2  
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A  
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A  
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B  
Receive Channel 1 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B  
Transmit Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 1  
Transmit Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 2  
Receive Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 1  
Receive Channel 2 Global Configuration Register 2  
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A  
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A  
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B  
Receive Channel 2 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B  
Transmit Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 1  
Transmit Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 2  
Receive Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 1  
Receive Channel 3 Global Configuration Register 2  
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 A  
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 A  
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 1 B  
Receive Channel 3 Host Packet Configuration Register 2 B  
CDMA Scheduler Control Register 1  
TXGCR2[0]  
RXGCR1[0]  
RXGCR2[0]  
RXHPCR1A[0]  
RXHPCR2A[0]  
RXHPCR1B[0]  
RXHPCR2B[0]  
TXGCR1[1]  
TXGCR2[1]  
RXGCR1[1]  
RXGCR2[1]  
RXHPCR1A[1]  
RXHPCR2A[1]  
RXHPCR1B[1]  
RXHPCR2B[1]  
TXGCR1[2]  
TXGCR2[2]  
RXGCR1[2]  
RXGCR2[2]  
RXHPCR1A[2]  
RXHPCR2A[2]  
RXHPCR1B[2]  
RXHPCR2B[2]  
TXGCR1[3]  
TXGCR2[3]  
RXGCR1[3]  
RXGCR2[3]  
RXHPCR1A[3]  
RXHPCR2A[3]  
RXHPCR1B[3]  
RXHPCR2B[3]  
DMA_SCHED_CTRL1  
DMA_SCHED_CTRL2  
ENTRYLSW[N]  
ENTRYMSW[N]  
CDMA Scheduler Control Register 1  
CDMA Scheduler Table Word N Registers LSW (N = 0 to 63)  
CDMA Scheduler Table Word N Registers MSW (N = 0 to 63)  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
179  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Table 6-30. Universal Serial Bus (USB) Registers(1) (continued)  
CPU WORD  
ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Queue Manager (QMGR) Registers  
C000h  
C001h  
QMGRREVID1  
QMGRREVID2  
DIVERSION1  
DIVERSION2  
FDBSC0  
Queue Manager Revision Identification Register 1  
Queue Manager Revision Identification Register 2  
Queue Manager Queue Diversion Register 1  
C008h  
C009h  
Queue Manager Queue Diversion Register 2  
C020h  
Queue Manager Free Descriptor and Buffer Starvation Count Register 0  
Queue Manager Free Descriptor and Buffer Starvation Count Register 1  
Queue Manager Free Descriptor and Buffer Starvation Count Register 2  
Queue Manager Free Descriptor and Buffer Starvation Count Register 3  
Queue Manager Free Descriptor and Buffer Starvation Count Register 4  
Queue Manager Free Descriptor and Buffer Starvation Count Register 5  
Queue Manager Free Descriptor and Buffer Starvation Count Register 6  
Queue Manager Free Descriptor and Buffer Starvation Count Register 7  
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Base Address Register 1  
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Base Address Register 2  
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 0 Size Register  
Reserved  
C021h  
FDBSC1  
C024h  
FDBSC2  
C025h  
FDBSC3  
C028h  
FDBSC4  
C029h  
FDBSC5  
C02Ch  
FDBSC6  
C02Dh  
FDBSC7  
C080h  
LRAM0BASE1  
LRAM0BASE2  
LRAM0SIZE  
-
C081h  
C084h  
C085h  
C088h  
LRAM1BASE1  
LRAM1BASE2  
PEND0  
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 1 Base Address Register 1  
Queue Manager Linking RAM Region 1 Base Address Register 2  
Queue Manager Queue Pending 0  
C089h  
C090h  
C091h  
PEND1  
Queue Manager Queue Pending 1  
C094h  
PEND2  
Queue Manager Queue Pending 2  
C095h  
PEND3  
Queue Manager Queue Pending 3  
C098h  
PEND4  
Queue Manager Queue Pending 4  
C099h  
PEND5  
Queue Manager Queue Pending 5  
D000h + 16 × R  
D001h + 16 × R  
D004h + 16 × R  
D005h + 16 × R  
E000h + 16 × N  
E001h + 16 × N  
E004h + 16 × N  
E005h + 16 × N  
E008h + 16 × N  
E009h + 16 × N  
E00Ch + 16 × N  
E00Dh + 16 × N  
E800h + 16 × N  
E801h + 16 × N  
E804h + 16 × N  
E805h + 16 × N  
E808h + 16 × N  
E809h + 16 × N  
QMEMRBASE1[R]  
QMEMRBASE2[R]  
QMEMRCTRL1[R]  
QMEMRCTRL2[R]  
CTRL1A  
Queue Manager Memory Region R Base Address Register 1 (R = 0 to 15)  
Queue Manager Memory Region R Base Address Register 2 (R = 0 to 15)  
Queue Manager Memory Region R Control Register 1 (R = 0 to 15)  
Queue Manager Memory Region R Control Register 2 (R = 0 to 15)  
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1A (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2A (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1B (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2B (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1C (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2C (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 1D (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Control Register 2D (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1A (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2A (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1B (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2B (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 1C (N = 0 to 63)  
Queue Manager Queue N Status Register 2C (N = 0 to 63)  
CTRL2A  
CTRL1B  
CTRL2B  
CTRL1C  
CTRL2C  
CTRL1D  
CTRL2D  
QSTAT1A  
QSTAT2A  
QSTAT1B  
QSTAT2B  
QSTAT1C  
QSTAT2C  
180  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.3 Identification  
6.3.1 JTAG Identification  
Table 6-31. JTAG Identification Register  
REGISTER NAME  
CPU WORD ADDRESS  
ACRONYM  
JTAGID  
COMMENTS  
Read-only. Provides 32-bit  
JTAG ID of the device.  
N/A  
JTAG Identification Register  
The JTAG ID register is a read-only register that identifies to the customer the JTAG and Device ID. The  
register hex value for the device is: 0x0B95 602F. For the actual register bit names and their associated  
bit field descriptions, see Figure 6-2 and Table 6-32.  
31-28  
VARIANT (4-Bit)  
R-0000  
27-12  
11-1  
0
PART NUMBER (16-Bit)  
R-1011 1001 0101 0110  
MANUFACTURER (11-Bit)  
R-0000 0010 111  
LSB  
R-1  
LEGEND: R = Read, W = Write, n = value at reset  
Figure 6-2. JTAG ID Register Description - Register Value - 0x0B95 602F  
Table 6-32. JTAG Identification Register Selection Bit Descriptions  
BIT  
31:28  
27:12  
11:1  
0
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
VARIANT  
Variant (4-Bit) value: 0000  
Part Number (16-Bit) value: 1011 1001 0101 0110  
PART NUMBER  
MANUFACTURER Manufacturer (11-Bit) value: 0000 0010 111  
LSB LSB. This bit is read as a "1".  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
181  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
6.4 Boot Modes  
The device supports the following boot modes:  
NOR Flash  
NAND Flash  
SPI 16- and 24-bit EEPROM or Flash  
I2C 16-bit EEPROM  
eMMC Controller/MMC/SD/SDHC Card  
USB  
UART  
McSPI  
UHPI  
The boot mode or method is determined by checking the value of the BootMode[5:0] bits in the BootMode  
register ([1C34h]) and the CLKSELSTAT bit in the CCR2 register ([1C1Fh]), which reflect the  
configurations of the EM_A[20:15] or GP[26:21] pins and CLK_SEL pin at reset. See Section 5.7.3.4.2,  
BootMode Implementation and Requirements.  
Figure 6-3. BootMode Register [1C34h]  
15  
11  
10  
5
4
0
Reserved  
R-0  
BootMode[5:0]  
Reserved  
R-0  
R-EM_A[20:15]/GP[26:21]  
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset  
Table 6-33. BootMode Register Field Descriptions  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
15:11  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Read-only bits that reflect the latched state of the EM_A[20:19] or GP[26:25] pins on the 10th clock  
edge after RESET pin goes high.(1) The Bootloader reads this register value to determine the  
frequency of the clock input to the system clock generator. The bootloader requires this frequency  
to appropriately program the system clock generator and other peripheral clock dividers.  
00:  
CLK_SEL = 0: 12 MHz via the on-chip USB oscillator  
CLK_SEL = 1: 11.2896 MHz via the CLK_IN pin  
01:  
10:9  
BootMode[5:4]  
CLK_SEL = 0: 12 MHz via the on-chip USB oscillator  
CLK_SEL = 1: 12.00 MHz or 12.288 MHz via the CLK_IN pin  
10:  
CLK_SEL = 0: 12 MHz via the on-chip USB oscillator  
CLK_SEL = 1: 16.8 MHz via the CLK_IN pin  
11:  
CLK_SEL = 0: 12 MHz via the on-chip USB oscillator  
CLK_SEL = 1: 19.2 MHz via the CLK_IN pin  
(1) The RESET pin is asynchronous to the selected system clock (CLKIN or USB_OSC). The pin could be 10, 11, or even 12 clock cycles  
after the rising edge of RESETN due to possible metastability.  
182  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
Table 6-33. BootMode Register Field Descriptions (continued)  
Bit  
Name  
Description  
Read-only bits that reflect the latched state of the EM_A[18:15] or GP[24:21] pins on the first clock  
edge after RESET pin goes high. The Bootloader determines boot mode based on this value.  
0000: Boot mode: 16-bit NOR flash data boot, system clock generator is in bypass mode.  
0001: Boot mode: 16-bit or 8-bit NAND flash data boot, system clock generator is in bypass mode.  
0010: Boot mode: UART 9600 baud boot, system clock generator output = input clock x 3  
0011: Boot mode: UART 57600 baud boot, system clock generator output = input clock x 3  
0100: Boot mode: UART 115200 baud boot, system clock generator output = input clock x 3  
0101: Boot mode: SPI 16-bit or 24-bit address Boot (SPI_CLK < 1 MHz), system clock generator  
output = input clock x 3  
0110: Boot mode: SPI 16-bit or 24-bit address Boot (SPI_CLK < 10 MHz), system clock generator  
output = input clock x 3  
0111: Polling Mode 2: Check for valid boot image from peripherals in the following order: NOR,  
NAND, SPI, I2C, SD/SDHC/MMC/eMMC Controller 0, McSPI, and UART/USB (infinite retry).(2)  
8:5  
BootMode[3:0]  
1000: Boot mode: I2C 16-bit address Boot, 400 kHz, system clock generator is in bypass mode.  
1001: Boot mode: SD or SDHC, MMC, or eMMC Controller 0 card boot, system clock generator is  
in bypass mode  
1010: Boot mode: SD or SDHC, MMC, or eMMC Controller 1 card boot, system clock generator is  
in bypass mode  
1011: Polling Mode 1: Check for valid boot image from peripherals in the following order: NOR,  
NAND, SPI, I2C, SD/SDHC/MMC/eMMC Controller 0, SD/SDHC/MMC/eMMC Controller 1, and  
UART/USB (infinite retry).(2)  
1100: Boot mode: UHPI 16-bit multiplexed mode boot, system clock generator output = input clock  
x 3  
1101: Boot mode: McSPI 24-bit address serial flash at 10-MHz mode  
1110: Boot mode: McSPI 24-bit address serial flash at 40-MHz mode  
1111: Boot mode: USB boot, system clock generator output = input clock x 3  
Reserved  
4:0  
Reserved  
(2) If MMCx_CMD is low, the bootloader continues to check for a valid boot image in the card controller. MMCx_CMD must be high or  
toggle in order to move from the card controller to the next peripheral for a valid boot image.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
183  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Figure 6-4. Clock Configuration Register 2 (CCR2) [1C1Fh]  
15  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
R-0  
Reserved  
R-x  
Reserved  
R/W-0  
CLKSELSTAT  
R-0  
Reserved  
R-0  
SYSCLKSEL  
R/W-0  
LEGEND: R/W = Read/Write; R = Read only; -n = value after reset; -x = value undetermined  
Table 6-34. Clock Configuration Register 2 (CCR2) Field Descriptions  
BIT  
15:6  
5:4  
3
NAME  
VALUE  
DESCRIPTION  
RESERVED  
RESERVED  
RESERVED  
0
0
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved. This bit must be written to 0.  
CLK_SEL pin status bit. This reflects the state of the CLK_SEL pin.  
CLK_SEL pin is low (USB Oscillator clock selected).  
CLK_SEL pin is high (CLKIN input clock selected).  
Reserved. This bit must be written to 0.  
2
1
CLKSELSTAT  
RESERVED  
0
1h  
0
System clock source select bit. This bit is used to select between the two main clocking modes  
for the DSP: bypass and PLL mode.  
In bypass mode, the system clock generator is bypassed and the system clock is set to either  
CLKIN or the USB oscillator output (as determined by the CLKSEL pin).  
0
SYSCLKSEL  
In PLL mode, the system clock is set to the output of the system clock generator.  
Bypass mode is selected.  
0
1
PLL mode is selected.  
184  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
6.4.1 Invocation Sequence  
The boot sequence is a process by which the device's on-chip memory is loaded with program and data  
sections from an external image file (in flash memory, for example). The boot sequence also allows,  
optionally, for some of the device's internal registers to be programmed with predetermined values. The  
boot sequence is started automatically after each device reset. For more details on device reset, see  
Section 5.7.3, Reset.  
This device can boot from EMIF, UART, SPI, I2C, eMMC, MMC, SD, SDHC, UHPI, McSPI, or USB  
interface. For a complete description of the boot options, see Using the TMS320C5517 Bootloader  
[literature number SPRABP1].  
The peripheral interface that the device boots from is determined by the configuration of the EM_A[20:15]  
or GP[26:21] pins at reset. The values of EM_A[20:15] or GP[26:21] are latched at reset into the  
BootMode[5:0] bits in the BootMode register (1C34h) and the Bootloader reads the bits to determine a  
peripheral interface for booting.  
The on-chip Bootloader allows the DSP registers to be configured during the boot process, if the optional  
register configuration section is present in the boot image. For more information on the boot modes  
supported, see Section 6.4, Boot Modes.  
See Figure 6-5, Boot Timing, and the notes at the bottom of the figure, for an illustration of the boot  
sequence.  
POWERGOOD  
(internal)  
(3)  
(1)  
RESETN  
(2)  
(POWERGOOD &&  
RESETN)  
(internal)  
CLKIN or  
USB_Osc  
System Reset  
(internal)  
(DSP & Periphs)  
22 clocks  
65535 clocks if CLK_SEL=1,  
131071 clocks if CLK_SEL=0  
(1) Enter the boot sequence described in boot sequence Step 1.  
(2) The maximum wait time from reset between (1) and (2) until the reset is released is 20 ms.  
(3) The bootloaded code starts. The best-case time is 200 ms from the start of the boot sequence (see note 2) due to the BG_CAP  
settling time in Step 18. The worst-case time is the loading time for the bootloaded code when it exceeds 200 ms.  
Figure 6-5. Boot Timing  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
185  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
The device bootloader follows the following steps:  
1. Immediately after reset, the CPU fetches the reset vector from 0xFFFF00. MP or MC is 0 by default, so  
0xFFFF00 is mapped to internal ROM. The PLL is in bypass mode. The input clock is assumed to be  
in the range of 11.2896–19.2 MHz.  
2. Set CLKOUT slew rate control to slow slew rate.  
3. Idle all peripherals and HWA.  
4. Apply manufacturing trim to the bandgap references.  
5. Disable CLKOUT.  
6. The Bootloader configures the system clock generator based on boot mode (see Section 6.4, Boot  
Modes, for details on boot mode) and enables TIMER0 to count the settling time of BG_CAP.  
Bootloader will try this main loop infinitely if it cannot get the correct boot signature.  
[Main Loop]  
7. If McSPI boot, test for 24-bit McSPI flash boot on SPI_CS[0] using a clock-rate close to, but not over,  
10 MHz, or a clock-rate close to, but not over, 40 MHz based on the boot mode. Set Serial Port 1  
Mode on the External Bus Selection Register to 1:  
(a) Check the first two bytes read from the boot table for a boot signature match using 24-bit address  
mode.  
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 18.  
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.  
(d) Attempt McSPI Serial Memory boot and go to step 19.  
8. If UHPI boot, the external host has to communicate in 16-bit multiplexed mode:  
Note: The bootloader sets up the UHPI slave to handshake with an external UHPI master.  
(a) The external host power up the device and must wait for the settling time of BG_CAP to elapse  
before executing the next step.  
(b) The bootloader waits for the external host to finish transferring the data.  
(c) External Host writes to device on-chip memory. The code or data sections are directly loaded to  
the desired locations on device by the external host.  
(d) External Host interrupts the device through the DSP_INT in the UHPIC register after code transfer  
complete.  
(e) Bootloader branches to the entry point. The entry point is located in the last block of SARAM, word  
addresses 0x27FFA and 0x27FFB. To ensure data integrity, the external host writes two 16-bit  
signatures in 0x27FFC and 0x27FFD with respective values of 0x1234 and 0xABCD. If the  
address of the entry point is in DARAM space or incorrect signatures are detected in 0x27FFC and  
0x27FFD, go to step 18.  
(f) Go to step 19.  
9. If NOR boot, test for NOR boot on all asynchronous CS spaces (EM_CS[2:5]) with 16-bit access:  
Note: The booatloader requires NOR flash that supports a reset command (0xF0 on data).  
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot signature.  
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 18.  
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.  
(d) Attempt NOR boot and go to step 19.  
10. If NAND boot, test for NAND boot on all asynchronous CS spaces (EM_CS[2:5]) with 16-bit access:  
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match. If the boot signature is not  
valid, read the first 2 bytes again using 8-bit access on all asynchronous CS spaces (EM_CS[2:5])  
(b) If the boot signature is still not valid, go to step 18.  
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.  
(d) Attempt NAND boot and go to step 19.  
186  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
11. If SPI boot, test for 16- and 24-bit SPI EEPROM or Flash boot on SPI_CS[0] using a clock-rate close  
to, but not over, 1 MHz, or a clock-rate close to, but not over, 10 MHz based on the boot mode. Set  
Parallel Port Mode on the External Bus Selection Register to 5, then set to 6:  
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match using 16-bit address mode.  
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, read the first 2 bytes again using 24-bit address mode.  
(c) If the boot signature is not valid from either case (16-bit and 24-bit address modes), go to step 18.  
(d) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.  
(e) Attempt SPI Serial Memory boot and go to step 19.  
12. If I2C boot, test for 16-bit I2C EEPROM boot with a 7-bit slave address 0x50 and 400-kHz clock rate.  
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match using 16-bit address mode.  
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 18.  
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.  
(d) Attempt I2C EEPROM boot and go to step 19.  
13. If eMMC, MMC, SD, or SDHC Controller 0 boot, program SD0 and search for the filename  
“bootimg.bin" under the first partition’s root directory. For SD or SDHC, the device must comply with  
SD/SDHC specification v1.1 or v2.0 for FAT16 or FAT32 using SD or SDHC unsecure mode.  
If eMMC, the bootloader will check the boot partition for a bootable image before checking the root  
directory for "bootimg.bin". For eMMC or MMC, the device must comply with eMMC/MMC specification  
v4.3 for FAT32 using eMMC or MMC nonencrypted mode.  
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match.  
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 18.  
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.  
(d) Attempt eMMC, MMC, SD, or SDHC boot and go to step 19.  
14. If eMMC, MMC, SD, or SDHC Controller 1 boot, program SD1 and search for the filename  
“bootimg.bin" under the first partition’s root directory. For SD or SDHC, the device must comply with  
SD/SDHC specification v1.1 or v2.0 for FAT16 or FAT32 using SD or SDHC unsecure mode.  
If eMMC, the bootloader will check the boot partition for a bootable image before checking the root  
directory for "bootimg.bin". For eMMC or MMC the device must comply with eMMC/MMC specification  
v4.3 for FAT32 using eMMC or MMC nonencrypted mode.  
Note: Do not boot from eMMC if no valid image is present. Booting from eMMC without a valid image  
will put the card into an inactive state.  
(a) Check the first two bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match.  
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, go to step 18.  
(c) Set Register Configuration, if present in boot image.  
(d) Attempt eMMC, MMC, SD, or SDHC boot and go to step 19.  
15. If UART boot, set PLL to multiply the input clock by 3 and adjust TIMER0 for the settling time of  
BG_CAP. Program UART with 9600-, 57600-, or 115200-baud based on boot mode, 8-bit data, odd  
parity, one stop-bit, and auto flow control using CTS or RTS:  
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match.  
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, return to the beginning of step 15.  
(c) Attempt UART boot and go to step 19.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Detailed Description  
187  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
16. If USB boot, set PLL to multiply the input clock by 3 and adjust TIMER0 for the settling time of  
BG_CAP. Use USB on endpoint 1. The device has vendor-ID 0x0451 and product-ID 0x9010 and uses  
Bulk Endpoint 1 OUT to receive the boot image from the USB host:  
(a) Check the first 2 bytes read from boot table for a boot signature match.  
(b) If the boot signature is not valid, return to the beginning of step 16.  
(c) Attempt USB boot and go to step 19.  
17. If polling mode, there is a fixed order of supported boot devices on which a valid image is checked.  
Polling Mode 1:  
(a) NOR  
(b) NAND  
(c) SPI  
(d) I2C  
(e) SD/SDHC, MMC/eMMC Controller 0 (see note below)  
(f) SD/SDHC, MMC/eMMC Controller 1 (see note below)  
(g) UART/USB  
Polling Mode 2:  
(a) NOR  
(b) NAND  
(c) SPI  
(d) I2C  
(e) SD/SDHC, MMC/eMMC Controller 0 (see note below)  
(f) McSPI  
(g) UART/USB  
The first device with a valid boot image is used to load and execute user code. If none of these  
devices has a valid boot image, the bootloader modifies the CPU clock setup as follows:  
If CLK_SEL=0, the bootloader powers up the PLL and sets its frequency to 36 MHz (12 MHz  
multiplied by 3).  
If CLK_SEL=1, the bootloader powers up the PLL and sets it to multiply CLKIN by 3.  
This change in the CPU clock setup is required to meet the minimum frequency needed by the USB  
module. After the CPU clock setup changes, the bootloader enters an endless loop and checks for  
data received on the UART/USB. If a valid boot image is received, the image is used to load and  
execute user code. If no valid boot image is received, the bootloader continues to monitor the boot  
devices. If the time since the trim setup exceeds 200 ms during this endless loop, the bootloader re-  
enables the low-voltage detection circuit to ensure the circuit is not disabled for an extended period.  
Note: If MMCx_CMD is low, the bootloader continues to check for a valid boot image in the card  
controller. MMCx_CMD must be high or toggle in order to move from the card controller to the next  
peripheral for a valid boot image.  
18. If the boot signature is not valid, toggle XF when the retry count reaches 100.  
19. Copy the boot image sections to system memory. Then set the XF port low to indicate that boot-up is  
complete. Ensure the settling time of BG_CAP has elapsed since step 6 before proceeding to execute  
the bootloaded code.  
20. Jump to the specified entry point.  
6.4.2 DSP Resources Used By the Bootloader  
The Bootloader uses SARAM block 31 for the storing of temporary data. This block of memory is reserved  
during the boot process. However, after the boot process is complete, it can be used by the user  
application.  
188  
Detailed Description  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
7 Device and Documentation Support  
7.1 Device Support  
7.1.1 Development Support  
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C55x DSP platform, including tools to  
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully  
integrate and debug software and hardware modules. The tool's support documentation is electronically  
available within the Code Composer Studio Integrated Development Environment (IDE).  
The following products support development of TMS320C55x fixed-point DSP-based applications:  
Software Development Tools:  
Code Composer Studio Integrated Development Environment (IDE): Version 5.5.0 or later  
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools  
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP/BIOS Version 5.33 or later), which provides the basic  
run-time target software needed to support any DSP application.  
Hardware Development Tools:  
Extended Development System ( XDS™) Emulator  
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C55x DSP platform, visit the Texas  
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For  
information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.  
7.1.2 Device Nomenclature  
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all  
DSP devices and support tools. Each DSP commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX,  
TMP, or TMS (for example, TMS320C5517AZCHA20). Texas Instruments recommends two of three  
possible prefix designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary  
stages of product development from engineering prototypes (TMX or TMDX) through fully qualified  
production devices or tools (TMS or TMDS).  
Device development evolutionary flow:  
TMX  
TMP  
TMS  
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical  
specifications.  
Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed  
quality and reliability verification.  
Fully-qualified production device.  
Support tool development evolutionary flow:  
TMDX  
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal  
qualification testing.  
TMDS  
Fully qualified development-support product.  
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following  
disclaimer:  
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."  
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and  
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Device and Documentation Support  
189  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard  
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production  
system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are  
to be used.  
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the  
package type (for example, ZCH), and the temperature range (for example, "Blank" is the commercial  
temperature range).  
Figure 7-1 provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any DSP platform member.  
A
TMS 320  
C
5517  
ZCH  
20  
PREFIX  
DEVICE MAXIMUM OPERATING FREQUENCY  
TMX = Experimental device  
TMS = Qualified device  
20 = 75 MHz at 1.05 V, 175 MHz at 1.3 V, 200 MHz at 1.4 V  
DEVICE FAMILY  
TEMPERATURE RANGE  
320 = TMS320™ DSP family  
Blank = –10° C to 70° C, Commercial Temperature  
A = –40° C to 85° C, Industrial Temperature  
TECHNOLOGY  
C = Dual-supply CMOS  
PACKAGE TYPE  
DEVICE  
ZCH = 196-pin plastic BGA, with Pb-Free  
soldered balls [Green]  
C55x™ DSP: 5517  
SILICON REVISION  
A = Revision 2.1  
A. For actual device part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, see the TI website (http://www.ti.com)  
Figure 7-1. Device Nomenclature  
190  
Device and Documentation Support  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
 
TMS320C5517  
www.ti.com.cn  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
7.2 Documentation Support  
7.2.1 Related Documentation  
The following documents describe the DSP. To access the documents, click the literature number (e.g.,  
SPRUH16) or wiki link.  
The current documentation that describes the DSP, related peripherals, and other technical collateral, is  
available in the product folder at www.ti.com.  
SPRUH16 TMS320C5517 Digital Signal Processor Technical Reference Manual. Collection of  
documents providing detailed information on the device including system control, FFT  
implementation, and memory access. Detailed information on the device as well as a  
functional description of the peripherals supported is also included.  
SPRZ383  
TMS320C5517 Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processor Silicon Errata. Describes the known  
exceptions to the functional specifications for this device.  
SPRABP1 Using the TMS320C5517 Bootloader. Describes features of the on-chip ROM for this  
device, as well as descriptions of how to interface with possible boot devices and generating  
a boot image to store on an external device.  
SWPU073 TMS320C55x DSP v3.x CPU Reference Guide. Describes more detailed information on the  
C55x CPU.  
Wiki  
C5505/15/35 Schematic Checklist. Describes recommendations for the device applicable to  
unused pins, clocking, power, reset, and peripherals. Description also includes critical  
connections, DDR2 routing checklist, and debug considerations, and more.  
7.3 社区资源  
下列链接提供到 TI 社区资源的连接。 链接的内容由各个分销商按照原样提供。 这些内容并不构成 TI 技术  
规范和标准且不一定反映 TI 的观点;请见 TI 使用条款。  
TI E2E™ 在线社区 TI 工程师对工程师 (E2E) 社区。 此社区的创建目的是为了促进工程师之间协作。 在  
e2e.ti.com 中,您可以咨询问题、共享知识、探索思路,在同领域工程师的帮助下解决问题。  
德州仪器 (TI) 嵌入式处理器维基网站 德州仪器 (TI) 嵌入式处理器维基网站。 此网站的建立是为了帮助开发  
人员从德州仪器 (TI) 的嵌入式处理器入门并且也为了促进与这些器件相关的硬件和软件的总体  
知识的创新和增长。  
7.4 商标  
C5000, eXpressDSP, Code Composer Studio, DSP/BIOS, RTDX, XDS510, XDS560, XDS, E2E are  
trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
7.5 静电放电警告  
ESD 可能会损坏该集成电路。德州仪器 (TI) 建议通过适当的预防措施处理所有集成电路。如果不遵守正确的处理措施和安装程序 , 可  
能会损坏集成电路。  
ESD 的损坏小至导致微小的性能降级 , 大至整个器件故障。 精密的集成电路可能更容易受到损坏 , 这是因为非常细微的参数更改都可  
能会导致器件与其发布的规格不相符。  
7.6 Glossary  
SLYZ022 TI Glossary.  
This glossary lists and explains terms, acronyms and definitions.  
Copyright © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Device and Documentation Support  
191  
Product Folder Links: TMS320C5517  
TMS320C5517  
ZHCS222C AUGUST 2012REVISED APRIL 2014  
www.ti.com.cn  
8 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information  
The following packaging information and addendum reflect the most current data available for the  
designated device. This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document.  
192  
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information  
版权 © 2012–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
提交文档反馈意见  
产品主页链接: TMS320C5517  
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM  
www.ti.com  
7-Oct-2021  
PACKAGING INFORMATION  
Orderable Device  
Status Package Type Package Pins Package  
Eco Plan  
Lead finish/  
Ball material  
MSL Peak Temp  
Op Temp (°C)  
Device Marking  
Samples  
Drawing  
Qty  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4/5)  
(6)  
TMS320C5517AZCH20  
TMS320C5517AZCHA20  
TMS32C5517AZCHA20R  
ACTIVE  
ACTIVE  
ACTIVE  
NFBGA  
NFBGA  
NFBGA  
ZCH  
ZCH  
ZCH  
196  
196  
196  
184  
184  
RoHS & Green  
RoHS & Green  
Call TI  
Level-3-260C-168 HR  
Level-3-260C-168 HR  
Level-3-260C-168 HR  
-10 to 70  
-40 to 85  
-40 to 85  
17AZCH20  
Call TI  
Call TI  
17AZCHA20  
17AZCHA20  
1000 RoHS & Green  
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:  
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.  
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.  
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.  
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.  
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.  
(2) RoHS: TI defines "RoHS" to mean semiconductor products that are compliant with the current EU RoHS requirements for all 10 RoHS substances, including the requirement that RoHS substance  
do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, "RoHS" products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. TI may  
reference these types of products as "Pb-Free".  
RoHS Exempt: TI defines "RoHS Exempt" to mean products that contain lead but are compliant with EU RoHS pursuant to a specific EU RoHS exemption.  
Green: TI defines "Green" to mean the content of Chlorine (Cl) and Bromine (Br) based flame retardants meet JS709B low halogen requirements of <=1000ppm threshold. Antimony trioxide based  
flame retardants must also meet the <=1000ppm threshold requirement.  
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.  
(4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.  
(5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation  
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.  
(6)  
Lead finish/Ball material - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead finish/Ball material values may wrap to two  
lines if the finish value exceeds the maximum column width.  
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information  
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and  
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.  
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.  
Addendum-Page 1  
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM  
www.ti.com  
7-Oct-2021  
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.  
Addendum-Page 2  
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION  
www.ti.com  
5-Jan-2022  
TRAY  
Chamfer on Tray corner indicates Pin 1 orientation of packed units.  
*All dimensions are nominal  
Device  
Package Package Pins SPQ Unit array  
Max  
matrix temperature  
(°C)  
L (mm)  
W
K0  
P1  
CL  
CW  
Name  
Type  
(mm) (µm) (mm) (mm) (mm)  
TMS320C5517AZCH20  
ZCH  
ZCH  
NFBGA  
NFBGA  
196  
196  
184  
184  
8 x 23  
8 x 23  
150  
150  
315 135.9 7620 13.4  
315 135.9 7620 13.4  
10.1 19.65  
10.1 19.65  
TMS320C5517AZCHA2  
0
Pack Materials-Page 1  
重要声明和免责声明  
TI“按原样提供技术和可靠性数据(包括数据表)、设计资源(包括参考设计)、应用或其他设计建议、网络工具、安全信息和其他资源,  
不保证没有瑕疵且不做出任何明示或暗示的担保,包括但不限于对适销性、某特定用途方面的适用性或不侵犯任何第三方知识产权的暗示担  
保。  
这些资源可供使用 TI 产品进行设计的熟练开发人员使用。您将自行承担以下全部责任:(1) 针对您的应用选择合适的 TI 产品,(2) 设计、验  
证并测试您的应用,(3) 确保您的应用满足相应标准以及任何其他功能安全、信息安全、监管或其他要求。  
这些资源如有变更,恕不另行通知。TI 授权您仅可将这些资源用于研发本资源所述的 TI 产品的应用。严禁对这些资源进行其他复制或展示。  
您无权使用任何其他 TI 知识产权或任何第三方知识产权。您应全额赔偿因在这些资源的使用中对 TI 及其代表造成的任何索赔、损害、成  
本、损失和债务,TI 对此概不负责。  
TI 提供的产品受 TI 的销售条款ti.com 上其他适用条款/TI 产品随附的其他适用条款的约束。TI 提供这些资源并不会扩展或以其他方式更改  
TI 针对 TI 产品发布的适用的担保或担保免责声明。  
TI 反对并拒绝您可能提出的任何其他或不同的条款。IMPORTANT NOTICE  
邮寄地址:Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265  
Copyright © 2022,德州仪器 (TI) 公司  

相关型号:

TMS320C5532

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMS320C5532AZAY05

低功耗 C55x 定点 DSP- 高达 100MHz | ZAY | 144 | -10 to 70
TI

TMS320C5532AZAY10

低功耗 C55x 定点 DSP- 高达 100MHz | ZAY | 144 | -10 to 70
TI

TMS320C5532AZAYA05

低功耗 C55x 定点 DSP- 高达 100MHz | ZAY | 144 | -40 to 85
TI

TMS320C5532AZAYA10

低功耗 C55x 定点 DSP- 高达 100MHz | ZAY | 144 | -40 to 85
TI

TMS320C5532AZHH05

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMS320C5532AZHH10

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMS320C5532AZHHA05

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMS320C5532AZHHA10

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMS320C5533

Fixed-Point Digital Signal Processors
TI

TMS320C5533AZAY05

低功耗 C55x 定点 DSP- 高达 100MHz、USB | ZAY | 144 | -10 to 70
TI

TMS320C5533AZAY10

低功耗 C55x 定点 DSP- 高达 100MHz、USB | ZAY | 144 | -10 to 70
TI